You are on page 1of 368

Commissioning

System
ITMN - OFFLINE
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Important Notice on Product Safety


Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment. Some of the
parts can also have elevated operating temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in property damage.
Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950. All equipment connected has to comply with the
applicable safety standards.

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 1997


Issued by the Public Communication Network Group
Hofmannstrae 51
D-81359 Mnchen
Technical modifications possible.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

AD 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Issues
Change indications (Ind.):
N = new;
G = modified;
Document
Register

Titel

0 = deleted;
Page(s)

ADMIN

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 12


ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 6
Register

2
20
12
44
30
10
22
6
16
6
22
22
20
36
40
6
38
54
4
8

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2

G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
N
N
0
N
N
0
N
G
G

TAB

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . TABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2


Register

2 G

PROC

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROCIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...


ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:SYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:SN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CCNC_CCS7 . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DAS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DLUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:DLUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN-OFFLINE . . . . . . . PROC:CP113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CP113D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MTD_STC2922 . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN-OFFLINE . . . . . . . PROC:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:CP113C/CR . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MTD_STC2925 . . . . . . . . . 1...
ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . PROC:MTD_HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...
Register

2 G
2 G

TL

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2


Register

Issue/Ind.

2 G

APP

ITMN - OFFLINE . . . . . . APP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1... 2

2 G

This document consists of a total of 368 Pages

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

AD 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

AD 4

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 1
Overview of functional areas and subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 1
CE Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 2
Required knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 2
Locating Modules and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 2
Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
List of Universal Measurement and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
System Voltages in the SSS-NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
Error Reports on the Installation Test Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Dealing with Defective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Procedure in the Event of Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Procedure in the Event of Serious Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 4
Checking the Scope of Delivery and the Installation Work . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 5
Interpretation of Exchange Configuration Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 6

Task List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL - 1

3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17

Procedures (PROCIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCIN - 1


Off-line Installation of Common Clock Generator . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 1
Off-line Installation of Message Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 1
Off-line Installation Test of the System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 1
Off-line Installation of Switching Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SN - 1
Off-line Installation of Common Channel Signaling
Network Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
Off-line Installation of Line Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 1
Test Procedure for DAS 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DAS300 - 1
Off-line Installation of Data Service Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 1
Off-line Installation of modems for 3.1 kHz
audio bearer services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 1
Off-line Installation of Digital Line Unit
(Frames D / E / F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 1
Testing DLUB with the TESMOD2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 1
Off-line Installation of Digital Line Unit
(Frames G / E / F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 1
Off-line Installation of CP113D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 1
Switching on MTD STC 2922 of Storage Tek . . . . . .PROC:MTDSTC2922 - 1
Off-line Installation of CP113C/CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113C/CR - 1
Switching on MTD STC 2925 of Storage Tek . . . . . .PROC:MTDSTC2925 - 1
Switching on the MTD HP 88781A of Hewlett Packard . . . PROC:MTDHP - 1

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABIN - 1

Appendix (APP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP - 1

3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

AD 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

AD 6

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Illustrations
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

1.1.1
1.4.1
2.1.1
3.0.1
3.1.1

Fig. 3.1.2
Fig. 3.1.3
Fig. 3.1.4
Fig. 3.1.5
Fig. 3.1.6
Fig. 3.1.7
Fig. 3.2.1
Fig. 3.2.2
Fig. 3.2.3
Fig. 3.3.1
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.3.15
3.3.16
3.3.17

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Functional areas in a network node together with the subsystems . . IN - 1


Meaning of the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN - 3
Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL - 1
Elements used in the procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCIN - 2
Rack: MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for CCG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 2
Rack: SN/MB/LTGM
(Fuse Assignment for CCG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 3
Rack CE
(Fuse Assignment for CCG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 4
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)
(Plesiochronous mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 8
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)
(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 9
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)
(Plesiochronous mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 10
Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)
(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 11
Rack: MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 2
Rack: SN/MB/LTGM
(Fuse Assignment for MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 4
Rack CE
(Fuse Assignment for MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 6
Rack R:MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for SYP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 2
Rack R:CE (Fuse Assignment for SYP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 3
Rack R:SE (Fuse Assignment for SYP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 4
Position of the SYP in the EWSD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 6
Location of the USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC . . . .PROC:SYP - 8
Location of the USER PROM on module PU:SYCR.. . . . . .PROC:SYP - 8
Overview of system panel connections in F:SYPC . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 9
Overview of system panel connections in F:SMSC(C) . . .PROC:SYP - 10
Front view of the system panel display SYPD . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 12
SYPD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 13
Options for the connection of the system
panel display SYPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 15
E&M signaling (4-wire transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 16
Loop signaling (2-wire transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 17
SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 18
SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 19
Block diagram of the SYPD and its interfaces . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 21
R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SMSC
for SYPD-0 - SYPD-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 22

AD 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Fig. 3.3.18 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SYPC


for SYPD-0 - SYPD-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 23
Fig. 3.3.19 R/T and E+M interfaces in frame SYPC
for SYPD-5 - SYPD-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 24
Fig. 3.3.20 Methods of connecting alarm lines to the MDF. . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 26
Fig. 3.3.21 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of cable 223
(32 wires) from the MDF to the SYP (module RM:EA) . . . PROC:SYP - 27
Fig. 3.3.22 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of module
T/RM:SYCR from the MDF to the SYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 28
Fig. 3.3.23 Assignment of external alarms on the horizontal MDF . . . PROC:SYP - 28
Fig. 3.3.24 Assignment of external alarms on the vertical MDF . . . . . PROC:SYP - 29
Fig. 3.3.25 Connections on the jumper field for alarm output . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 31
Fig. 3.3.26 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding on module TXA:SYPC. . .
PROC:SYP - 32
Fig. 3.3.27 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding
on module T/RM:SYCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SYP - 33
Fig. 3.4.1 Rack R:CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 2
Fig. 3.4.2 SN Fuses / Frames and Modules in R:CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 3
Fig. 3.4.3 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 4
Fig. 3.4.4 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 5
Fig. 3.4.5 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 6
Fig. 3.4.6 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 7
Fig. 3.4.7 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 8
Fig. 3.4.8 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 9
Fig. 3.4.9 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 10
Fig. 3.4.10 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 11
Fig. 3.4.11 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 12
Fig. 3.4.12 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 13
Fig. 3.4.13 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 14
Fig. 3.4.14 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 15
Fig. 3.4.15 Frame SSG(B) for SN (126 LTG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 16
Fig. 3.4.16 Frame SSG(B) for SN (252 LTG..504 LTG) . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 16
Fig. 3.4.17 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 17
Fig. 3.4.18 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 18
Fig. 3.4.19 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 19
Fig. 3.4.20 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below. . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:SN - 20
Fig. 3.4.21 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from above . PROC:SN - 21
Fig. 3.4.22 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from below . PROC:SN - 22
Fig. 3.5.1
Rack R:SILTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 4
Fig. 3.5.2
Rack R:CCNP/SILTD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 5
Fig. 3.6.1 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 2
Fig. 3.6.2 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 3
Fig. 3.6.3 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 4
Fig. 3.6.4 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 5
Fig. 3.6.5 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:LTG - 6

AD 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 7


Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 8
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:OSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 9
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG
(Cable routing from above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 10
3.6.10 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG
(Cable routing from below). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 11
3.6.11 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 12
3.6.12 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 13
3.6.13 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM
(Cable routing from above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 14
3.6.14 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM
(Cable routing from below). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 15
3.6.15 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM
(Cable routing from above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 16
3.6.16 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM
(Cable routing from below). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:LTG - 17
3.7.1 Digital announcement system DAS 300 . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DAS300 - 1
3.7.2 Digital announcement system DAS 300 (rear view) . . PROC:DAS300 - 2
3.8.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 2
3.8.2 Connection of DLU to two LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 6
3.8.3 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 7
3.8.4 Connection path from DLU to LTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 8
3.8.5 Connection path from LTG to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 9
3.9.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 2
3.9.2 R:Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 3
3.9.3 Frame F:Modem (GPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 4
3.9.4 Frame F:Modem (NEUHAUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MODEM - 5
3.10.1 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-E). . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 2
3.10.2 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-D). . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 3
3.10.3 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-F) . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 4
3.10.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400. . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 6
3.10.5 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 700. . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 7
3.10.6 Connection of DLUB to two LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 9
3.10.7 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU120A) . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 10
3.10.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 11
3.10.9 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU30D) . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 12
3.10.10 Connection path from DLUB to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 12
3.10.11 Connection path from LTG to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 13
3.11.1 TESMOD2E -Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 1
3.11.2 Memory organization for DLUC and TESMOD2E . PROC:TESMOD2E - 2
3.11.3 Input and display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 5
3.12.1 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 2
3.12.2 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 3
3.12.3 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUD - 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

AD 9

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

3.12.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400 . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 6


3.12.5 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 700 . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 7
3.12.6 Connection of remote DLUD to two LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 9
3.12.7 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU120A) . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 10
3.12.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 11
3.12.9 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU30D) . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 12
3.12.10 Connection path from DLUD to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 12
3.12.11 Connection path from LTG to LTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 13
3.13.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-Complex . . . PROC:CP113D - 5
3.13.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 6
3.13.3 Module Connectors and numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 7
3.13.4 Coding switch on module MUH:1088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 8
3.13.5 Rack R:CP113A - Variant A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 9
3.13.6 Rack R:CP113B - Variant A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 10
3.13.7 Rack R:DEVD - Variant A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 11
3.15.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-ComplexPROC:CP113C/CR - 5
3.15.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 6
3.15.3 Overview IOPs (DE5/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 7
3.15.4 Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 8

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

3.15.5
3.15.6
3.15.7
3.15.8
3.15.9

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

AD 10

Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 9


Cabling of the 230V inverter DCIRC . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 10
230V AC-Connectors on Inverter DCIRC . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 11
Fan Alarm Cabling in CP113C/CR . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 12
SCSI bus cabling for MDD, MOD and MTD
(CP113C/CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 13
3.15.10 SCSI bus cabling of 2 MTDs (CP113C/CR) . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 14
3.15.11 SCSI bus cabling with MDD and MOD
(CP113C/CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 15
3.15.12 F:DEVF front view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 16
3.15.13 F:DEV(F) rear view with cabling to:
MDD, MOD and MTD (CP113C/CR) . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 16
3.15.14 Overview of MP:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 18
3.15.15 Normal display of MP:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 18
3.15.16 Rack R:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 20
3.15.17 Rack R:CP113 CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 21

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Tables
Tab. 3.1.1
Tab. 3.1.2
Tab. 3.1.3
Tab. 3.1.4
Tab. 3.1.5
Tab. 3.1.6
Tab. 3.2.1
Tab. 3.2.2
Tab. 3.2.3
Tab. 3.2.4
Tab. 3.2.5
Tab. 3.2.6
Tab. 3.3.1
Tab. 3.3.2
Tab. 3.3.3
Tab. 3.5.1
Tab. 3.5.2
Tab. 3.5.3
Tab. 3.5.4
Tab. 3.5.5
Tab. 3.5.6
Tab. 3.5.7
Tab. 3.5.8
Tab. 3.5.9
Tab. 3.8.1
Tab. 3.8.2
Tab. 3.10.1
Tab. 3.10.2
Tab. 3.10.3
Tab. 3.11.1
Tab. 3.11.2
Tab. 3.11.3
Tab. 3.11.4
Tab. 3.11.5
Tab. 3.11.6
Tab. 3.11.7
Tab. 3.11.8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

CCG Racks and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 5


Types of submodules and concerning reference
frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 5
Submodules and specification of CCGxxA . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 6
Necessary Submodules for CCGxxA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 6
Terminals for cross-joint cable 570-802/570-804. . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 7
Terminals for reference clock cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CCG - 7
Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Basic Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 3
Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 3
Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM
Basic Rack / Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 5
Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM Extension Racks . . . . PROC:MBB - 5
Fuse Assignment R:CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 7
Capacity stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:MBB - 7
Explanations on E&M and loop signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:SYP - 17
Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SYPC(A) .PROC:SYP - 34
Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SMSC(C) .PROC:SYP - 34
LEDs on M:PU:SIMP (M:PMU:SIMP) . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
LEDs on M:MH:SIMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
LEDs on M:SIPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 1
LEDs on M:PU:CPI (M:PMU:CPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 2
LEDs on M:SILTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 2
LEDs on M:SILTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 2
Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD
(shielded or unshielded version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 3
Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD
(partially shielded version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 3
Fuse assignment R:SILTD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CCNC:CCS7 - 3
Equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 3
Mounting location list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DSU - 4
Assignment of primary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 7
Assignment of secondary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 8
Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A . . . . . PROC:DLUB - 10
Switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 3
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 4
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 4
Switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 6
Test codes and test routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 7
Basic switch settings on control panel . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 10
Basic switch settings on the input and display
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 10
Mounting locations for module types
Q965, Q1101, Q838 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:TESMOD2E - 10

AD 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Tab. 3.11.9 Mounting locations for module types


Q1103, Q1192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 11
Tab. 3.11.10Mounting locations for module type Q1338 . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 11
Tab. 3.11.11DCC ID-Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 11
Tab. 3.11.12Flag-Bytes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 12
Tab. 3.11.13Module ID-Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:TESMOD2E - 12
Tab. 3.12.1 Assignment of primary fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 7
Tab. 3.12.2 Assignment of secondary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 8
Tab. 3.12.3 Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A . . . . . .PROC:DLUD - 10
Tab. 3.13.1 Coding switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 8
Tab. 3.13.2 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113A (Variant A) . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 12
Tab. 3.13.3 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113B (Variant A) . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 12
Tab. 3.13.4 Fuse Assignment of R:DEVD (Variant A) . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 13
Tab. 3.13.5 Fuse Assignment to Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 13
Tab. 3.13.6 Overview: OEM-Devices / IOPs / frames . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 14
Tab. 3.13.7 Sequence for Switching on the Frames . . . . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 14
Tab. 3.13.8 Displays after successful Hardware Startup . . . . . . . . PROC:CP113D - 15
Tab. 3.15.1 Modules with front connector for MP:CP113C . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 17
Tab. 3.15.2 Key functions of MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 19
Tab. 3.15.3 Fuse Assignment R:CP113C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 22
Tab. 3.15.4 Fuse Assignment R:DEVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 23
Tab. 3.15.5 Fuse Assignment to fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 23
Tab. 3.15.6 Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural) PROC:CP113C/CR 23
Tab. 3.15.7 Memory organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 25
Tab. 3.15.8 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CP113C . PROC:CP113C/CR 25
Tab. 3.15.9 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CE . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 26
Tab. 3.15.10Displays after successful Hardware Startup . . . . .PROC:CP113C/CR - 27

AD 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

1 Introduction
1.1

Overview of functional areas and subsystems

Access

Switching

SN
DLU

LTG

LTG

Common channel signaling

CCNC

Coordination
SYP
CP
MB

CCG

Fig. 1.1.1 Functional areas in a network node together with the subsystems

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

IN 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

1.2

CE Declaration of Conformity
Attention !
The CE Declaration of Conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the construction and
cabling is undertaken in accordance with the manual and the documents listed therein,
e.g. mounting instructions, cable lists. Where necessary account should be taken of
project-specific documents.

Deviations from the specifications or unstipulated changes during construction, e.g. the
use of cable types with lower screening values can lead to violation of the CE requirements. In such cases the conformity declaration is invalidated and the responsibility
passes to those who have caused the deviations.

1.3

Required knowledge
No specialist knowledge is required to carry out installation testing of a system with faultfree hardware and software. The experience described below is generally sufficient.

Basic training on SSS-NE (EWSD)

Practical experience in the operation of SSS-NE (EWSD systems) and clearance of


simple faults

General knowledge of how to use D900/D1800 documents such as maintenance


manuals, command manual, hardware documents

Handling of fault reports:


Hardware fault reports
Software fault reports
Document error reports

1.4

Locating Modules and Test Points


The term "mounting unit" is abbreviated to MUT and "mounting location" to MOLOC.
The black fast-on connector point to the right of the wrapping field is marked "202, and
the one to the left of the wrapping field "205".

IN 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Meaning of the test points (SIVAPAC) e.g:


(Rear of module frame)

03

205

19

Mounting units
Row in module frame
Mounting location
Terminal (wire wrap pin)
Fig. 1.4.1 Meaning of the test points
In multiple statements the individual figures are separated by a slash
e.g.: 03/05 A 205 19.

1.5

Test Equipment
The test equipment required for fault clearance is specified in the descriptions of the individual systems. A comprehensive list of these devices can be found in the list of
universal measurement and test equipment.

1.6

List of Universal Measurement and Test Equipment


The details relate to devices which are necessary for the installation of an EWSD
system. Devices from other manufacturers can be used in place of those given here, as
long as their specifications are equivalent.

1.7

Digital multimeter, e.g. Siemens VMG-3

Continuity tester, e.g. Cirtest PS 12

Test headset 600/10000 ohms

System Voltages in the SSS-NE


All the system units in an EWSD exchange require a system voltage of -40V to -75V
(peak -80V).
This means that all units which are operated via voltage converter or inverters can work
with this system voltage. These units include:
CP, MB, CCG, SYP, SN, CSC, LTG, DLU
Exceptions: All load circuits which access the system voltage directly. Care must be
taken here to ensure that the system voltage tolerances prescribed by the manufacturers are observed.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

IN 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

e.g.: DAS = Digital announcement unit

1.8

Error Reports on the Installation Test Manual


Incorrect or unclear sections of the ITMN should be described in detail in a document
error report.
The error report must be sent to TAC or VI.

1.9

Dealing with Defective Modules


If a module should prove to be defective, it should have a form attached to it (e.g. hardware fault report as supplied by the relevant administration) containing the following
information:
1. Name and code number of the module or OEM device
2. Description of the fault
The module/OEM device should then be sent to the repair center in an EWSD module
box or OEM-device container together with the form.
If possible, magnetic tape devices should be repaired on site by trained technicians.

1.10

Procedure in the Event of Faults


If faults occur in on-line operation, the system messages should be interpreted by
means of the Maintenance Manual (MMN) and/or the Command Manual (CML).
Hardware faults should be localized and cleared in accordance with the instructions in
the Maintenance Manual.

1.11

Procedure in the Event of Serious Faults


Serious faults are those which are not dealt with in the MMN. They include:

short circuits, breaks in cables


short circuits, breaks in the backplane wiring (wire wrapping, cables, foreign material)
multiple faults
faults where the MMN instructions are insufficient
software errors (general programs, exchange-specific data memories)

If there is a malfunction in a unit, this should normally be reported first to the specialist
in the installation test team, and then to the higher-level Technical Assistance Center
(TAC).

IN 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

If the installation technician is not qualified to eliminate serious faults, a fault report must
be filled out, providing the following information in detail:

1.12

description of the test step attempted


description of the system response, if possible including the fault printouts
description of any system activities taking place at the same time, e.g. work done by
other testers during modifications to hardware or software, or activities on subscriber
stations, test desk
tracer logs (if applicable)

Checking the Scope of Delivery and the Installation Work


Compare the parts list in the contract with the delivery documents and the assembled
exchange, with reference to the exchange-related documentation.

Check the installation work


The following installation work must be carried out before testing:
The EWSD racks are assembled
The internal cabling of the system is completed
The system voltage of -48V/-60V is connected and constantly available (the
emergency power supply system is operational)
The EWSD racks are equipped with the current hardware/firmware (see AKUHW
lists)

Check the software


The following should be observed:
The system APS must be available and released by the department responsible
for system acceptance
System-specific exchange acceptance DATABASE on magnetic tape
Floppy disks containing the software required for PC installation (see MMN:PC
Register BASIS)
Project-specific user-EPROM or standard PROM for SYPC
Test diagnostic command file

Check the documentation


Check that the exchange-related documentation is complete. The following are the
most important documents:

DOL
SUP
SUL
LP
LL
EP
EL
AL
CLL

Document list
Survey plan
Survey list
- Equipment layout plan
- Layout list
- Equipment plan
- Equipment list
- Allocation list
- Cable laying list

A check should also be made, using superordinate documents, to ascertain that


documents which are not system-specific are complete and up-to-date.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

IN 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

This applies in particular to: Manuals

Check the equipment


The main points for a visual check in an EWSD exchange are:

Check that the racks are complete by comparing with the equipment lists
Check that the test and auxiliary equipment is complete and functions correctly
Check the input/output devices and the background memory
Check that the system tapes and data tapes are complete, and also the correction
tape if applicable

Visual check of the entire system


The cabling and positioning of the modules should be checked against the installation instructions for the individual system components.
Check that the modules are firmly in position.

1.13

Interpretation of Exchange Configuration Documents


For overview and interpretation of the exchange configuration documents see
OGL:ECD.

IN 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

2 Task List
2.1

Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE


Content

Part in the ITMN-OFFLINE


Introduction

The INTRO section contains basic information

The CCG has a special position in the installation test sequence.


When it is tested, check wether the reference frequency(ies) is (are)
already switched on.
- Wiring of a CCGxxA module
- Plesiochronous mode/ synchronous mode
- Waiting times before testing
(The CCG should be switched on as early as possible so that the
quartz crystals can temperature-stabilize as soon as possible.

CCG

MBB

Installation test of MB(B)

SYP

Installation test of SYP and plug in the USER-PROM

Test of the SN
Malfunctions caused by cabling faults (cross joint cable), must be
located by means of diagnosis

SN

CCNC:CCS7

Installation test of CCNC

LTG

Installation test of LTG

DAS 300 TEST

DSU
MODEM

Installation test of DAS 300

DLUD

DLUB

Manual MMN:DSU/DLUB/DLUD, TAB, MOD

TESMOD2E
Maintenance of DSU/DLUB/DLUD
The section MOD is used to set switches of DSU/DLUB/DLUD

CP113C/CR

CP113D

Manual MMN:PC Register BASIS


Installation test of CP
The section MMN:PC Register BASIS is used for startup of the PC

Fig. 2.1.1 Installation Test Sequence of Register OFFLINE

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

TL 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

TL 2

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3 Procedures (PROCIN)
Notes on module replacement:

Precautionary measures for electrostatic-sensitive components


All modules are equipped with electrostatic-sensitive components (ESD symbol).
For this reason the precautionary measures for electrostatic-sensitive components
must be observed when extracting and inserting modules.
When replacing modules, the maintenance personnel must wear a conducting wriststrap to discharge static. Before modules, leads or components are touched, the
wrist-strap must be connected via a flexible lead to the ground potential of the rack.
It is important to note that the conducting parts of the banana plug must not be
touched while the lead is being plugged in (bridging of the leakage resistance).
Further information can be found in the brochure Safety Instructions for Personnel
and for Products as per EN 60950 (A30808-X3008-X280-*-7619).

Extracting and inserting modules


When replacing modules it is essential that the special tool provided (C39300-A195C70) should be used both for extracting and for inserting modules.
Faulty modules that have been removed must be marked as faulty, and they must be
handled just as carefully as new modules.
For transportation to a repair center the faulty modules must be marked and packed
in accordance with the precautionary requirements for electrostatic-sensitive
components.
Further information can again be found in the brochure Safety Instructions for
Personnel and for Products as per EN 60950 (A30808-X3008-X280-*-7619).

Replacement modules
The replacement module must be identical with the original module (same code
number both for HW/FW and for functional status). In exceptional cases the
Functional Level List can be used to determine whether the functional status of the
replacement module (as regards HW/FW) is compatible with that of the original
module.
If there are switches or other control elements on the module, they must be set as
they were on the extracted original module.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROCIN 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.0.1

Block number
Commentary
(in italics)

Commissioning
System

Explanations of the Procedure Elements

Branch symbol

12 Decision block
Must clearance of this fault be postponed (e.g. because no spare
modules available)?

Y h .....13
N h .....16

Branch dest.
(block number)

Commentary are always written in italics

MML command
input

13 Decision block
b CONF SN:SN=sn,OST=STB;

MML mask
(Courier
typeface)

ERROR MESSAGE DURING CONFIGURATION OF MCH-0-ltg MMN:MCH50-zzzz


To evaluate the system output, see

.....AL:SN

Continue according to the system reaction:

Multiple
branch

- EXECD..................................................................................................
- NOT EXECD..........................................................................................
- else.........................................................................................................

Yes/No
branch

i....PROC:SN001
h.......18
h.......19

Reference to
document with
additional
information
Block
Branch symbol
with reentry

Fig. 3.0.1 Elements used in the procedures

PROCIN 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1

Off-line Installation of Common Clock Generator


CCG

3.1.1

Documents
The following documents are required as references

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Maintenance Manual MMN:CCG / MMN:CCG for CDE


AKUHW Lists

PROC:CCG 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.2

Commissioning
System

Rack MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for CCG)

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU

Fuse panel

02

MOLOC A119 or A121 (CCG)

A
B

MUT01

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT02

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT03

12

MOLOC A119 or A121 (CCG)

A
B

MUT04
A

F:SYPC(A)
B

MUT05
SYPD (or empty)

MUT06
MUT07

A
B
A
B

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT08

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT09

CD

Fig. 3.1.1 Rack: MB/CCG


(Fuse Assignment for CCG)

PROC:CCG 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.3

FU 01

FU

Rack SN/MB/LTGM
(Fuse Assignment for CCG)

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

33 FU

31

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT02

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

D
C

FU

09

MOLOC A121 (CCG)

A
B

23

MOLOC A121 (CCG)

A
B

C
D
C
D

CD

Fig. 3.1.2 Rack: SN/MB/LTGM


(Fuse Assignment for CCG)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.1.4

FU 01

FU

Rack CE
(Fuse Assignment for CCG)

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL

04

MOLOC C153 (Supply for CCG-0)

MUT01

F:SMSC(C)-0

MUT02

F:SMSC(C)-1

MUT04

F:PIOP(A)

MUT03

D
25

MOLOC C153 (Supply for CCG-1)

C
D
C
D

Air circulator
C

MUT08

F:PBC(A)

MUT05

F:PBC(A)

MUT06

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT09

F:PIOPA)

MUT07

F:DEV

MUT10

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT11

Fig. 3.1.3 Rack CE


(Fuse Assignment for CCG)

PROC:CCG 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.5

CCG Racks / Frames / Modules


The CCG consists of 4 modules which can be located in the following racks / frames:
Rack
R:MB/CCG

Frame

Module Frame
Code Number

F:MB/CCG(A)

S30804-B2567

F:MB/CCG(B)

S30804-B2641

R:SN/MB/LTGM

F:MB/CCG(B)

S30804-B2641

R:CE

F:SMSC(C)

S30804-B2693

Tab. 3.1.1 CCG Racks and Frames


The modules are:

M:CCGB
M:CCGD
M:CCGxxA
M:DCCCR

In accordance with the environmental requisites of the EXCH the CCG can be used in
the following operating modes:

plesiochronous mode
synchronous mode

The module M:CCGxxA has to be equipped with different submodules according to the
number of reference frequencies and the operating mode used.
The use of two submodules is standard. One CCGxxA module with two submodules can
process two reference frequencies.

3.1.5.1

Submodules for CCGxxA


The type of the submodules used is dependent upon the reference frequency
concerned:
type of
submodule

reference frequency

Type1 (D319)

2,048 MHZ / 300 KHZ

Type2 (D320)

5 MHZ / 10 MHZ

Type3 (D337)

1,544 MHZ / 300 KHZ

Tab. 3.1.2 Types of submodules and concerning reference


frequencies
The dummy xx in the term CCGxxA depends on the submodule used:

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Submodule 0

Submodule 1

CCGxxA-

Type 1 (D319) Type 1 (D319)

CCG11A

Type 2 (D320) Type 2 (D320)

CCG22A

Type 3 (D337) Type 3 (D337)

CCG33A

Tab. 3.1.3 Submodules and specification of CCGxxA


Depending on the position of the EXCH in the network hierachy, different reference
frequencies have to be used. An overview is given in the following table:
Exch(s)

CCGxxA

Input module

Reference freq.

Master Exch(s)

CCGxxA

Type 1 (D319)

2.048 MHz

Type 2 (D320)

5 or 10 MHz

Type 3 (D337)

1,544 MHz

*)
Slave Exch(s) w. PCM30

CCG11A

Type 1 (D319)

2.048 MHz

Slave Exch(s) w. PCM24

CCG33A

Type 3 (D337)

1.544 MHz

Tab. 3.1.4 Necessary Submodules for CCGxxA


*)
In a synchronous digital network, master exchanges are those which receive their reference frequencies directly from a universal frequency standard UFS. UFS standards
generate reference frequencies of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 2.048 MHz and 1.544 MHz,
depending on the delivery. The use of a reference frequency of 2.048 MHz is standard.
The type of CCGxxA module, i.e. its equipping with submodules, depends on the reference frequency present in each case.
If there is not yet a master exchange with primary standard, or an all-embracing PCM
network, the CCG(A) must be operated plesiochronously (island exchange). The
CCG(A) then works with its own accuracy. Every CCGxxA module always generates a
frequency of 2.048 MHz, irrespective of which submodules are plugged in and whether
they are synchronized or not. In this way the CCG-0 can synchronize the CCG-1 if the
CCG10A or CCG11A module is plugged in the CCG-1.
If CCG22A or CCG33A are plugged in, both modules have to be installed plesiochronously.

PROC:CCG 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.6
3.1.6.1

Terminals for Cross-joint Cables and Reference Clock Cables


Terminals for Cross-joint Cable 570-802/570-804
Operating mode

F:MB/CCG(A)

F:MB/CCG(B)

F:SMSC(C)

CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1


Plesiochronous mode
with synchronization of
CCG1 by CCG0
(at least one CCG1xA
must be on CCG1)

B112

A112

B114

A114

D193

C193

Synchronous mode with


one reference frequency

A112

A112

A114

A114

C193

C193

Synchronous mode with 2


reference frequencies

A112

A112

A114

A114

C193

C193

Tab. 3.1.5 Terminals for cross-joint cable 570-802/570-804

3.1.6.2

Terminals for Reference Clock Cables


Operating mode

F:MB/CCG(A)

F:MB/CCG(B)

F:SMSC(C)

CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1 CCG-0 CCG-1


Plesiochronous mode

*)

*)

*)

*)

*)

*)

Synchronous mode with


one reference frequency

A109

-------

A111

-------

C187

-------

Synchronous mode with 2


reference frequencies

A109

B109

A111

B111

C187

D187

Tab. 3.1.6 Terminals for reference clock cables


*)No reference clock cables may be plugged in when plesiochronous mode is used,
even if they are listed in the cable laying list.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.6.3

Commissioning
System

Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)


(Plesiochronous mode)
A111

Backpanel

CCG11A

A111
29
49
No cable plugged in!

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

A114

Submodule 0

CCG-0

B111
29

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C
B114

2,048 MHz

46
47
48

Submodule 1
P0

43
44
Cross-joint-Cable 570-804

R2

R1

2,048 MHz
S3

S2

S1

A111
CCG11A

Backpanel
A111
29
49

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

A114

Submodule 0
2,048 MHz

CCG-1

B111
29
No cable plugged in!

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C
B114
46
47
48
43
44

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz
S3

S2

S1

Fig. 3.1.4 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)


(Plesiochronous mode)

PROC:CCG 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.6.4

Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)


(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ)
A111

Backpanel

Ref 0

CCG11A

A111

2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.

29
49

9
10

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

A114

Submodule 0

CCG-0

B111
29

ref

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C
B114
46
47
48

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz

43
44

S3

S2

S1

Cross-joint-Cable 570-802

A111
CCG11A

Backpanel
A111
29

ref

49

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

A114

Submodule 0
2,048 MHz

Ref 1
2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.

CCG-1

B111
29
9
10

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C

Clock from:
MDF, with cable
Type 941/ 942

B114

or from
LTG, with cable
Type 923/ 924

48

46
47
43
44

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz
S3

S2

S1

Fig. 3.1.5 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:MB/CCG(B)


(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.6.5

Commissioning
System

Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)


(Plesiochronous mode)
C187

Backpanel

CCG11A

C187
29
49
No cable plugged in!

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

C193

Submodule 0

CCG-0

D187
29

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C
D193

2,048 MHz

46
47
48

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz

43
44

S3

Cross-joint-Cable 570-804

S2

S1

C187
CCG11A

Backpanel
C187
29
49

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

C193

Submodule 0
2,048 MHz

CCG-1

D187
29
No cable plugged in!

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C
D193
46
47
48
43
44

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz
S3

S2

S1

Fig. 3.1.6 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)


(Plesiochronous mode)

PROC:CCG 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.1.6.6

Standard Cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)


(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ)
C187

Backpanel

Ref 0

CCG11A

C187

2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.

29
49

9
10

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

C193

Submodule 0

CCG-0

D187
29

ref

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C
D193
46
47
48

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz

43
44

S3

S2

S1

Cross-joint-Cable 570-802

C187
CCG11A

Backpanel
C187
29

ref

49

D319

49

50

50

F E D C

C193

Submodule 0
2,048 MHz

Ref 1
2,048 MHZ
from DIU or PRC
symm.

CCG-1

D187
29
9
10

229

49
50

D319

249
250

F E D C

Clock from:
MDF, with cable
Type 941/ 942

D193

or from
LTG, with cable
Type 923/ 924

48

46
47
43
44

Submodule 1
P0

R2

R1

2,048 MHz
S3

S2

S1

Fig. 3.1.7 Standard cabling CCG(A) in F:SMSC(C)


(Synchronous mode with 2,048 MHZ)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Decision Block

When the basic test has been completed, changeover from plesiochronous to
synchronous mode can be made if the reference frequency(ies) is/are available.

h ... 2
h ... 26

Starting the basic test


Changeover from plesiochronous to synchronous mode

Check of System Voltage per Rack Row

Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6V ... -57V)

Y h ... 4
N h ... 3

Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 2

After finishing special fault clearance

Basic Test (Rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

Preparation of Basic Test

......(see 3.1.6)

Pull reference clock and cross-joint cables

Information about Basic Test

The basic test must be carried out for CCG-0 and CCG-1 successively. CCGxxA
modules must be handled with great care as the quartz oscillators installed on
the modules are sensitive to shock and impact.

Checking the Required CCGxxA Modules


Check that the correct CCGxxA modules are inserted

Information about the required CCGxxA modules

PROC:CCG 12

......(see 3.1.5.1)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Checking Switch Settings and Solder Straps

Set only those switches described in the MMN. All other switches are set by the
manufacturer.
Set DIP-FIX switches according to the hardware currently present.
Check that all the solder straps and DIP-FIX switches of the CCGxxA and
CCGB described in the MMN are in the correct position for plesiochronous
mode.

...... TAB
MMN:CCG,
LED:CCG

Checking DCCs
Pull modules CCGB, CCGD and CCGxxA of the CCG-0 (CCG1), but leave in
position
Screw in the associated fuse:

Fuse assignment in R:MB/CCG


Fuse assignment in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Fuse assignment in R:CE

...... (see Fig. 3.1.1)


...... (see Fig. 3.1.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.1.3)

Switch on the associated DCC


Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

10

Y h ... 12
N h ... 10

Replacing Defective DCC


Switch off defective DCC
Unscrew corresponding fuse
Check that spare module is switched off
Replace defective DCC by spare module
Screw in corresponding fuse
Switch on DCC
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

11

Y h ... 12
N h ... 11

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 9

PROC:CCG 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

12

Commissioning
System

Checking CCG Modules


Switch off DCC
Insert all modules of the associated CCG
Switch on DCC
If LED goes dark again, there is presumably a short circuit in the CCG-modules.

h ... 18
h ... 13

If LED is lit
If LED is dark

13

Prepare Search for Module Suspected of Shorting


Switch of DCC
Pull all modules of the associated CCG

14

Search for Module Suspected of Shorting

Repeat the following steps until all modules of the CCG concerned have been
tested.
Switch off DCC of the CCG concerned (if not already done)
Insert first/ next module
Switch on DCC of the CCG concerned
The following system reactions are possible
Green LED on DCC is lit
Green LED on DCC is not lit

15

h ... 17
h ... 15

Replace Defective Module

Short circuit on the module last inserted


Switch off DCC of the CCG concerned
Replace defective module by spare module
Switch on DCC of the CCG concerned
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

16

Y h ... 17
N h ... 16

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

17

h ... 17

Decision Block
Have all modules already been tested?

PROC:CCG 14

Y h ... 18
N h ... 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

18

Checking LED AL
Is LED AL on module CCGxxA lit?

19

ITMN - OFFLINE

Y h ... 20
N h ... 19

Replacing Module CCGxxA


Switch off DCC
Replace module by spare module
After replacing the module

20

Decision Block
Have both CCGs already been tested?

21

h ... 12
Y h ... 21
N h ... 9

Plesiochronous Mode

CCG-0 and CCG-1 do not receive an external reference frequency. During


plesiochronous mode with synchronization of CCG1 by CCG0, only the crossjoint cable may be plugged in. Clock cables must not be plugged in, even if they
are listed in the cable laying list. Plesiochronous mode with synchronization of
CCG1 by CCG0 is possible only if there is at least one CCG11A plugged in the
CCG-1.
If CCG22A or CCG33A are plugged in, both CCGs have to be run plesiochronously.
Is there at least one CCG11A in the CCG1?

22

Y h ... 22
N h ... 24

Plesiochronous Mode with Synchronization of CCG1 by CCG0


Switch off converter DCCCR at both CCGs
Insert cross-joint cable type 570-802

...... (see Tab. 3.1.5)

Switch on converter DCCCR at both CCGs


LED AL lights approx. 30 minutes
Then In CCG-0 the LEDs P (plesiochronous) and F (free-running) light on the
faceplate of CCG11A-0. In CCG-1 the LEDs A (holdover state A) and REF0 light
on the faceplate of CCG11A-1.
Then the display on the CCG11A-1 changes to synchronous state 4 via holdover state B. After synchronization the LEDs F and P on module CCG11A-0
light up, as do LEDs REF0 and synchronous state 4 on module CCG11A-1.

When both CRA (control range) LEDs light, PLL regulation is working to its
limits. If LED AL also lights up, there is no longer any synchronization.
If both CRA LEDs are on
If LEDs are dark

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 23
h ... 25

PROC:CCG 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

23

Commissioning
System

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 22

After finishing special fault clearance

24

Plesiochronous Mode without Synchronization of CCG1 by CCG0


LED AL lights approx.30 minutes

When the LED AL has gone dark, the LEDs P (plesiochronous) and F (freerunning) light up

25

Decision Block

End of basic test CCG


Should changeover from plesiochronous mode to synchronous mode be carried
out? (Reference frequency(ies) must be available)

26

Y h ... 26
N h ... END

Prerequisites

Subsequent external synchronization of the exchanges must be carried out in


sequence according to the network hierarchy. Changeover from plesiochronous
to synchronous mode is described below for the following basic configuration:

The CCGs are equipped with CCG11A modules

2.048 MHz frequencies of high accuracy must be available for synchronization


The reference frequencies are derived from a primary frequency standard or
from the DIU30D/DIU120D of a LTG. The connection with the reference
frequencies is established via symmetrical cables (120 Ohm)
references of a frequency standard are cabled to the MDF and from there
to the CCG with cable type 941/942
references of the LTG are cabled to the CCG with cable type 923/924

Reference cable and cross-joint cable must be available.


The cross joint cable 570 802 in CCG-0 is plugged into the following position:
B 112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
B 114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
D 193 for F:SMSC(C)
The cross joint cable 570 802 in CCG-1 is plugged into the following position:
A 112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
A 114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
C 193 for F:SMSC(C)

The CCGs are in operating state ACT/ STB


On CCG11A in CCG-0 the LEDs P and F are lit
On CCG11A in CCG-1 the LEDs Ref0 (green) and 4 are lit

PROC:CCG 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

27

Checking Cables
Are reference clock and cross-joint cables present?

28

ITMN - OFFLINE

Y h ... 29
N h ... 28

Ordering Cables
Order reference clock and cross-joint cables

29

Synchronization of the Plesiochronous CCG-0

For synchronization of the plesiochronous CCG-0 no switch settings on the


module CCG11A need to be changed because the switches are not located in
the signal line of the reference frequency. I.e. even in plesiochronous mode the
CCG detects the reference frequency and synchronizes to it.
Plug the first reference frequency into the following position of the CCG-0
A109 in F:MB/CCG(A)
A111 in F:MB/CCG(B)
C 187 in F:SMSC(C)
System reaction:

After 2-3 minutes in CCG-0 on module CCG11A the LED REF0 lights green
LED F is switched off
LED A is switched on

This means that the CCG-0 accepts the reference frequency because it is in
pull-in range
Within one hour the CCG-control runs through the following modes:

LED A lights (holdover state A)


LED B lights (holdover state B)
LED B lights (holdover state B) and LED 1 lights (synchronous state 1)
The display changes trough synchronous states 2 and 3 to synchronous
state 4

Simultaneously the CCG-1 is synchronized by CCG-0 because of the cross-joint


cable between CCG-0 and CCG-1.

If the reference frequency is disturbed during synchronization, the display does


not go beyond status A. In this case, synchronization must be carried out with a
reference frequency derived from a rubidium standard (e.g. FTU).

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

30

Commissioning
System

Change Position of Cross-joint Cable


Unplug cross-joint cable 570 802 on CCG-0 from the following positions:
B 112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
B 114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
D 193 for F:SMSC(C)
Plug in cross-joint cable on CCG-0 at the following positions:
A112 for F:MB/CCG(A)
A114 for F:MB/CCG(B)
C 193 for F:SMSC(C)

Now the CCG-1 is not synchronized by the 2.048 MHZ of the CCG-0 anymore
but directly by the reference frequency.
The change of the plug positions has to be finished within a time interval of two
minutes. Otherwise the CCG-1 changes to holdover mode.

31
b

Switchover of CCG-0 to Synchronous Mode


CONF CCG:CCG=0,OST=MBL;
command repetition

EXECD

Switch off CCG-0 converter


Pull module CCG11A

......MMN:CCG,
TAB LED:CCG

Set switch settings / solder straps to synchronous mode


Plug in module CCG11A
Switch on CCG-0 converter
LED AL on the module faceplate of module CCG11A lights

After approx. 30 minutes the LED AL is switched off. The LEDs Ref0 (green),
Ref1 (red) and A light up. After another 120 minutes the CCG-0 has to be
configured to STB (If LED1 is lit).

CONF CCG:CCG=0,OST=STB;
command repetition

32

EXECD

Connecting the second Reference Frequency to CCG-1


Plug the second reference frequency into the following position on CCG-1:
B109 in F:MB/CCG(A)
B111 in F:MB/CCG(B)
D 187 for F:SMSC(C)
In CCG-0 the LED Ref 1 (red) is switched off. The green LED (Ref 0) indicates
that Ref 0 is synchronizing.

PROC:CCG 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

33
b

ITMN - OFFLINE

Switchover of CCG-1 to Synchronous Mode


CONF CCG:CCG=1,OST=MBL;
command repetition

EXECD

Switch off CCG-1 converter


Pull module CCG11A

...... TAB
MMN:CCG,
LED:CCG

Set switch settings / solder straps to synchronous mode


Plug in module CCG11A
Switch on CCG-1 converter
LED AL on the module faceplate of module CCG11A lights

After approx. 30 minutes the LED AL is switched off. The LEDs Ref0 (green),
Ref1 (red) and A light up. After another 120 minutes the CCG-1 has to be
configured to STB (If LED1 is lit).

CONF CCG:CCG=1,OST=STB;
command repetition

EXECD

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCG 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

PROC:CCG 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.2

Off-line Installation of Message Buffer


MBB

3.2.1

Documents
The following documents are required as reference

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Maintenance Manual MMN:MB


AKUHW Lists

PROC:MBB 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.2.2
3.2.2.1

Commissioning
System

MB in Rack MB/CCG
Rack MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for MB)
FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU

01

MOLOC A001 (MB-0)

Fuse panel
A
B

11

MOLOC A001 (MB-1)

A
B

MUT01

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT02

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT03
MUT04

F:SYPC(A)
B

MUT05
SYPD (or empty)

MUT06
MUT07

04

MOLOC A001 (MB-0)

A
B

14

MOLOC A001 (MB-1)

A
B

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT08

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT09

CD

Fig. 3.2.1 Rack: MB/CCG


(Fuse Assignment for MB)

PROC:MBB 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.2.2.2

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG


Basic system configuration

extension frame for SN


(252 LTG)

FU

11

14

MUT

02

03

08

09

UNIT

MB-0:
MBUS0-0
MBUL0-0
MBUL0-1

MB-1:
MBUS1-0
MBUL1-0
MBUL1-1

MB-0:
MBUS0-1
MBUL0-2
MBUL0-3

MB1:
MBUS1-1
MBUL1-2
MBUL1-3

Tab. 3.2.1 Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Basic Rack

Extension rack for SN (504 LTG)


FU

11

14

MUT

02

03

08

09

UNIT

MB-0:
MBUS0-2
MBUL0-4
MBUL0-5

MB-1:
MBUS1-2
MBUL1-4
MBUL1-5

MB-0:
MBUS0-3
MBUL0-6
MBUL0-7

MB1:
MBUS1-3
MBUL1-6
MBUL1-7

Tab. 3.2.2 Fuse Assignment R:MB/CCG Extension Rack

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MBB 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.2.3

MB in Rack SN/MB/LTGM

3.2.3.1

FU 01

FU

Rack SN/MB/LTGM
(Fuse Assignment for MB)

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

33 FU

31

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT02

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

F:TSG(B), F:SSG(B)
or F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

D
C

FU

08

MOLOC A001 (MB-0)

A
B

22

MOLOC A001 (MB-1)

A
B

C
D
C
D

CD

Fig. 3.2.2 Rack: SN/MB/LTGM


(Fuse Assignment for MB)

PROC:MBB 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.2.3.2

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM


Basic Rack
Capacity stage until SN
(126LTG)

Basic Rack
Capacity stage until SN
(252LTG)

FU

22

FU

22

MUT

04

05

MUT

04

05

UNIT

MB-0:
MBUS0-0
MBUL0-0
MBUL0-1

MB-1:
MBUS1-0
MBUL1-0
MBUL1-1

EINH

MB-0:
MBUS0-1
MBUL0-2
MBUL0-3

MB1:
MBUS1-1
MBUL1-2
MBUL1-3

Tab. 3.2.3 Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM


Basic Rack / Extension Rack

Capacity stage until SN (504LTG)


Extension Rack

Extension Rack

FU

22

FU

22

MUT

04

05

MUT

04

05

UNIT

MB-0:
MBUS0-2
MBUL0-4
MBUL0-5

MB-1:
MBUS1-2
MBUL1-4
MBUL1-5

EINH

MB-0:
MBUS0-3
MBUL0-6
MBUL0-7

MB1:
MBUS1-3
MBUL1-6
MBUL1-7

Tab. 3.2.4 Fuse Assignment R:SN/MB/LTGM Extension Racks

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MBB 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.2.4

MB in Rack CE

3.2.4.1

FU 01

FU

Rack CE
(Fuse Assignment for MB)

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL

08

MOLOC C259 (Supply for MB-0)

MUT01

F:SMSC(C)-0

MUT02

F:SMSC(C)-1

MUT04

F:PIOP(A)

MUT03

D
27

MOLOC C259 (Supply for MB-1)

C
D
C
D

Air circulator
C

MUT08

F:PBC(A)

MUT05

F:PBC(A)

MUT06

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT09

F:PIOPA)

MUT07

F:DEV

MUT10

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT11

Fig. 3.2.3 Rack CE


(Fuse Assignment for MB)

PROC:MBB 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.2.4.2

Fuse Assignment MB(B) (R:CE)


Rack CE
Capacity stage until SN (31LTG)
FU

27

MUT

02

04

UNIT

MB-0

MB-1

FRAME

SMSC-0

SMSC-1

Tab. 3.2.5 Fuse Assignment R:CE

3.2.5

Capacity stages

Capacity stage of the SN

Capacity stage of the MB


(Number of frames)

Frame Type

SN 31 LTG (Rural Exchange)

2 (1 for MB-0 / 1 for MB-1)

F:SMSC(C)

SN 63 / 126 LTG

2 (1 for MB-0 / 1 for MB-1)

F:MB/CCG(B)

SN 252 LTG

4 (2 for MB-0 / 2 for MB-1)

F:MB/CCG(B)

SN 504 LTG

8 (4 for MB-0 / 4 for MB-1)

F:MB/CCG(B)

Tab. 3.2.6 Capacity stages

Basic Test (Rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

Fuse Assignment MB(B)

The fuse assignment to the frames F:MB/CCG(B) / F:SMSC(C) is dependent on


the rack used:
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:MB/CCG
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:CE

Information Block

The MB can be delivered in different capacity stages (According to the capacity


stage of the SN):

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

...... (see 3.2.2.2)


...... (see 3.2.3.2)
...... (see 3.2.4.2)
...... (see Tab. 3.2.6)
PROC:MBB 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Preparation
Switch off all DCCs of MB(B)
Unscrew all MB fuses

Mounting locations of the corresponding DCCs in R:MB/CCG


Mounting locations of the corresponding DCCs in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Mounting locations of the corresponding DCCs in R:CE

......(see Fig. 3.2.1)


......(see Fig. 3.2.2)
......(see Fig. 3.2.3)

Off-line Installation of the first / next Frame for (MB-0)


Screw in fuse of the first / next frame for MB-0

Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:MB/CCG


Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:CE

......(see 3.2.2.2)
......(see 3.2.3.2)
......(see 3.2.4.2)

Check that all corresponding modules are plugged in


Switch on corresponding DCC for MB-0

Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:MB/CCG


Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:CE
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

......(see Fig. 3.2.1)


......(see Fig. 3.2.2)
......(see Fig. 3.2.3)
Y h ... 15
N h ... 6

Check DCC (MB-0)


Pull all related modules but leave in position
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

Y h ... 11
N h ... 7

Fault Clearance DCC / Fuse (MB-0)

Possible fault cause: DCC or main fuse defective


Switch off the DCC affected
Screw out corresponding fuse
If fuse is suspect to be faulty
If DCC is suspect to be faulty

PROC:MBB 8

h ... 8
h ... 9

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

Replace Fuse
Replace affected fuse with spare fuse

h ... 10

Replace DCC
Replace affected DCC with spare DCC

10

ITMN - OFFLINE

h ... 10

Check Spare DCC / Fuse


Screw in fuse again
Switch on corresponding DCC again
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

11

Y h ... 11
N h ... 14

Fault Clearance Modules (MB-0)


Insert first / next corresponding module
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

12

Decision: next Module (MB-0)


Have all corresponding modules already been tested?

13

Y h ... 12
N h ... 13
Y h ... 15
N h ... 11

Replace Module (MB-0)

The module last inserted is suspect to be faulty


Replace module with spare module
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

14

Y h ... 11
N h ... 14

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat installation test after successful fault clearance

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 5

PROC:MBB 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

15

Commissioning
System

Off-line Installation of the first / next Frame for (MB-1)


Screw in fuse of the first / next frame for MB-1

Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:MB/CCG


Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Fuse assignment for switching on the MB in R:CE

......(see 3.2.2.2)
......(see 3.2.3.2)
......(see 3.2.4.2)

Check that all corresponding modules are plugged in


Switch on corresponding DCC for MB-1

Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:MB/CCG


Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:SN/MB/LTGM
Mounting location of the corresponding DCC in R:CE
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

16

......(see Fig. 3.2.1)


......(see Fig. 3.2.2)
......(see Fig. 3.2.3)
Y h ... 25
N h ... 16

Check DCC (MB-1)


Pull all related modules but leave in position
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

17

Y h ... 21
N h ... 17

Fault Clearance DCC / Fuse (MB-1)

Possible fault cause: DCC or main fuse defective


Switch off the DCC affected
Screw out corresponding fuse
If fuse is suspect to be faulty
If DCC is suspect to be faulty

18

Replace Fuse
Replace affected fuse with spare fuse

19

h ... 18
h ... 19
h ... 20

Replace DCC
Replace affected DCC with spare DCC

PROC:MBB 10

h ... 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

20

ITMN - OFFLINE

Check Spare DCC / Fuse


Screw in fuse again
Switch on corresponding DCC again
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

21

Y h ... 21
N h ... 24

Fault Clearance Modules (MB-1)


Insert first / next corresponding module
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

22

Decision: next Module (MB-1)


Have all corresponding modules already been tested?

23

Y h ... 22
N h ... 23
Y h ... 25
N h ... 21

Replace Module (MB-1)

The module last inserted is suspect to be faulty


Replace module with spare module
Is the green LED of the DCC lit?

24

Y h ... 21
N h ... 24

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat installation test after successful fault clearance

25

h ... 15

Decision: Next Frame


Have all frames of the MB already been put into service?

Y h ... END
N h ... 5

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MBB 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

PROC:MBB 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3

Off-line Installation Test of the System Panel


SYP

3.3.1

Documentation
The following documentation will be needed for reference:

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Maintenance Manual MMN:SYP / MMN:SYP for CDE


AKUHW lists
NIMN:SYP for the programming of the USER-PROM

PROC:SYP 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.2

Commissioning
System

Rack R:MB/CCG
(Fuse Assignment for SYP)

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

Fuse panel
A
B

FU
03

MOLOC A001 (DCCCR) (10A)


B

09
15

MUT01

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT02

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT03

MOLOC A043 (TXA:SYPC) (1A)


MOLOC A116 (DCCCL) (10A)

MUT04
A

F:SYPC(A)
B

05
06
07

08

(SYPD1) (1A)

MUT05
SYPD (or empty)

(SYPD2) (1A)
(SYPD3) (1A)

MUT06
MUT07

A
B

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT08

F:MB/CCG(A) or
F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT09

(SYPD0) (1A)
A
B

CD

Fig. 3.3.1 Rack R:MB/CCG


(Fuse Assignment for SYP)

PROC:SYP 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.3

FU 01

FU

Rack R:CE
(Fuse Assignment for SYP)

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL

02

MOLOC C101 (DCCCR) (10A)

MUT01

F:SMSC(C)-0

MUT02

F:SMSC(C)-1

MUT04

F:PIOP(A)

MUT03

D
06

SYPD0 (10A)

C
D

11

M:T/RM:SYCR and alarm transfer (10A)


C
D

23

MOLOC C101 (DCCCR for CDEX) (10A)

Air circulator
C

MUT08

F:PBC(A)

MUT05

F:PBC(A)

MUT06

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT09

F:PIOPA)

MUT07

F:DEV

MUT10

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT11

Fig. 3.3.2 Rack R:CE (Fuse Assignment for SYP)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.3.4

Rack R:SE
(Fuse Assignment for SYP)

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

Fuse panel
A

MUT01

any Equipment
MUT02

B
A

FU

any Equipment
MUT03

07

MOLOC A001 (DCCCR) (10 A)


A
10

MOLOC A043 (TXA:SYPC) (1 A)

MOLOC A116 (DCCCL) (10 A)

F:SYPC(A) or
any Equipment

MUT04

16

any Equipment

18

MUT05

(SYPD0) (1 A)
08

(SYPD1) (1 A)
09

(SYPD2) (1 A)
17

(SYPD3) (1 A)

any Equipment
MUTxx

B
A
B

F:SYPC(A) or
any Equipment

MUT17

CD
Fig. 3.3.3 Rack R:SE (Fuse Assignment for SYP)

PROC:SYP 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.5

Introduction
The system panel is supplied in a number of different variants, e.g.:

The SYP can be located in F:SYPC or in F:SMSC(C) (Rural Exchanges)


with one or two system panel displays
with or without module TXA:SYPC for the forwarding of alarms (in F:SYPC)
with CDEX modules built into the frame for the 2.048-MHz clock distribution incl. DC
converters

For the position of the SYP in the EWSD system, see Fig. 3.3.4.
In the installation test phase of an EWSD/MSC network node, the SYP must be
placed in service in a minimum configuration.
All other work, such as the connection of external alarms and additional SYPDs, should
be carried out after installation testing or when the node is in service.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.5.1

Commissioning
System

Position of the SYP in the EWSD System

SYPD

SYPD
Alternative

F:SMSC(C)-0 in R:CE

F:SYPC in R:MB/CCG:

F:SMSC(C)-1 in R:CE

CP/IOP

CP/IOP

MDF/DDF

MDF/DDF

E&M
transmission

E&M
transmission

SYPD

SYPD
OMC

AC/DC

OMC

AC/DC

Fig. 3.3.4 Position of the SYP in the EWSD system

PROC:SYP 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.6

Requirements for Installation Testing

The Maintenance Manual MMN:SYP (MMN:SYP for CDE) must be available

The cable laying list must be available

If the SYP is located in F:SYPC, the F:SYPC must be equipped with the following
modules at least:
DCCCR
COM:SYPC
IOC:SYPC
RM:EA
T/RM:EA
For mounting locations, see Fig. 3.3.7.

If the SYP is located in F:SMSC(C), the F:SMSC(C) must be equipped with the
following modules:
DCCCR
GCGR
PU:SYCR
T/RM:SYCR
For mounting locations, see Fig. 3.3.8.

One SYPD must be connected directly using cable type 225 (e.g. at SYP mounting
location B034 in F:SYPC / C 135 in F:SMSC(C))

The power supply is fed to the SYPD via the same cable.
Requirement: Fuse for -UE -48/60 V is inserted.

A programmed USER-PROM is mounted on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR (standard PROM with the designation V30113-....) (see Fig. 3.3.5) / (see Fig. 3.3.6).
Note:
This USER-PROM is pre-programmed for one SYPD-0 and one SYPD-1.
If only one SYPD is installed, the double SYP indicator lights up when the SYP is
active and in service, and messages are output stating that the number of SYPDs
does not match the number of SYPDs programmed in the USER-PROM.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.3.6.1

ESD safety precautions must be observed, i.e. a grounding bracelet must be


worn, for instance.

Location of the USER-PROM

COM:SYPC
USER-PROM (V30113-J122-A1) EPROM 2732
Standard PROM or Exch. Spec. PROM

Fig. 3.3.5 Location of the USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC

PU:SYCR

USER-PROM (V30113-J122-A1) EPROM 2764


Standard PROM or Exch. Spec. PROM

Fig. 3.3.6 Location of the USER PROM on module PU:SYCR.

PROC:SYP 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.6.2

Overview of SYP Connections in F:SYPC


SYPD with internal 220 V AC
power supply

SYPD1
OMC

E&M
EWSD node

E&M
SYPD with -UE power supply
via SYP from the fuse panel

SYPD0

Backplane connector:

B2 034
T/R

SYPD1

SYPD2

SYPD3

A2 040

A2 034

B2 040

E1/M1

E2/M2

MDF

SYPD0-3

A2 028

E3/M3

T/R

SYPD4-7

B2 028

2DR

T/R

E1/M1 4DR

E1/M1

E2/M2 4DR

E2/M2

E3/M3 4DR

E3/M3

SYPD0 2-wire only

SYPD1-3 4-wire

DCCCR

A001

IOC:
SYPC

COM:
SYPC

A013

A019

RM:EA

A025

T/RM:
SYPC
0

A031

T/RM:
SYPC
1

TXA:
SYPC

Optional

Optional

A037

A043

SYPC(A)
S30804-B2573-

EDL1..EDL24

AL1..AL12
Backplane
connector:

A2 010

A2 016

B2 010

B2 016

External alarms
from the MDF
1-24

to/from CP

IOP-0

A2 022

A2 046

AL13..AL24

B2 046

to the MDF
Alarm forwarding to
other OMCs

IOP-1

Fig. 3.3.7 Overview of system panel connections in F:SYPC

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.3.6.3

Overview of SYP Connections in F:SMSC(C)


SYPD with internal 220 V AC
power supply

SYPD1
OMC

E&M
EWSD node

E&M
SYPD with -UE power supply
via SYP from the fuse panel

SYPD0

SYPD0-1

SYPD1
Backplane connector:

C 135
T/R

D141

MDF

D 141

E1/M1

T/R

2DR

E1/M1 4DR
SYPD0 2-wire only

SYPD1 4-wire

DCCCR

GCGR

PU:SYCR

T/RM:
SYCR
SMSC(C)-0
S30804-B2693-

C101

C119

C129

C141

EAI1..EAI8
Backplane
connector:

C 113

C 107

D 113

D 107

AL1..AL8

D 141
External alarms
from the MDF 1-8

to/from CP
IOP-0

D 141
to the MDF
Alarm forwarding to
other OMCs

IOP-1

Fig. 3.3.8 Overview of system panel connections in F:SMSC(C)

PROC:SYP 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.7

SYPD
Every EWSD exchange is equipped with at least one system panel display (SYPD),
which is able to display:

alarms and indications from specific units in the system


general system alarms
the current call-processing load on the processor
external alarms

Alarms and indications are indicated visually (LED indicators) and audibly (horn) on the
SYPD.
The indicators on the SYPD are arranged in three sections:

system unit alarms


general system alarms
external alarms

A front view of the SYPD is shown in Fig. 3.3.9

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.3.7.1

Front View of the SYPD

Day

Month
Line/trunk groups
LTG

Maint.
alarm

Service
alarm

Time

External alarms

Switching
network

Ext.
Equip.

Coordination processor
CP

Central unit

Message
buffer

Clock

Common
channel
signaling

ERL
Processor
load

System panel
SYP

Update

Test

Accept

TGRP alarm

Trunk group
blocked

External
DLU alarms

HW units MBL

Line lockout

Cat. 1

Admin.
alarm

Sig. links
blocked

Signaling
link

Cat. 2

Recovery

Alarm
suppression

Call
identification

System
operator

Time insecure

Labels for the external alarms must be affixed in accordance with the
customers requirements and the programming of the USER-PROM.

Fig. 3.3.9 Front view of the system panel display SYPD

PROC:SYP 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.7.2

SYPD Modules

SYPD front view:

Loosen screws to open


the SYPD

Open SYPD:
(module DYM:SYPD swung to the side)

Loosen screws to access modules


EWA (DC/DC converter) and
T/RM:SYPD

Module DYM:SYPD
(swung to the side)
Shielding panel and support for
modules EWA:SYPD and
T/RM:SYPD (attached behind)

to internal horn
Open SYPD
Module DYM:SYPD and shielding panel
swung to the side

to external horn

Internal horn
EWA (DCDC

Plug position for


SYP/SYPD interface

T/RM:SYPD

1
1

Horn
volume

Ext. horn
1=off
2=ON

21

Transm. MB
1=open
2=grounded

2
2

Int. horn
1=off
2=ON

Plug position for


SYP/SYPD interface

+UE -UE
DC from:
ACC (220/110 V AC power supply)
or -48//-60 V DC power supply

Fig. 3.3.10 SYPD modules

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.8
3.3.8.1

Commissioning
System

Connection of SYPDs
General
The system panel displays (SYPD) are controlled by the system panel control (SYPC)
or the system panel control rural (SYCR).
In DE4 and DE5 switches, the system panel control is installed in module frame
SYPC(A) (B2573) and can be linked to a maximum of 8 SYPDs. This frame can also
accommodate up to 10 CDEX modules (Q900) for external synchronization.
In DE3 switches (rural exchanges), the smaller system panel control SYCR is used,
which can be linked to a maximum of 2 SYPDs. SYCR is installed in module frame
SMSC (B2693) together with the clock generator, message buffer and switching
network.

3.3.8.2

Options for the Connection of the System Panel Display SYPD


The SYPD can be installed locally or in a remote location, depending on the application.
The transmission medium and cabling required between a remote SYPD and the
SYPC/SYCR depends on the distance between them.
An overview of the different options is shown in Fig. 3.3.11.
Further information on the signaling methods and cabling are shown in Fig. 3.3.12 and
Fig. 3.3.13.

PROC:SYP 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Maintenance room

Exchange

Remote building

T/RM:SYPC
T/RM:SYCR

(4-wire transmission)
Range 2 * 200
= ca. 3km (1)

SYPD
with remote power feed
max. 200 m
MDF

(4-wire transmission)
Range 2 * 200
= ca. 3km (1)

DF

SYPD

< 3 km

MDF

DF

Loop signaling
(2-wire transmission)
Range 2 * 750
= ca. 11 km (1)

SYPD
< 11km
FDM/PCM
equipment
MDF

Line leading to carrier


equipment
E&M signaling
(4-wire transmission)
Range 2 * 200
= ca. 3 km (1)

FDM/PCM

link

< 3 km

Maintenance centre

FDM/PCM
equipment

DF
SYPD

Every SYPD must have its own power supply (-48/60 VDC or 110/220 VAC).
If a SYPD uses remote power feeding, the maximum range with standard cabling is 200m.
(1) applies to copper lines with a diameter of 0.6mm

Fig. 3.3.11 Options for the connection of the system


panel display SYPD

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

System panel control


SYPC / SYCR

FDM/PCM equipment
M/SAB

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

(MA)
RX
TX
(MB)

2
BR

FDM/PCM

GND
-UB

M
O
D
U
L
E

link

GND
E/SAN
(EA)
RX
TX
(EB)
GND
-UB

System panel display


SYPD

FDM/PCM equipment
E/SAN
(EA)

RX
TX
(EB)
GND

GND
-UB

D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
M
O
D
U
L
E

E/SAN
(MA)
RX
TX
(MB)

2
BR

-UB
1
GND

For explanations see Tab. 3.3.1

Fig. 3.3.12 E&M signaling (4-wire transmission)

PROC:SYP 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Two-wire line
with loop signaling

System panel control


SYPC, SYCR

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

A (T)

(T) A

B (R)

(R) B

System panel display


SYPD

TX

TX

Display
module

M
O
D
U
L
E

RX
RX

-UB

GND

For explanations see Tab. 3.3.1


Fig. 3.3.13 Loop signaling (2-wire transmission)

Explanations:
-UB:

Exchange voltage -48/60 V

GND:

Ground

RX:

Receiver

BR:

Switch
1= FDM/PCM equipment has ground
2= FDM/PCM does not offer ground

TX:

Transmitter (fully electronic, transistors as switches)


It must be ensured that the voltages to be switched by the transmission
equipment lie in the range -48/-60V.

Tab. 3.3.1 Explanations on E&M and loop signaling

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Explanations:
Range when using E&M signaling (4-wire lines):
between SYPC/SYCR and FDM/PCM equipment: each 2*200 ohm (ca. 3 km *))
between the two FDM/PCM equipments: varies according to FDM/PCM system
between FDM/PCM equipment and SYPD: each 2*200 ohm (ca. 3 km *) )
*) applies to copper lines with a diameter of 0.6 mm
Range when using loop signaling (2-wire lines):
between SYPC/SYCR and SYPD: each 2*750 ohm (ca. 11 km)
(applies to copper lines with a diameter of 0.6 mm)
Tab. 3.3.1 Explanations on E&M and loop signaling

3.3.8.3

Location of BR switches on T/RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR


Switch BR:
This switch is used to connect the MB-line to ground in Position 2 for the SYPD which
runs via 4-wire method on the transmit side.
This is necessary, for example, if a connected carrier frequency device is not grounded.
T/RM:SYPC
E&M interface 2

E&M interface 3

3BR
1

E&M interface 1

1BR
2

2BR
1

MB transmission
1= open
2= grounded

Fig. 3.3.14 SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYPC

PROC:SYP 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

T/RM:SYCR
E&M interface

BR
1

MB transmission
1= open
2= grounded

Fig. 3.3.15 SYPD E&M grounding on T/RM:SYCR

3.3.8.4

Installing A Second SYPD in the Same Building


A second SYPD can be connected directly to the SYP using standard EWS cable, but
the length of the cable must not exceed 200 meters.
In this case, the SYPD does not need any external power supply from a 220V power
pack or -48/-60V, because it is fed by the SYP. Check that the correct fuse is inserted
in the rack for this SYPD.
When using the standard USER-PROM, the SYPDs must be installed as SYPD 0
and SYPD 1.
If the MB wire on the transmission side of the 4-wire ports needs to be grounded, the
corresponding switch must be set to position 2 on module T/RM:SYPC (see Fig. 3.3.14)
(T/RM:SYCR in F:SMSC(C) (see Fig. 3.3.15)) and on module T/RM:SYPD
(see Fig. 3.3.10) .

3.3.8.5

Installing a Second SYPD in Another Building Without Transmission


Equipment
Range:
2-wire: 2*750 ohm ca. 11 km
4-wire: 2*200 ohm ca. 3km
The choice of 2-wire or 4-wire line to connect the remote SYPD depends on the distance
(see Fig. 3.3.11).
The interfaces of SYP and SYPD are illustrated in: Fig. 3.3.16 - Fig. 3.3.19

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

The 2-wire or 4-wire transmission lines originate at mounting location A 028 of the SYP
and run parallel to the SYP backplane mounting locations on the special MDF terminal
strip.
Caution: It must be ensured that each SYPD has its own transmission link.
When using 2-wire lines, wire R at the SYP is connected to wire R of the SYPD and wire
T of the SYP is connected to wire T of the SYPD.
When using 4-wire lines, wire MA at the SYP is connected to wire EA of the SYPD and
wire MB of the SYP is connected to wire EB of the SYPD. The connections in the other
direction are made on the same principle.
Power feeding of the SYPD is either from the -48/-60V exchange voltage or from an integral 110/220V power pack.
Attach labels to the SYPD as described in the procedure.
Check the horn setting.

3.3.8.6

Installing a Second SYPD in Another Building With Transmission


Equipment
E&M signaling is used on the link between SYP and SYPD. In other words, the transmitting SYP or SYPD sets the input voltage for transmission by means of an electronic
switch to approximately 0V or the original value (usually 48/60V).
On PCM links, these signals are carried in channel 16 and converted back into E&M
signals at the other end for transfer to the SYP/SYPD.
For this reason, signaling converters are needed in conjunction with PCM links.
In carrier systems, these signals are transmitted outside the voice band (out-band
signaling).
Range: unlimited
The interfaces of SYP and SYPD are shown in: Fig. 3.3.16, Fig. 3.3.18
Caution: It must be ensured that each SYPD is assigned its own transmission link.
The SYPD is fed either with the -48/-60V exchange voltage or from an integral 110/220V
power pack.
Attach labels to the SYPD as described in the procedure.
Check the horn setting.
If necessary, set the switches for grounding of signal MB in SYP and SYPD.

PROC:SYP 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.8.7

Block Diagram of the SYPD and its Interfaces

DYM:SYPD

Internal horn

External horn
Connector pin
number:
to/from SYP:
43
44
45
46
55
56
13
14
16
17

4-wire

2-wire

DC from
frame

MA
MB
EA
EB
R
T

- UE

3
4
5
6
15
16
53
54
56

T/RM:SYPD

57

B2

- UE
DC from OMC
DCC
A2
Standard
DC from transformer
and rectifier
110 / 220 V AC

ACC:SYPD
Option

Fig. 3.3.16 Block diagram of the SYPD and its interfaces

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.8.8

Commissioning
System

R/T and E+M Interfaces in F:SMSC for SYPD-0 - SYPD-1

to SYPD-0

C 135
Pin 56,57 -UE
Pin 53,54 GND
to SYPD
power supply

T
15

R
16

to MDF / DDF
(External SYPDs)

SYPD 0

SYPD 1

53
T

54
R

55
EA

56
EB

57 58
MA MB

Module T/RM:SYCR
CD 141

EA= Ear A
MA= Mouth A

Grounded if signal
ground is available. In
this case only the EA or
MA signals are
connected

Fig. 3.3.17 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SMSC


for SYPD-0 - SYPD-1

PROC:SYP 22

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.3.8.9

ITMN - OFFLINE

R/T and E+M Interfaces in F:SYPC for SYPD-0 - SYPD-3

to SYPD-0

B2 034
Pin 55, 56 -UE
Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply

to SYPD-1

A2 040
Pin 55, 56 -UE
Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply

to SYPD-2

to SYPD-3

A2 034

B2 040

Pin 55, 56 -UE


Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply

Pin 55, 56 -UE


Pin 53, 54 +UE
to SYPD
power supply

External
SYPDs to MDF
/ DDF
A2 028

T
15

R
16

EA EB
3
4

MA MB
5
6

EA EB
3
4

MA MB
5
6

EA EB
3
4

MA MB
5
6

SYP backplane
connector

15 T
16 R

SYPD 0

3 EA1
4 EB1
SYPD 1
5 MA1
6 MB1

7 EA2
8 EB2
SYPD 2
9 MA2
10 MB2

11 EA3
12 EB3
SYPD 3
13 MA3
14 MB3
EA= Ear A
MA= Mouth A

46
T

47
R

8
9
23 41
EA1 EB1 MA1 MB1

30 31 49 50
EA2 EB2 MA2 MB2

Module T/RM:SYPC
A2 031

3
6
45 42
EA3 EB3 MA3 MB3

Pin numbers correspond to numbering on


the module backplane!
Example: Backplane pin
3 is connector pin 43
Grounded if signal
ground is available. In
this case only the EA or
MA signals are
connected

Fig. 3.3.18 R/T and E+M interfaces in F:SYPC


for SYPD-0 - SYPD-3

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 23

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.8.10

Commissioning
System

R/T and E+M Interfaces for SYPD-5 - SYPD-8


External
SYPDs to MDF
/ DDF
A2 028
SYP backplane
connector

15 T
16 R

SYPD 5

3 EA1
4 EB1
SYPD 6
5 MA1
6 MB1

7 EA2
8 EB2
SYPD 7
9 MA2
10 MB2

11 EA3
12 EB3
SYPD 8
13 MA3
14 MB3
EA= Ear A
MA= Mouth A

46
T

47
R

8
9
23 41
EA1 EB1 MA1 MB1

30 31 49 50
EA2 EB2 MA2 MB2

Module T/RM:SYPC
A2 037

3
6
45 42
EA3 EB3 MA3 MB3

Pin numbers correspond to numbering on


the module backplane!
Example: Backplane pin
3 is connector pin 43
Grounded if signal
ground is available. In
this case only the EA or
MA signals are
connected.

Fig. 3.3.19 R/T and E+M interfaces in frame SYPC


for SYPD-5 - SYPD-8

PROC:SYP 24

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.8.11

Installation of More Than 4 SYPDs (only in F:SYPC)


Module T/RM:SYPC has interfaces to four SYPDs. Additional SYPDs (maximum 8) can
be connected if another T/RM:SYPC module is installed (see Fig. 3.3.7).

3.3.9

The User EPROM (USMOF)


External alarms can be displayed at the SYPD. The way in which external alarms are
displayed (alarm priority and lamp address) must be programmed in the user EPROM
(USMOF). In addition, it is possible to analyze the duration of alarms by means of timers
and raise their priority where appropriate.
To adapt alarm signaling (external alarm inputs) to specific customer requirements,
parameter sets are provided which are stored in the user EPROM. Parameters include
the assignment of alarm events to their display and priority in the external alarm section
(all other alarms are controlled by the coordination processor CP). It is also defined in
the user EPROM which SYPDs are connected, which one of them is operating as the
master panel, the horn time limit and the CP supervision time.
Programming of the USER-PROM is described in NIMN:SYP.

3.3.10

Connection of an External Horn


The same type of horn is used externally and internally (telephone transmitter amplifier).
For its connection, see Fig. 3.3.10

3.3.11

Connection of External Alarms to the SYPD


External alarm lines are connected to the MDF special terminal strip and jumpered to
the SYPs external alarm inputs at the MDF.
The unit issuing the alarm can send signals to the SYP as follows:

With normally open contact: The unit switches ground to the SYP with its contact

With normally closed contact: The unit interrupts ground to the SYP with its contact

Connection of alarm lines to the MDF

With one wire: The other side of the contact is connected to the common ground in
the unit issuing the alarm

With two wires: One wire is connected to the MDF. The other wire is connected to
the MDFs common ground.

The SYP ground is connected to the MDF over one wire of the alarm cable.
For a graphical representation of the various connection options see Fig. 3.3.20.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 25

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

External alarms, closed loop (cl)

External alarms, open loop (ol)

1-wire:

1-wire:
SYP

SYP

External
equipment

External
equipment

2-wire:
SYP

2-wire:
External
equipment

SYP

External
equipment

Fig. 3.3.20 Methods of connecting alarm lines to the MDF


The assignment of connector pins on cable 223 to the MDF is shown in Fig. 3.3.21,
Fig. 3.3.23, Fig. 3.3.24:

PROC:SYP 26

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

No. of the
external
alarm

Connector
pin no.

41

A 022

Connector
pin no.

No. of the
external
alarm

EAL 13

EAL 1

EAL 14

EAL 2

EAL 15

EAL 3

EAL 16

EAL 4

EAL 17

EAL 5

EAL 18

EAL 6

EAL 19

EAL 7

EAL 20

EAL 8

EAL 21

EAL 9

EAL 22

EAL 10

EAL 23

EAL 11

EAL 24

EAL 12

not
used

not
used

Ground
from SYP
60

20

Fig. 3.3.21 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of cable 223


(32 wires) from the MDF to the SYP (module RM:EA)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 27

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

No. of the
external
alarm

Connector
pin no.

Connector
pin no.

D 141
01

41

EAJ 1
EAJ 2
EAJ 3
EAJ 4
EAJ 5
EAJ 6
EAJ 7
EAJ 8

60

20

Fig. 3.3.22 Alarm inputs on the backplane connector of module


T/RM:SYCR from the MDF to the SYP

EAL1

EAL9

EAL13

EAL12

EAL21

EAL24

not used
not used

EAL 8

EAL20

GND

Fig. 3.3.23 Assignment of external alarms on the horizontal MDF

PROC:SYP 28

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

EAL1

EAL 8

not used

EAL9

EAL12

EAL13

EAL20

not used

EAL21

EAL24

GND
Ground
from SYP

Fig. 3.3.24 Assignment of external alarms on the vertical MDF

3.3.11.1

Test of Alarms
Alarm as normally open contact:
Apply ground to the corresponding MDF input. The corresponding SYPD LED should
then light up.
Alarm as normally closed contact:
The SYPD LED is lit when the alarm is programmed as normally closed contact and the
alarm input is open. Applying ground switches off the alarm and the corresponding
SYPD LED goes off.

3.3.12

Forwarding of Alarms with Module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR


Module TXA:SYPC or T/RM:SYCR is used to forward alarms from the system panel
control. Up to 24 (max.8 in the case of T/RM:SYCR) different SYPD indications can be
forwarded to external fault signaling equipment via relays. It is defined in the user
EPROM which priorities of alarms (critical, major, minor) on which SYPD indicator are
output to one or more relays. The assignment of relays to alarm lines (AL) is fixed. The
relays have the same designation as the alarm lines and their contacts are marked al.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 29

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Electrically, there are four ways of forwarding alarms (see also Fig. 3.3.25):
a) contact switches ground on or off
b) contact switches -48V / -60V on or off
c) contact switches a passive loop on or off
d) contact switches an active loop carrying -48V / -60V on or off
Resistors or jumpers must be inserted for each relay or wire pair in the jumper field of
module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR, in accordance with the type of alarm forwarding used,
as shown in Fig. 3.3.25 (resistors are included with the rack delivery package).
The position of the jumper field on module TXA:SYPC is shown in: MMN:SYP-TAB .
The position of the jumper field on module T/RM:SYCR is shown in: MMN:SYP for CDE
-TAB.

PROC:SYP 30

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.12.1

Connections on the Jumper Field for Alarm Output (TXA:SYPC /


T/RM:SYCR)

a) Ground

b) Power
.2

.2
DB
.3
.5

c) Passive loop

d) Active loop

.2

.2
.3

.3

.3
.5

GND B

.5
R or DB
.5

.4

.4

.4

.4

.1

.1

.1

.1
-UB

.7

.7
DB

.8
0.1M

.7

.7

DB

.8
=

0.1M

470

B
2K

.8

.8
=

0.1M

470

DB

DB

0.1M

470

470

B
2K

A
RA

B
RB

Receiver
2K

RA+RB
2K

-UB

GND B

-UB

GND B

R
= 1000 ohm P Wid 51 V39200-Z4102-J or equivalent
DB
= Wire link
-UB
= Exchange voltage -48/-60 V
GND B = Ground B
The link between .7 and .8 must always be inserted. Certain input circuits of external alarm receivers
may require that it be open.

Fig. 3.3.25 Connections on the jumper field for alarm output

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 31

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.3.12.2

Connector Pin Assignment for Alarm Forwarding (Module


TXA:SYPC)

Alarm
number

Connecto
r pin no.

A 046

41

Connector
pin no.

Alarm
number

not
used

not
used
AL 1A

AL 1B

AL 2A

AL 2B

AL 3A

AL 3B

AL 4A

AL 4B

AL 5A

AL 5B

AL 6A

AL 6B

AL 7A

AL 7B

AL 8A

AL 8B

AL 9A

AL 9B

AL 10A

AL 10B

AL 11A

AL 11B

AL 12A

AL 12B
not
used

not
used
60

20

B 046
41

1
not
used

not
used
AL 13A

AL 13B

AL 14A

AL 14B

AL 15A

AL 15B

AL 16A

AL 16B

AL 17A

AL 17B

AL 18A

AL 18B

AL 19A

AL 19B

AL 20A

AL 20B

AL 21A

AL 21B

AL 22A

AL 22B

AL 23A

AL 23B

AL 24A

AL 24B
not
used

not
used
60

20

Fig. 3.3.26 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding on module TXA:SYPC

PROC:SYP 32

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.3.12.3

Connector Pin Assignment for Alarm Forwarding (Module


T/RM:SYCR)

Connector
pin no.

41

D 141

Connector
pin no.

Alarm
number

01

AL 1A
AL 1B
AL 2A
AL 2B
AL 3A
AL 3B
AL 4A
AL 4B
AL 5A
AL 5B
AL 6A
AL 6B
AL 7A
AL 7B
AL 8A
AL 8B
60

20

Fig. 3.3.27 Connector pin assignment for alarm forwarding


on module T/RM:SYCR

3.3.13

Notes on Installation Testing of the SYPD


To test the EWSD installation, the SYP equipment and SYPD (in the exchange) must
first be tested and placed in service. A remote SYPD cannot be included in the installation test until the customer has installed the required 2-wire or 4-wire transmission link
to the OMC (see also Fig. 3.3.11).
Module TXA:SYPC (S30810-Q759-..) (T/RM:SYCR in F:SMSC) is used for the
forwarding of alarms to the OMC or another location. The jumpers on this module are
soldered in when the customers requirements have been clarified. Alarms to be
forwarded that are not included in the standard USER-PROM must be programmed in
addition.
How external alarms are received (RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR) must also be clarified with
the customer. The external alarms must be programmed in the USER-PROM.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 33

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

If only one SYPD is deployed in the exchange, its cable connector is plugged into backplane mounting location B034 (C135 in F:SMSC(C)) as SYPD 0. If power is supplied via
the exchange voltage, it is fed to the SYPD via the corresponding SYPD fuse in the
SYPC If a second SYPD is installed in the OMC as a remote SYPD, then this SYPD
must have its own power pack, because remote feeding from the exchange is not
possible over a distance of more than 200m. If two SYPDs are installed, it must be
ensured that they are connected to different transmitters/receivers in the modules
T/RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR.
Cabling from the transmitter/receiver modules T/RM:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR to the MDF
runs via the backplane cable at mounting location A028 / D141.
Using a 2-wire line, a distance of up to 11 km can be bridged between SYPC and SYPD.
Over greater distances, a 4-wire E&M line must be used.
(see also Fig. 3.3.11)
System MOLOC on
panel backplane
of
F:SYPC(A)

Transmission
line

Comments

SYPD0

B034

2-wire

Remote SYPD or SYPD in the exchange

SYPD1

A040

4-wire

Remote SYPD or SYPD in the exchange

SYPD2

A034

4-wire

SYPD3

B040

4-wire

Tab. 3.3.2 Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SYPC(A)

System MOLOC on
panel backplane
of F:SMSC

Transmission
line

Comments

SYPD0

C 135

2-wire

Remote SYPD or SYPD in the exchange

SYPD1

D 141

4-wire

Remote SYPD or SYPD in the exchange

Tab. 3.3.3 Mounting locations of SYPD connections on F:SMSC(C)

Basic Test of Rack


Check the rack equipment and revision statuses (issues) against the exchange
configuration documents (AKUHW lists), if this has not already been done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Perform a visual inspection of the wire-wrap fields for bent pins, short circuits,
contacts and foreign objects.

PROC:SYP 34

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Create Basic State

Note: The assignment of fuses and DCCs depends on the rack used :
If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG
If SYP is installed in R:CE
If SYP is installed in R:SE

...... (see Fig. 3.3.1)


...... (see Fig. 3.3.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.3.3)

Make sure that all SYP fuses have been unscrewed


Make sure that all SYP DCCs are switched off

Connect the SYPD

In the installation test phase of an EWSD/MSC network node, the SYP must be
placed in service in a minimum configuration. In other words, the SYPD must be
installed in the exchange for the basic test as SYPD0 using cable type 225.
If SYP is installed in F:SYPC
If SYP is installed in F:SMSC

...... (see Fig. 3.3.7)


...... (see Fig. 3.3.8)

Power is supplied to the SYPD via the same cable as soon as the fuse for -UE 48/60 V is inserted.

Check Switch Settings


If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG:
Check the position of the switches on module T/RM:SYPC
If SYP is installed in R:CE:
Check the position of the switches on module T/RM:SYCR

i ... MMN:SYP, TAB


i ... MMN:SYP for
CDE, TAB

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 35

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Insert USER-PROM

Caution: ESD safety precautions must be observed, i.e. a grounding bracelet


must be worn, for instance.
The USER-PROM supplied on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR (standard
PROM with the designation V30113-....) is pre-programmed for one SYPD-0
and one SYPD-1.
If only one SYPD is installed, the double SYP indicator lights up when the SYP
is active and in service, and messages are output stating that the number of
SYPDs does not match the number of SYPDs programmed in the USERPROM.
Customer requirements that call for modifications in the USER-PROM should
not be programmed into the USER-PROM until after installation testing.

......NIMN:SYP
......(see Fig. 3.3.5)
......(see Fig. 3.3.6)

Programming of the USER-PROM is described in:


Position of the USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC:
Position of the USER-PROM on module PU:SYCR:
Insert the standard PROM or customized USER-PROM on module COM:SYPC
/ PU:SYCR.

Attach Labels on SYPD

......(see
Fig. 3.3.1
0)

Undo the four screws on the front of the SYPD.


After removing the front, unfasten the light-colored plastic panel behind the
transparent front face and remove it.
Attach the adhesive labels from the supplied label sheet in the marked areas, if
this has not been done already.
The labels for external alarms are not attached until the customized USERPROM has been produced according to the customer requirements.

......(see Fig. 3.3.9)

Insert Fuses
Insert the SYP fuses in the fuse panel:

If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG


If SYP is installed in R:CE
If SYP is installed in R:SE

PROC:SYP 36

......(see Fig. 3.3.1)


......(see Fig. 3.3.2)
......(see Fig. 3.3.3)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Switch on the DCC


Switch on the corresponding DCC

If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG


If SYP is installed in R:CE
If SYP is installed in R:SE
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCC lit?

...... (see Fig. 3.3.1)


...... (see Fig. 3.3.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.3.3)
Y h ... 14
N h ... 9

LED not lit


Switch off the DC converter
Check the fuse and replace if necessary
Pull all corresponding modules
Switch the DC converter on again
Is the green LED lit?

10

Y h ... 11
N h ... 10

Fault Clearance

Possible causes of the fault:

DCC faulty

Break in the power supply between the fuse and the converter

Ground connection from frame/DCC to the + bus bar has a break in it

Short-circuit on the wire-wrap field

Clear the fault


If it is the DCC that is faulty:

Switch off the DC converter


Make sure that the spare DCC is switched off
Replace the faulty DCC with the spare module

After fault clearance, re-insert all modules

11

h ... 8

Identify Faulty Module

One or more modules faulty (repeat the following steps until all modules have
been tested)
Switch off the DC converter
Insert the first (next) module
Switch the DC converter on again
Is the green LED lit?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 13
N h ... 12
PROC:SYP 37

ITMN - OFFLINE

12

Commissioning
System

Replace Faulty Module

The last module inserted is suspect


Switch off the DC converter
Replace the faulty module with a spare module
When installing a spare COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR module, check the USERPROM or transfer the USER-PROM from the faulty module.

13

Decision: all Modules Tested


Have all modules now been tested?

14

Decision Block: LED HOLD


Is the HOLD LED on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR still lit?

15

Y h ... 8
N h ... 11
Y h ... 15
N h ... 17

Reset Module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR


Press the RESET key
Is the HOLD LED on module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR still lit?

16

Y h ... 16
N h ... 17

Replace Module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR

Module COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR is probably faulty


Switch off DC converter
Replace the faulty module with a spare module
When installing a spare COM:SYPC / PU:SYCR module, check the USERPROM or transfer the USER-PROM from the faulty module.
After replacing the module, continue

17

Basic Test (SYPD in the Exchange)


Check the switches on module T/RM:SYPD and, if installed, on module
ACC:SYPD
Plug in the connecting cable to the SYPC at the SYPD

PROC:SYP 38

h ... 8

......MMN:SYPTAB LED:SYP
......(see
Fig. 3.3.1
0)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

18

ITMN - OFFLINE

TEST key (SYPD in the Exchange)


Press the TEST key
Go to one of the following blocks in accordance with the system response
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn sounding
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn not sounding
Only the 7-segment displays are lit
No LEDs are lit, no 7-segment displays are lit and the horn is not sounding

19

h ... 22
h ... 19
h ... 20
h ... 21

Horn (SYPD in the Exchange)


Check the setting of switch HI on module T/RM:SYPD
Check that the connecting cable to the horn is plugged in correctly
Replace the horn if it is faulty
Repeat the test

20

h ... 18

Module DYM:SYP Faulty (SYPD in the Exchange)


Pull the connecting cable to the SYPC from the SYPD
Unplug the power cable, if there is one
Replace the faulty DYM:SYP module with a spare module
Insert the power cable, if there is one
Insert the connecting cable to the SYPC in the SYPD
Repeat the test

21

h ... 18

Check System Voltage (SYPD in the Exchange)

If system voltage is present, the SYP displays light up when the TEST key is
pressed. Any other response implies that a fuse or the EWA module is faulty.
Check the system voltage at pins +UE and -UE on module ACC:SYPD, if it is
installed
Check the fuse (FU) assigned to the SYPD in the fuse panel:

If SYP is installed in R:MB/CCG


If SYP is installed in R:CE
If SYP is installed in R:SE

...... (see Fig. 3.3.1)


...... (see Fig. 3.3.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.3.3)

Check the system voltage in the connecting cable SYPD-SYPC at pins 13 and
14 (+UE), 16 and 17 (-UE)
If the system voltage up to the SYPD is OK: Replace module EWA in the SYPD
Repeat the test

22

h ... 18

UPDATE Key (SYPD in the Exchange)


Press the UPDATE key

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SYP 39

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

The following system responses are possible:

Data are transferred from the SYPC / SYCR to the SYPD. The transfer takes
about 1 minute. Displayed statuses are random.
The UPDATE indicator is lit during the data transfer.

The indicator does not light


Possible causes could be:
Fault in the transmission equipment
Wiring error: Transmitter and receiver transposed

Y h ... 24
N h ... 23

Did the indicator light up?

23

Nonstandard Maintenance
Perform nonstandard maintenance

24

h ... 18

Repeat the test after completing nonstandard maintenance

End of the Basic Test (SYPD in the Exchange)

End of the basic test for SYPD in the exchange

h ... 25

For the basic test of the remote SYPDs

25

Basic Test (Remote SYPD)

This test cannot be performed until the remote SYPD is connected over a 2-wire
or 4-wire transmission line (E&M) and the USER-PROM has been programmed
for two SYPDs.
If the remote SYPD is operated over a 2-wire line, the remote SYPD is SYPD0
and the SYPD in the exchange is SYPD1.
If the remote SYPD is operated over a 4-wire E&M line, the remote SYPD is
SYPD1 and the SYPD in the exchange is SYPD0.

If SYP is installed in F:SMSC(C)

......(see Tab. 3.3.2)


......(see Tab. 3.3.3)

Check the switches on module T/RM:SYPD and, if it is installed, on module


ACC:SYPD

......MMN:SYPTAB LED:SYP

If SYP is installed in F:SYPC

Plug in the power cable


Insert the connecting cable to the transmission equipment at the SYPD

PROC:SYP 40

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

26

ITMN - OFFLINE

TEST Key (Remote SYPD)


Press the TEST key
Go to one of the following blocks, depending on the system response
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn sounding
All LEDs lit, 7-segment displays lit, horn not sounding
Only the 7-segment displays are lit
No LEDs are lit, no 7-segment displays are lit and the horn is not sounding

27

h ... 30
h ... 27
h ... 28
h ... 29

Horn (Remote SYPD)


Check the setting of switch HI on module T/RM:SYPD
Check that the connecting cable to the horn is plugged in correctly
Replace the horn if it is faulty
Repeat the test

28

h ... 26

Module DYM:SYP Faulty (Remote SYPD)


Pull the connecting cable to the SYPC from the SYPD
Unplug the power cable, if there is one
Replace the faulty DYM:SYP module with a spare module
Insert the power cable, if there is one
Insert the connecting cable to the SYPC in the SYPD
Repeat the test

29

h ... 26

Check System Voltage (Remote SYPD)


Check the operating voltage of the SYPD
If the system voltage up to the SYPD is OK:
Replace module EWA in the SYPD
Repeat the test

30

h ... 26

UPDATE Key (UPDATE) (Remote SYPD)


Press the UPDATE key

The following system responses are possible:

Data are transferred from the SYPC to the SYPD. The transfer takes about 1
minute. Displayed statuses are random.
The UPDATE indicator is lit during the data transfer.

The indicator does not light


Possible causes could be:
Fault in the transmission equipment
Wiring error: Transmitter and receiver transposed

Did the indicator light up?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 32
N h ... 31

PROC:SYP 41

ITMN - OFFLINE

31

Commissioning
System

Nonstandard Maintenance
Perform nonstandard maintenance

h ... 26

Repeat the test after completing nonstandard maintenance

32

End of the Basic Test (Remote SYPD)

End of the basic test for remote SYPD

h ... 33

For the testing of external alarms

33

Programming the USER-PROM for External Alarms

Clarify with the customer which alarms signaled by external alarm units are to
be indicated with what priority at the SYPD.
Both the connection of the alarms to the SYP and the means of forwarding of
the alarms must be programmed into the USER-PROM.
If the STANDARD-USER-PROM for Deutsche Telekom AG is being used, it is
not necessary to program external alarms because Deutsche Telekom uses a
uniform signaling concept.

......NIMN:SYP

Program the connection and forwarding of external alarms into the USERPROM, if this has not already been done.
Label the corresponding SYPD indicators with the adhesive labels from the
supplied label sheet. Labels not included on the sheet must be ordered from the
responsible sales department.

34

Connection of External Alarms

......(see 3.3.11)

Connect the external alarm units to the MDF.


External alarms must be connected on the special terminal strip of the MDF and
jumpered to the external alarm inputs of the SYP on the MDF.

......(see 3.3.11)

For the assignment of connector pins to the MDF terminal points:

35

Enter Alarm Texts

External alarms are reported at the OMT-PC with the number of the external
alarm and its name.
The name of an alarm is entered at the OMT-PC when the alarm is created.
Enter the alarm name, e.g. FIRE ALARM, as text no. 1

b
b

Display existing alarm names with DISP ALTEXT.


Alarm names which are not needed must be canceled with CAN ALTEXT (but
only if they are no longer linked to external alarms).

PROC:SYP 42

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

36
b

ITMN - OFFLINE

Link Alarm Names to External Alarms


Link the alarm names to the external alarms with:
CR EAL:SITE=EXCH,EAL=...(1-24),TEXTNO=...(1 - x);

Further commands: DISP EAL and CAN EAL

37

Decision Block
Are alarms to be forwarded from the SYPD to another facility (e.g. OMC)?

38

Y h ... 38
N h ... END

Forwarding of External Alarms

Module TXA:SYPC must be installed for the forwarding of alarms (only in


F:SYPC).
Before inserting the jumpers on module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR, various points
must be clarified with the customer:

Are alarms/indications to be forwarded to the OMC or other facilities (e.g.


building security staff). If so, jumpers or resistors must be soldered onto
module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR (see MMN:SYP, TAB / MMN:SYP for CDE,
TAB).

How are the alarms to be forwarded?


Individually: One or more alarms/indications are assigned to a relay on
module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR and forwarded by this relay.
In groups: The alarms are grouped and forwarded.
Example:
All critical alarms indicated at the SYPD are assigned as a group to the 1st
relay and forwarded.
All major alarms are assigned to the 2nd relay and forwarded.
All indications are assigned to the 3rd relay and forwarded.
The alarms/indications are assigned to the relays in the USER-PROM.

Deactivate the SYP and switch off the DC converter


Pull module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR and solder in jumpers or resistors on the
module

...... (see 3.3.12)

Insert module TXA:SYPC / T/RM:SYCR


Check the corresponding fuse
Activate the SYP
Connect the customers alarm signaling equipment to the MDF

For alarm forwarding, the USER-PROM must be programmed as specified in:

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

...... NIMN, SYP

PROC:SYP 43

ITMN - OFFLINE

39

Commissioning
System

Enable Alarm Forwarding

The alarm forwarding function of module TXA:SYPC is only enabled if ALSTAT1


or ALSTAT2 is set.

Check the system settings in the database with command DISP ALMODE
System response:
STATUS
| HLIM
-----------------------------ALSTAT1
| YES

b
40

If any other status is set, change it with the following command:


ENTR ALMODE:STATUS=ALSTAT1,HLIM=YES;
Test Alarm Forwarding

In the installation test phase, system error messages must be compared with
the alarms signaled by the signaling facilities.
Trigger alarms to check the alarm forwarding function.

Note:
Alarm forwarding is dependent on the SYPD indication and the priority defined
for the alarm.
If a single lamp/LED on the SYPD only allows the indication of a major alarm, it
is not possible to forward a critical alarm.
An alarm is only forwarded as a critical alarm if its priority is defined as critical.

END

PROC:SYP 44

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4

Off-line Installation of Switching Network


SN

3.4.1

Documents
The following documents are required as references:

3.4.2

Maintenance Manual MMN:SN(B)


AKUHW Lists

Fuse Assignments
There are different fuse assignments for the SN. These assignments depend on:

The rack used

R:SN(B)/LTGG
R:SN(B)/LTGM
R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM
R:CE (Rural Exchanges)

The cable routing for the SN:


Cable routing from above
Cable routing from below

The size of the SN

The frame to be switched on:


TSG-frame
SSG-frame

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.4.3

Fuse Assignment for SN (31LTG)


(Rural Exchanges)

3.4.3.1
FU 01

FU

Rack R:CE

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
Fuse panel / AD:RAL

10

MOLOC C343 (Supply for SN-0)

MUT01

F:SMSC(C)-0

MUT02

F:SMSC(C)-1

MUT04

F:PIOP(A)

MUT03

D
29

MOLOC C343 (Supply for SN-1)

C
D
C
D

Air circulator
C

MUT08

F:PBC(A)

MUT05

F:PBC(A)

MUT06

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT09

F:PIOPA)

MUT07

F:DEV

MUT10

D
C
D

Air circulator

MUT11

Fig. 3.4.1 Rack R:CE

PROC:SN 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4.3.2
FU 01

FU

SN Fuses / Frames and Modules in R:CE

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
F:SMSC-0
10

TSMB 3
SGCB
DCCMC

SSM16B
TSMB 2

TSMB 0
TSMB 1

101 113 125 137 149 161 173 185 197 209 221 233 245 257 269 281 293 305 317 329 341

F:SMSC-1
29

TSMB 3
SGCB
DCCMC

SSM16B
TSMB 2

TSMB 0
TSMB 1

101 113 125 137 149 161 173 185 197 209 221 233 245 257 269 281 293 305 317 329 341

Fig. 3.4.2 SN Fuses / Frames and Modules in R:CE

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4.4
3.4.4.1

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment for SN (63LTG)


Fuse Assignment for R:SN(B)/LTGG
FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-0)

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:TSG(B) (SN-0)

MUT02

F:TSG(B) (SN-1)

MUT03

F:LTG

MUT04

F:LTG

MUT05

F:LTG

MUT06

C
D

11

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-1)

C
D
A
B

A
B
A
B
A

F:LTG

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.3 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from above

PROC:SN 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:LTG

MUT02

F:LTG

MUT03

F:LTG

MUT04

F:LTG

MUT05

F:TSG(B) (SN-0)

MUT06

F:TSG(B) (SN-1)

MUT07

A
B
A
B
A
B

FU

01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-0)

C
D

11

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-1)

C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.4 R:SN(B)/LTGG cable routing from below

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.4.4.2
FU 01

FU

Fuse Assignment for R:SN(B)/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-0)

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

F:TSG(B) (SN-0)

MUT02

32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-1)

F:TSG(B) (SN-1)

MUT03

C LTG
D

C LTG
D

C LTG
D
C LTG
D

LTG

LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.5 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from above

PROC:SN 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

Fuse panel

FU

MUT01

LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG


MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG
MUT03

F:LTGM(A)
C LTG
D

C LTG
D
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-0)

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

F:TSG(B) (SN-0)

MUT06

D
32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-1)

F:TSG(B) (SN-1)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.6 R:SN(B)/LTGM cable routing from below

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.4.4.3
FU 01

FU

Fuse Assignment for R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

FU
01

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-0)

33 FU

31

F:TSG(B)

MUT02

F:TSG(B)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

D
32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-1)

C
D

A
B
A
B

C
D
C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.7 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above

PROC:SN 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

F:LTGM(A)

MUT02

F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:TSG(B)

MUT06

F:TSG(B)

MUT07

D
C
D

A
B
A
B

FU
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-0)

C
D

32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SN-1)

C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.8 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4.5
3.4.5.1

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment for SN (126 LTG - 504 LTG) TSG-frame


Fuse Assignment for R:TSG(B)/LTGG
FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:TSG(B) (TSG-0-tsg)

MUT02

F:TSG(B) (TSG-1-tsg)

MUT03

F:LTGG(A)

MUT04

F:LTGG(A)

MUT05

F:LTGG(A)

MUT06

F:LTGG(A)

MUT07

C
D

11

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-1-tsg)

C
D
A
B

A
B
A
B
A
B

CD

Fig. 3.4.9 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above

PROC:SN 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
A

F:LTGG(A)

MUT02

F:LTGG(A)

MUT03

F:LTGG(A)

MUT04

F:LTGG(A)

MUT05

B
A
B
A
B

FU

01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)

F:TSG(B) (TSG-0-tsg)

MUT06

F:TSG(B) (TSG-1-tsg)

MUT07

D
11

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-1-tsg)

C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.10 R:TSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.4.5.2
FU 01

FU

Fuse Assignment for R:TSG(B)/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:TSG(B) (TSG-0-tsg)

MUT02

C
D

32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-1-tsg)

F:TSG(B) (TSG-1-tsg)

MUT03

C LTG
D

C LTG
D

C LTG
D
C LTG
D

LTG

LTG LTG LTG

F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.11 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above

PROC:SN 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

Fuse panel

32

FU

MUT01

LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG


MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG
MUT03

F:LTGM(A)
C LTG
D

C LTG
D
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

F:TSG(B) (TSG-0-tsg)

MUT06

D
32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-1-tsg)

F:TSG(B) (TSG-1-tsg)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.12 R:TSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.4.5.3
FU 01

FU

Fuse Assignment for R:TSG(B)/MB/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

FU
01

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)

33 FU

31

F:TSG(B)

MUT02

F:TSG(B)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

D
32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-1-tsg)

C
D

A
B
A
B

C
D
C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.13 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from above

PROC:SN 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

F:LTGM(A)

MUT02

F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:TSG(B)

MUT06

F:TSG(B)

MUT07

D
C
D

A
B
A
B

FU
01

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-0-tsg)

C
D

32

MOLOC C331 (Supply for TSG-1-tsg)

C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.14 R:SN/MB/LTGM cable routing from below

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4.6

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment for SN (126 LTG - 504 LTG) SSG-frame


In SN (126LTG) switching networks only the left half of the SSG module frame is
equipped. This is fed by only one DCC.

D
C
C
M
S

SSG

EMPTY

E
M
P
T
Y

Fig. 3.4.15 Frame SSG(B) for SN (126 LTG)


In SN (252 LTG..504 LTG) switching networks both halves of the SSG module frame are
equipped and each one is fed by a separate DCC.

D
C
C
M
S

SSG

SSG

D
C
C
M
S

Fig. 3.4.16 Frame SSG(B) for SN (252 LTG..504 LTG)

PROC:SN 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.4.6.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment for R:SSG(B)/LTGG


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0


or SSG-0-2)

02

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-0-1


or SSG-0-3)

11

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-1-0


or SSG-1-2)

12

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-1-1


or SSG-1-3)

Fuse panel
F:SSG(B)
C
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or
SSG-0-2
or
SSG-0-3
D
F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2

MUT01

MUT02

MUT03

F:LTGG(A)

MUT04

F:LTGG(A)

MUT05

F:LTGG(A)

MUT06

F:LTGG(A)

MUT07

A
B
A
B
A
B

CD

Fig. 3.4.17 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from above

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:LTGG(A)

MUT02

F:LTGG(A)

MUT03

F:LTGG(A)

MUT04

F:LTGG(A)

MUT05

B
A
B
A
B

FU
01

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0


or SSG-0-2)

02

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-0-1


or SSG-0-3)

11

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-1-0


or SSG-1-2)

12

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-1-1


or SSG-1-3)

F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3
D or SSG-0-2

MUT06

F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.18 R:SSG(B)/LTGG cable routing from below

PROC:SN 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4.6.2
FU 01

FU

FU
01

02
32

33

Fuse Assignment for R:SSG(B)/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0


or SSG-0-2)
MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3)
MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-1-0
or SSG-1-2)
MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3)

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

Fuse panel

32

FU

MUT01

F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3
D or SSG-0-2

MUT02

F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2

MUT03

C LTG
D

C LTG
D

C LTG
D
C LTG
D

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.19 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from above

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

Fuse panel

32

FU

MUT01

LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG


MUT02
F:LTGM(A)
LTG LTG LTG LTG LTG
F:LTGM(A)
C LTG
D

C LTG
D

FU
01
02

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0


or SSG-0-2)
MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3)

32

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-1-0


or SSG-1-2)

33

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-1-1


or SSG-1-3)

MUT03

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
or SSG-0-3
D or SSG-0-2

MUT05

MUT06

F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
or SSG-1-3
D or SSG-1-2
C

MUT07
CD

Fig. 3.4.20 R:SSG(B)/LTGM cable routing from below

PROC:SN 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.4.6.3
FU 01

FU

FU
01
02

32
33

Fuse Assignment for R:SSG(B)/MB/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0


/ SSG-0-2)

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-0-1


/ SSG-0-3)

F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
D / SSG-0-2
/ SSG-0-3

MUT02

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-1-0


/ SSG-1-2)

F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
D / SSG-1-2
/ SSG-1-3

MUT03

MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-1-1


/ SSG-1-3)

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

B
A
B

C
D
C
D

CD

Fig. 3.4.21 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from above

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:SN 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

33 FU

31

F:LTGM(A)

MUT02

F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

D
C
D

A
B
A
B

FU
01
02

32
33

MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-0-0


/ SSG-0-2)
MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-0-1
/ SSG-0-3)
MOLOC C101 (Supply for SSG-1-0
/ SSG-1-2)
MOLOC C331 (Supply for SSG-1-1
/ SSG-1-3)

F:SSG(B)
SSG-0-0
SSG-0-1
D / SSG-0-2
/ SSG-0-3

MUT06

F:SSG(B)
SSG-1-0
SSG-1-1
D / SSG-1-2
/ SSG-1-3

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.4.22 R:SN/MB/LTGM with F:SSG(B) cable routing from below

PROC:SN 22

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Basic Test (Rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

Check Ground Connections


Check whether the ground connections between adjacent racks are correctly
plugged in

Decision Block: Capacity stage of the SN


Branch to one of the following blocks according to the capacity stage of the SN
It is an SN (31 LTG) switching network
It is an SN (63 LTG) switching network
It is an SN (126 LTG.. 504 LTG) switching network

h ... 4
h ... 12
h ... 20

Create Basic State (SN (31 LTG))

The location of the SN modules in the SMSC(C) frames and the corresponding
fuses are shown in:

...... (see Fig. 3.4.2)

Switch off SN DCCs in the SMSC(C) frames


Screw out all SN main fuses

Power Supply Check (SN (31 LTG))


Screw in the first/next SN-fuse
Switch on the corresponding DCC in the SN module frame to check the fuse
assignment to the MUT
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

Decision Block
Have all SN-fuses already been screwed in?

Y h ... 6
N h ... 7
Y h ... END
N h ... 5

Identify Faulty Modules


Unplug all related modules individually under power (except DCC), but leave
them in position.
After each module is unplugged the voltage should be checked again. (The
green LED of the DCC is lit)
Could the fault be cleared by removing a certain module?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 8
N h ... 9
PROC:SN 23

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Replace Faulty Module


Replace faulty module, plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing faulty module

h ... 5

Faulty DCC
Switch off the DCC of the faulty module frame
Screw out the fuse which is allocated to this DCC
Replace DCC by spare module, screw in fuse, switch on DCC
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

10

Y h ... 11
N h ... 10

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

11

h ... 5

Plug in Modules
Plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing the DCC

12

h ... 5

Create Basic State (SN (63 LTG))


Switch off DCCs in the SN module frames
Screw out all SN main fuses

PROC:SN 24

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Power Supply Check (SN (63 LTG))

Caution: The assignment of the fuses to the relevant module frame is implemented for two different cable routings and for two different racks:
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from below
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from below
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from below

...... (see Fig. 3.4.3)


...... (see Fig. 3.4.4)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.5)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.6)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.7)
...... (see Fig. 3.4.8)

Screw in the first/next SN-fuse


Switch on the corresponding DCC in the SN module frame to check the fuse
assignment to the MUT
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

14

Decision Block
Have all SN-fuses already been screwed in?

15

Y h ... 14
N h ... 15
Y h ... END
N h ... 15

Identify Faulty Modules


Unplug all modules individually under power (except DCCMS), but leave them in
position.
After each module is unplugged the voltage should be checked again. (The
green LED of the DCC is lit)
Could the fault be cleared by removing a certain module?

16

Y h ... 16
N h ... 17

Replace Faulty Module


Replace faulty module, plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing faulty module

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 13

PROC:SN 25

ITMN - OFFLINE

17

Commissioning
System

Faulty DCC
Switch off the DCC of the faulty module frame
Screw out the fuse which is allocated to this DCC
Replace DCC by spare module, screw in fuse, switch on DCC
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

18

Y h ... 19
N h ... 18

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

19

h ... 13

Plug in Modules
Plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing the DCC

20

h ... 13

Create Basic State (TSG frames)


Switch off DCCs in the TSG module frames
Screw out all TSG main fuses

PROC:SN 26

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

21

ITMN - OFFLINE

Power Supply Check (TSG-Frames for SN(126..504LTG))

Caution: The assignment of the fuses to the relevant module frame is implemented for two different cable routings and for two different racks:
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from above
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from below

...... (see Fig. 3.4.9)


...... 0)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from above

...... 1)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from below

...... 2)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from above

...... 3)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from below

...... 4)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Screw in the first/next TSG-fuse


Switch on the corresponding DCC in the TSG module frame to check the fuse
assignment to the MUT
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

22

Decision Block
Have all TSG-fuses already been screwed in?

23

Y h ... 22
N h ... 23
Y h ... 29
N h ... 21

Identify Faulty Modules (TSG-Frames)


Unplug all modules individually under power (except DCCMS), but leave them in
position.
After each module is unplugged the voltage should be checked again. (The
green LED of the DCC is lit)
Could the fault be cleared by removing a certain module?

24

Y h ... 24
N h ... 25

Replace Faulty Module (TSG-Frames)


Replace faulty module, plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing faulty module

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 21

PROC:SN 27

ITMN - OFFLINE

25

Commissioning
System

Faulty DCC (TSG-Frames)


Switch off the DCC of the faulty module frame
Screw out the fuse which is allocated to this DCC
Replace DCC by spare module, screw in fuse, switch on DCC
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

26

Y h ... 27
N h ... 26

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

27

h ... 21

Plug in Modules (TSG-Frames)


Plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing the DCC

28

h ... 21

Create Basic State (SSG-Frames)


Switch off DCCs in the SSG module frames
Screw out all SSG main fuses

PROC:SN 28

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

29

ITMN - OFFLINE

Power Supply Check (SSG-Frames)

In SN (126LTG) switching networks only the left half of the SSG module
frame is equipped. This is fed by only one DCC

In SN (252 LTG..504 LTG) switching networks both halves of the SSG module
frame are equipped and each one is fed by a separate DCC

Caution: The assignment of the fuses to the relevant module frame is implemented for two different cable routings and for two different racks:
Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from above

...... 7)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGG for cable routing from below

...... 8)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from above

...... 9)(see Fig. 3.4.1

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/LTGM for cable routing from below

...... 0)(see Fig. 3.4.2

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from above

...... 1)(see Fig. 3.4.2

Fuse assignment in R:SN(B)/MB/LTGM for cable routing from below

...... 2)(see Fig. 3.4.2

Screw in the first/next SSG-fuse


Switch on the corresponding DCC in the SSG module frame to check the fuse
assignment to the MUT
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

30

Decision Block
Have all SSG-fuses already been screwed in?

31

Y h ... 30
N h ... 31
Y h ... END
N h ... 29

Identify Faulty Modules (SSG-Frames)


Unplug all modules individually under power (except DCCMS), but leave them in
position.
After each module is unplugged the voltage should be checked again. (The
green LED of the DCC is lit)
Could the fault be cleared by removing a certain module?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 32
N h ... 33

PROC:SN 29

ITMN - OFFLINE

32

Commissioning
System

Replace Faulty Module (SSG-Frames)


Replace faulty module, plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing faulty module

33

h ... 29

Faulty DCC (SSG-Frames)


Switch off the DCC of the faulty module frame
Screw out the fuse which is assigned to this DCC
Replace DCC by spare module, screw in fuse, switch on DCC
Is the LED of the DCC lit?

34

Y h ... 35
N h ... 34

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

35

h ... 29

Plug in Modules (SSG-Frames)


Plug in all modules
Repeat testing after replacing the DCC

h ... 29

END

PROC:SN 30

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.5

Off-line Installation of Common Channel Signaling


Network Control
CCNC:CCS7

3.5.1

Documents
The following documents are required as references

3.5.2

Maintenance Manual MMN:CCS7


AKUHW Lists

LED Displays (Processor Modules)


To show the operating state and the statuses in the start-up procedure, the LEDs in the
faceplate of the processor modules are activated as follows:
Status in the start-up procedure

LEDs
H1

H2

H3

H4

Start-up/M:P(M)U:SIMP test

End of start-up

Test mode / Watchdog inactive

Tab. 3.5.1 LEDs on M:PU:SIMP (M:PMU:SIMP)

Status in the start-up procedure

LED
H1

Start-up/M:MH:SIMP test

End of start-up

Tab. 3.5.2 LEDs on M:MH:SIMP

Status in the start-up procedure

LEDs
H1

H2

H3

Start-up/M:SIPA test

End of start-up

Test mode / Watchdog inactive

Tab. 3.5.3 LEDs on M:SIPA

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Status in the start-up procedure

LEDs
H1

H2

H3

H4

Start-up/M:P(M)U:CPI test

End of start-up

Test mode / Watchdog inactive

Tab. 3.5.4 LEDs on M:PU:CPI (M:PMU:CPI)

3.5.3

LED Displays (SILT Modules)

Status in the start-up procedure

LEDs
H1

H2

H3

H4

Start-up and MU test

Test of peripheral units

Initialization of HW/RL

End of start-up

Test mode / Watchdog inactive

Tab. 3.5.5 LEDs on M:SILTC

Status in the start-up procedure

LEDs
H1

H2

H3

H4

H5

H6

H7

Start-up and RAM test

Stack, watchdog test

EPROM test

Notebook, RAM test

TIMER, DMA test

PORT HDLC

End of start-up

Test mode / Watchdog inactive

Tab. 3.5.6 LEDs on M:SILTD

3.5.4

Fuse Assignment
The fuse assignment for F:SILTD(A) dependents on the rack where the frame is built in

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.5.4.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment in R:CCNP/SILTD


The fuse assignment in R:CCNP/SILTD is realized for 2 different versions of the rack:

shielded or unshielded version


partially shielded version
MUT

SILT Group
left

SILT Group
right

02

FU 1

FU 11

04

FU 3

FU 13

06

FU 7

FU 17

Tab. 3.5.7 Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD


(shielded or unshielded version)

MUT

SILT Group
left

SILT Group
right

02

FU 1

FU 11

04

FU 2

FU 12

06

FU 3

FU 13

Tab. 3.5.8 Fuse assignment R:CCNP/SILTD


(partially shielded version)

3.5.4.2

Fuse Assignment in R:SILTD


MUT

SILT Group
left

SILT Group
right

02

FU 1

FU 11

03

FU 3

FU 13

04

FU 5

FU 15

05

FU 7

FU 17

06

FU 9

FU 19

07

FU 10

FU 20

Tab. 3.5.9 Fuse assignment R:SILTD

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.5.5

Commissioning
System

Rack SILTD

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001
Fuse panel

11

MOLOC A120
03

MUT01

F:SILTD
MUT02

MOLOC A001
A

13

MOLOC A120

F:SILTD
MUT03

B
05

MOLOC A001

MOLOC A120

F:SILTD

15

MUT04

07

MOLOC A001
17

MOLOC A120

F:SILTD

09

MOLOC A001

MOLOC A120

MUT05

19
10

F:SILTD
MUT06

MOLOC A001
A

20

F:SILTD

MOLOC A120

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.5.1 Rack R:SILTD

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.5.6

Rack CCNP/SILTD

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001
Fuse panel

11

MOLOC A120
03

MUT01

F:SILTD
MUT02

MOLOC A001
13

MOLOC A120

F:SILTD
MUT04

07

MOLOC A001

F:SILTD
MUT06

17

MOLOC A120
05

MOLOC A001

MOLOC A120

F:CCNP(B)

06

MUT08

15

MOLOC A001
A

16

F:CCNP(B)

MOLOC A120

MUT10

CD
Fig. 3.5.2 Rack R:CCNP/SILTD

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Basic Test (Rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

Information Block
All work should be performed for the two CCNPs in MUT 08 and 10 in parallel

Create Basic State


Switch off all CCNC-DCCs
Screw out all CCNC-fuses

Screw in Fuses (CCNP)


Screw in the following fuses:

FU 6 for CCNP0 MUT 08

FU16 for CCNP1 MUT 10

Switch on DCCs (CCNP)

......(see Fig. 3.5.2)

Switch on the corresponding DCCs

Y h ... 7
N h ... 6

Is the green LED in the module faceplate on?

LED off (CCNP)

DCC or modules suspect

If DCC is defective, carry out fault clearance according to

i....MMN:CCS7,

If a module is defective, carry out fault clearance according to

PROC,
REP:DCC
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:MOD

Check Basic Setting (CCNP)

When the DCCs have been switched on, the CCNP automatically performs selftests for a few seconds. Modules given in parenthesis refer to a CCNP with a 4
MB memory

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Basic setting for the LED displays on the faceplates of the processor modules is,
that only the following LEDs are lit:

PU:SIMP (PMU:SIMP) : H2

SIPA

PU:CPI

: H2
(PMU:CPI)

: H2

Are the LED displays in the basic setting?

Y h ... 16
N h ... 8

Fault Analysis

To show the operating state and the statuses in the start-up procedure, the
LEDs in the faceplates of the processor modules are activated as shown in:

...... (see 3.5.2)

Carry out fault analysis according to the tables mentioned above


Is LED H1 on one or more of the modules: M:P(M)U:SIMP / M:SIPA /
M:P(M)U:CPI lit?

Y h ... 9
N h ... 10

Slide Switches (CCNP)


Move slide switch S2, which is reached through faceplate opening 400 (except
for M:SIPA, where S2 is marked on the faceplate), until LED H1 goes out.

10

Troubleshooting for CCNP Modules


Switch off all DCCs
Replace module identified by means of fault analysis
Switch on all DCCs again
Is the LED display in basic setting when self-test is completed?

11

Decision Block: Same Fault Pattern


Same fault pattern as before module replacement?

12

Y h ... 16
N h ... 11
Y h ... 12
N h ... 13

Reinsert Original Module


Switch off all DCCs and reinsert original module
After reinserting original module

13

h ... 14

Possible Faults

Spare module could be defective or there is another fault in the CCNP


Switch off all DCCs
After switching off all DCCs

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 14

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

14

Commissioning
System

Decision Block: Other Modules Suspect

Y h ... 10
N h ... 15

Are any other modules suspect?

15

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 5

Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

16

Switch on DCCs (SILTD(A))

......(see 3.5.4)

Screw fuses for F:SILTD(A) (in R:CCNP/SILTD or in R:SILTD depending on


configuration) into fuse panel.
Switch on DCCs

Y h ... 18
N h ... 17

Is green LED on DCC faceplate lit?

17

LED off

DCC or modules suspect

18

If DCC is defective, carry out fault clearance according to

i....MMN:CCS7,

If a module is defective, carry out fault clearance according to

PROC,
REP:DCC
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:MOD

Check Basic Setting (SILTC)

When DCCs have been switched on, SILTC and SILTD automatically perform
self-tests for a few seconds.

Y h ... 19
N h ... 20

Is only LED H2 lit on all M:SILTC?

19

Check Basic Setting (SILTD)

Y h ... 35
N h ... 28

Is only LED H2 lit on all M:SILTD?

20

Interpretation of LED Combinations (SILTC)

......(see Tab. 3.5.5)

For Interpretation of the LED combinations

Y h ... 21
N h ... 22

Is LED H1 lit?

21

Slide Switches (SILTC)


Move slide switch S2 (can be reached through faceplate opening 400) until LED
H1 goes out.

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

22

Check LED H3
Is LED H3 lit?

23

ITMN - OFFLINE

Y h ... 23
N h ... 18

Replace Defective Module (SILTC)


Switch off DCC for suspect M:SILTC by way of toggle switch on DCC module
faceplate
Replace suspect M:SILTC

24

RESET (SILTC)
Switch on DCC and press RESET
Has a new EPROM been installed, and still LED H3 alone is lit on M:SILTC after
self-test?

25

Y h ... 25
N h ... 26

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

26

Check LED H2
Is only LED H2 lit on M:SILTC after self test?

27

h ... 16
Y h ... 18
N h ... 27

Test EPROM
Test EPROM for faults or install new EPROM
Repeat testing

28

Interpretation of LED Combinations (SILTD)

For Interpretation of the LED combinations

29

h ... 24

...... (see Tab. 3.5.6)

Replace Defective Module (SILTD)


Switch off DCC for suspect M:SILTD by way of toggle switch on DCC module
faceplate
Replace suspect M:SILTD

30

RESET (SILTD)
Switch on DCC and press RESET

31

Check LED H2 (SILTD)


Is only LED H2 lit on M:SILTD after self test?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 19
N h ... 32

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

32

Decision Block: Components Changed


Have components from the defective M:SILTD been installed on the replacement module (e.g. EPROM)?

33

Commissioning
System

Y h ... 34
N h ... 33

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

34

h ... 16

Test EPROM (SILTD)


Switch off DCC by way of toggle switch on DCC module faceplate
Test EPROM for faults or install new EPROM
Repeat testing

35

h ... 30

Screw in Fuses (MUXM)


Screw in the following fuses:

36

FU 5 for MUXM-0

FU15 for MUXM-1

Switch on DCCs (MUXM)


Switch on DCCs for MUXM
Is green LED in the module faceplates lit?

37

Y h ... 38
N h ... 37

LED off (MUXM)

DCC or modules suspect

38

If DCC is defective, carry out fault clearance according to

i....MMN:CCS7,

If a module is defective, carry out fault clearance according to

PROC,
REP:DCC
i....MMN:CCS7,
PROC,
REP:MOD

RESET (MUXM)
Press reset switch S1 and start self test
Does LED2 flash when test is finished?

39

Y h ... END
N h ... 39

Replace MUXM
Switch off relevant DCC and replace MUXM
Repeat testing after replacing MUXM

h ... 36

END

PROC:CCNC_CCS7 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6

Off-line Installation of Line Trunk Groups


LTG

3.6.1

Documents
The following documents are required as references:

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Maintenance Manual MMN:LTGx


AKUHW Lists

PROC:LTG 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2
3.6.2.1

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignments of the different Types of LTG


Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
A

MUT02
B

F:LTGA(A) 0
C

FU
01

MOLOC C091

MUT03
B

02

F:LTGA(B) 0

MOLOC C001, C013, C025,C 037


C
03

MOLOC C079, C085, C103, C115

MUT04

F:LTGA(A) 1
C
D
11

MOLOC C091

MUT05
12

F:LTGA(B) 1

MOLOC C001, C013, C025,C 037


C
13

MOLOC C079, C085, C103, C115

CD
Fig. 3.6.1 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA

PROC:LTG 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.6.2.2

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB/LTGB:OSS

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
Power supply for all LTU

MUT02

01

MOLOC C001, C013

F:LTGB(A)
C

02

MOLOC C103, C115


13

Power supply for all LTU

D
A

MUT03
B

11

MOLOC C001, C013


12

MOLOC C103, C115


06

MUT01

Fuse panel

03

Power supply for all LTU

04

MOLOC C001, C013

F:LTGB(A)
C
D

MUT04

F:LTGB(A)
C

05

MOLOC C103, C115

16

Power supply for all LTU


14

MUT05
B

MOLOC C001, C013

F:LTGB(A)
C

15

MOLOC C103, C115

CD
Fig. 3.6.2 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.3

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001, A015

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:LTGC(A)
MUT02

02

MOLOC A001, A015

F:LTGC(A)
MUT03

03

MOLOC A001, A015

F:LTGC(A)
MUT04

11

MOLOC A001, A015

F:LTGC(A)
MUT05

12

MOLOC A001, A015

F:LTGC(A)
MUT06

13

MOLOC A001, A015

F:LTGC(A)
MUT07

CD
Fig. 3.6.3 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC

PROC:LTG 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.6.2.4

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MUT01

Fuse panel

MOLOC A001, A115

F:LTGC(A)

MOLOC A001

MUT02

B
A

F:CR(A)
03

MOLOC A115

MOLOC A001, A115

F:CR(A)
MUT03

*
F:LTGC(A)
MUT04

11

MOLOC A001, A115

F:LTGC(A)

MOLOC A001

MUT05

B
A

F:CR(A)
13

MOLOC A115
MOLOC A001, A115

F:CR(A)

MUT06

*
F:LTGC(A)
MUT07

CD
*):Each half-frame F:CR(A) is assigned to the LTGC above / below and electrically connected with it
Fig. 3.6.4 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.5

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:CRES(A) 0

02

MOLOC A115

MOLOC A001, A115

MUT02

03

05

F:LTGD(A) 0
MUT03

MOLOC A001
A

06

MOLOC A115

F:CRES(A) 1
MUT04

11

MOLOC A001
A

12

F:CRES(A) 2

MOLOC A115

MUT05

13

MOLOC A001, A115

F:LTGD(A) 1

15

MOLOC A001

MOLOC A115

MUT06

16

F:CRES(A) 3
MUT07

CD
Fig. 3.6.5 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD

PROC:LTG 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.6.2.6

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A117

Fuse panel

MUT01

F:LTGF(A)
MUT02

02

MOLOC A117

F:LTGF(A)
MUT03

03

MOLOC A117

F:LTGF(A)
MUT04

04

MOLOC A117

F:LTGF(A)
MUT05

05

MOLOC A117

F:LTGF(A)
MUT06

06

MOLOC A117

F:LTGF(A)
MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.6 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.7

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


Fuse panel

02

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)


11

MUT01

F:LTGG(A)
MUT02

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


A

12

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A)
MUT03

B
03

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

F:LTGG(A)

04

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT04

13

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


14

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A)

05

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT05

06
15

F:LTGG(A)
MUT06

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


A

16

F:LTGG(A)

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.7 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG

PROC:LTG 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.8

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:OSS


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU

FU

MOLOC
01

MUT01

Fuse panel
A001

03

MUT02

MOLOC

02

A123

F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028

A066, A071, A076, A081, A086

05

06

A001
07

MUT03

A123

F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028

A066, A071, A076, A081, A086

09

MUT04

A123

F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028

A066, A071, A076, A081, A086

13

MUT05

A123

F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028

A066, A071, A076, A081, A086

17

16
18

A001
19

12

14

A001
15

08
10

A001
11

04

MUT06

A123

F:LTGG(A)
A008, A013, A018, A023, A028

A066, A071, A076, A081, A086

20

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.8 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:OSS

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.9

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (Cable routing from above)


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

Fuse panel

02

MUT01

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
11

12

MUT02

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
MUT03

B
03

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

F:LTGG(A)

04

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT04

13

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


14

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A)

05

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT05

06
15

F:LTGG(A)
MUT06

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


A

16

F:LTGG(A)

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.9 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG


(Cable routing from above)

PROC:LTG 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.6.2.10

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (Cable routing from below)


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
05

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


Fuse panel

06

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)


15

MUT01

F:LTGG(A)
MUT02

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


A

16

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A)
MUT03

B
03

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

F:LTGG(A)

04

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT04

13

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


14

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A)

01

MUT05

B
02
A

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
11

12

MUT06

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.10 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG


(Cable routing from below)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.11

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


Fuse panel

02

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)


11

MUT01

F:LTGG(A) 0
MUT02

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


A

12

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A) 1
MUT03

B
03

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)

F:LTGG(A) 2

04

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT04

13

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


14

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

F:LTGG(A) 3
MUT05

B
A
15

MUT06

MOLOC A001 (left LTG)


A

16

F:LTGH(A) 4

MOLOC A123 (right LTG)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.11 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH

PROC:LTG 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.6.2.12
FU 01

FU

FU
01
02
03
04
05
19
20
21
22
23
06
07
08
09
10
24
25
26
27
28
11
12
13
14
15
29
30
31
32

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0


MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4

C LTG LTG

MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

Fuse panel

MUT01

LTG LTG LTG


MUT02

F:LTGM(A)

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

C LTG

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

C LTG

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2


MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

C LTG

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

C LTG

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2


MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4

C LTG
D

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

CD

33

Fig. 3.6.12 Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.6.2.13
FU 01

FU

Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

30

Fuse panel

FU

A
01

32

FU

MUT01

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
MUT02

02

33 FU

31

32
33

08
09
10
11
12
22
23
24
25
26
03
04
05
06
07
27
28
29
30
31

MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
MUT03

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

C LTG
D

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

C LTG
D

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0
MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4

C LTG
D
C LTG
D

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT06

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT07

CD

Fig. 3.6.13 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM


(Cable routing from above)

PROC:LTG 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

FU

FU
03
04
05
06
07
27
28
29
30
31
08
09
10
11
12
22
23
24
25
26

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0


MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1
MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4

C LTG LTG

MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

Fuse panel

MUT01

LTG LTG LTG


MUT02

F:LTGM(A)

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

C LTG

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1

C LTG

MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2


MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4
MOLOC C101 / LTGM 0

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT03

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT04

MOLOC C151 / LTGM 1


MOLOC C203 / LTGM 2
MOLOC C255 / LTGM 3
MOLOC C305 / LTGM 4

C LTG
D

C
01

LTG LTG LTG LTG


F:LTGM(A)

MUT05

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)
MUT06

02
32
33

F:SSG(B) or F:TSG(B)

MUT07
CD

Fig. 3.6.14 Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM


(Cable routing from below)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.6.2.14
FU 01

FU

Fuse Assignment for R:SNB/MB/LTGM

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

MUT01

Fuse panel
C

F:TSG(B) or F:SSG(B)

MUT02

F:TSG(B) or F:SSG(B)

MUT03

D
C
D

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

B
A
B

FU
03
04
05
06
07
27
28
29
30
31

MOLOC C101/LTGM 0
MOLOC C151/LTGM 1
MOLOC C203/LTGM 2

MOLOC C255/LTGM 3

4
MUT06

F:LTGM(A)

MOLOC C305/LTGM 4
MOLOC C101/LTGM 0

MOLOC C151/LTGM 1

2
F:LTGM(A)

4
MUT07

MOLOC C203/LTGM 2
MOLOC C255/LTGM 3

CD

MOLOC C305/LTGM 4

Fig. 3.6.15 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM


(Cable routing from above)

PROC:LTG 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

FU 01

FU

03

02

05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU
03
04
05
06
07

MOLOC C101/LTGM 0
MOLOC C151/LTGM 1
MOLOC C203/LTGM 2

MOLOC C255/LTGM 3

Fuse panel
0
1
2

MUT01
3

4
MUT02

F:LTGM(A)

MOLOC C305/LTGM 4

27

MOLOC C101/LTGM 0

28

MOLOC C151/LTGM 1

29

MOLOC C203/LTGM 2

30

MOLOC C255/LTGM 3

31

MOLOC C305/LTGM 4

C
D

MUT03

F:LTGM(A)

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT04

F:MB/CCG(B)

MUT05

B
A
B

F:TSG(B) or F:SSG(B)

MUT06

F:TSG(B) or F:SSG(B)

MUT07

D
C
D

CD

Fig. 3.6.16 Fuse Assignment for R:SN/MB/LTGM


(Cable routing from below)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Check of System Voltage per Rack Row

Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check.
Measure system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

Note: the operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the
batteries.
Tolerance range: -60 V (-54 V...-71 V)
Tolerance range: -48 V (-45.6 V...-57 V)
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

h ... 1

Basic Test (Rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange-specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

Visual Check
Check of all cable ends at the distributing frame
Are the cables already on-hook at the distributing frame and/or the ports?

Y h ... 6
N h ... 5

Visual Check
Make sure that there are no short circuits between the single conductors.
If this is not possible (e.g. lack of materials) or when in doubt, disconnect the
cables which lead to the central/main distribution frame at the wire-wrapping
field of the F:LTG

Set DIPFIX Switch

For setting the DIPFIX switch and solder strap

......MMN:LTGx
TAB

Set the DIPFIX switch and the solder strap for all M:DIUs and M:RGEs.
Comply with country-specific settings.

PROC:LTG 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Preparation
Put the switches on all LTG-current converters down

Information about Fuse Assignments

For screwing in fuses and switching on the relevant DCCs refer to the fuse
assignments shown in the following figures:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGA:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGB/LTGB:OSS:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGC/CR:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGD:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGF:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG:
Fuse Assignment of R:LTGG/OSS:
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (cable routing from above):
Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGG (cable routing from below):

...... (see Fig. 3.6.1)


...... (see Fig. 3.6.2)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.3)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.4)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.5)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.6)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.7)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.8)
...... (see Fig. 3.6.9)
...... 0)(see Fig. 3.6.1

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGH:

...... 1)(see Fig. 3.6.1

Fuse Assignment of R:LTGM:

...... 2)(see Fig. 3.6.1

Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM (cable routing from above):

...... 3)(see Fig. 3.6.1

Fuse Assignment of R:SNB/LTGM (cable routing from below):

...... 4)(see Fig. 3.6.1

Fuse Assignment of R:SN/MB/LTGM (cable routing from above):

...... 5)(see Fig. 3.6.1

Fuse Assignment of R:SN/MB/LTGM (cable routing from below):

...... 6)(see Fig. 3.6.1

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Switch on Power Supply

Screw in only one fuse at a time and switch on the relevant current converter
(In LTGM the module in the corresponding MOLOC).
Screw in the first/next fuse for the LTG which is to be switched on.

Caution: use only 10 A fuses


Switch on the according current converter(s)
(In LTGM the module in the corresponding MOLOC:
M:DIU120A or M:DIU:LDIM)
System reaction: green LED of current converter(s) lights up

10

Check LED
Is the green LED of the current converter(s) lit?
(In LTGM the green LED of the corresponding module: M:DIU120A or
M:DIU:LDIM)

11

Y h ... 14
N h ... 11

Find Faulty Module

Possible causes of fault: Module short circuit, faulty current converter or main
fuse
Pull all corresponding modules individually under power (except DCC or
M:DIU120A/M:DIU:LDIM), but leave them in position.
After each module is pulled the voltage should be checked again.
Could the fault be cleared by removing a certain module?

12

Y h ... 13
N h ... 12

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

13

h ... 9

Replace Faulty Module


replace faulty module
plug in all modules

14

h ... 10

Decision: Next Current Converter


are all current converters (or M:DIU120A/M:DIU:LDIM) for this LTG already
switched on?

PROC:LTG 20

Y h ... 15
N h ... 9

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Decision: Next LTG


Are all LTGs already switched on?

Y h ... END
N h ... 8

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:LTG 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

PROC:LTG 22

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.7

Test Procedure for DAS 300


DAS 300 TEST
The DAS 300 is an OEM device which is not tested by Siemens. To make claims on the
vendors warranty, if necessary, the device must be checked with the integrated test
functions during installation testing.
Operation of the DAS 300:

3.7.1

The menu options referred to in the procedure appear in the LCD display above the
function keys F1 to F4.

Menu options are selected by pressing the relevant function key.

Digital Announcement System DAS 300

Key switch

LCD display, 2 lines of 40 characters

Function keys

Microphone
jack

F1

F2

F3

F4

Headphone
jack

Tape recorder
input

Loudspeaker

Numerical keypad

DAS 300
Cursor keys

Fig. 3.7.1 Digital announcement system DAS 300

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DAS300 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.7.2

Digital Announcement System DAS 300 (Rear View)

120 PCM connections

Power
V1
V2

ABT

LD1

RST
ERR

RST

LD2

+
-

Power supply

SVA

STV 48DC
+5/+12/-12

CPU PCM

CPU module

PCM module

Fig. 3.7.2 Digital announcement system DAS 300 (rear view)

PROC:DAS300 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Decision Block

Y h ... 2
N h ... 7

Is the DAS 300 already in service?

Identify the DIU Number


Refer to the exchange configuration documents to obtain the numbers of the
LTG and DIU to which the DAS is connected.

3
b

Interrogate State of DIU


STAT DIU:LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu;
The command is repeated with the addition:

EXEC'D

A list of the operating states of the interrogated units is output.

Decision Block
What is the operating state of the DIU?
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
other. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5
b

h ... 5
h ... 7
h ... 6

Configure the DIU to CBL


CONF DIU :LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu,OST=CBL;
The command is repeated with the addition:

EXEC'D

Continue with the next block after 5 minutes at most. But if the CBL acknowledgement arrives within the 5 minutes, continue with the next block immediately.

6
b

Configure the DIU to MBL


CONF DIU :LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu,OST=MBL;
The command is repeated with the addition:

EXEC'D

h ... 8

Switch on the DAS

When it is switched on, the DAS 300 should first go to the start menu. This can
be recognized by the texts OPT, MON and STA above the function keys.

Switch on the DAS 300 using the key switch on the front.
Wait for the start menu to appear (OPT above F1, MON above F2 and STA
above F3 in the LCD).

Select the Test Menu


Press the key below menu option STA to select the status interrogation
menu.
Press the key below menu option TEST to select the test menu.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DAS300 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

10

Commissioning
System

Enter Password
Enter the test password (default ex-factory code 1357902468).
Confirm with the # key.
Select System Test
Press the key below menu option SYS to select the system test menu.

11

Evaluation of Test Results

If the test was completed without error, the tested unit appears in the display
with the addition O.K..

12

Perform CPU Test


Press the key below menu option CPU to start the CPU test.

Y h ... 13
N h ... 26

Is the tested unit OK?

13

Perform CRC Test


Press the key below menu option CRC to check the fixed texts.

Y h ... 14
N h ... 26

Is the tested unit OK?

14

Perform RAM Test


Press the key below menu option RAM to start the RAM test.

Y h ... 15
N h ... 26

Is the tested unit OK?

15

16

Select PCM Test


Press the * key to return to the test start menu.
Press the key below menu option PCM to select the PCM test menu.
Perform SYN Test
Press the key below menu option SYN to test the synchronization of the PCM
interface.
Is the tested unit OK?

17

Y h ... 17
N h ... 26

Perform TSx Test


Press the key below menu option TSx to test PCM time slots.
Is the tested unit OK?

PROC:DAS300 4

Y h ... 18
N h ... 26

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

18

ITMN - OFFLINE

Perform SIG Test


Press the key below menu option SIG to test the signaling in PCM time slot 16.

Y h ... 19
N h ... 26

Is the tested unit OK?

19

20

Select Interface Test


Press the * key to return to the test start menu.
Press the key below menu option IF to select the interface test menu.
Perform RS1 Test
Press the key below menu option RS1 to test processor interface 1.

21

Decision Block

The processor interfaces can only be tested in the DAS 300 FLASH version.
If the unit under test is a DAS 300 with EPROM, it does not have any processor
interfaces. The displayed result states that the interface test is not available.
Is the unit under test a DAS 300 with EPROM? (test not possible?)

22

Decision Block

Y h ... 23
N h ... 26

Is the tested unit OK?

23

Y h ... 25
N h ... 22

Perform RS2 Test


Press the key below menu option RS2 to test processor interface 2.

Y h ... 24
N h ... 26

Is the tested unit OK?

24

Identify DIU Number


Refer to the exchange configuration documents to obtain the numbers of the
LTG and DIU to which the DAS is connected.

25
b

Configure DIU to ACT


CONF DIU :LTG=tsg-ltg,DIU=diu,OST=ACT;
The command is repeated with the addition

EXEC'D

End of DAS 300 test

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DAS300 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

26

Commissioning
System

Replace DAS 300


The DAS 300 is faulty. Replace the DAS 300 and send back the faulty device in
its original packing materials.

End of DAS 300 test

END

PROC:DAS300 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.8

Off-line Installation of Data Service Unit


DSU

3.8.1

Documents
The following Documents are required as references

3.8.2

Maintenance Manual MMN:DSU


AKUHW Lists

General
The DSU is based on the concept of the DLU. It provides interworking functions (IWF)
for data exchange with different external telecommunication networks.
The IWF is implemented in the interworking equipment (IWE). The IWE consists of one
IWE module and one IWES module which replace two SLM modules of the DLU.
The DSU is called DLU in the following procedure because the term DLU continues to
be used in fault reports and diagnostic results.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DSU 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.8.3
3.8.3.1

Commissioning
System

Rack Layout
Rack Layout R:DSU (A-B-B-Modem) / (Fuse Assignment R:DSU)
FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
01

MOLOC A001, A058, A119

05

MOLOC A010-052, A089-113

11

MOLOC C001, C058,C119

15

MOLOC C010-052, C089-113

02

MOLOC A00, A119

06

MOLOC A010-052, A071-113

12

MOLOC C001, C119

16

MOLOC C010-052, C071-113

03

MOLOC A001, A119

07

MOLOC A010-052, A071-113

13

MOLOC C001, C119

17

MOLOC C010-052, C071-113

04

to PSU

14

to PSU

MUT01

Fuse panel
Shelf 0

MUT02

F:DLU(A)
Shelf 1
Shelf 2

MUT03

F:DLU(B)
Shelf 3

Shelf 4
MUT05
F:DLU(B)
Shelf 5

Modem

MUT06

Modem
CD

Fig. 3.8.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem

PROC:DSU 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.8.4

Equipment List
F:DLU(A), F:DLU(B) and F:DLU(C)
Basic frame F:DLU(A) Shelf 0, 1
Mounting
location

Ext. frame F:DLU(B) Shelf 2...7

Module type
Standard

A001

M:DCCx

A010

M:IWEx

A016

M:IWESx

A022

M:IWEx

A028

M:IWESx

A034

M:IWEx

A040

M:IWESx

A046

M:IWEx

Mounting
location

Variant

1)

1)

1)

1)

Module type
Standard

A001

M:DCCx

A010

M:IWEx

A016

M:IWESx 1)

A022

M:IWEx

A028

M:IWESx 1)

A034

M:IWEx

A040

M:IWESx 1)

A046

M:IWEx

A052

M:IWESx 1)

A052

M:IWESx

A058

empty

A058

M:BDE

A065

M:BDB

A065

M:BDE

A071

M:BDCG

A071

M:IWEx

A077

M:DLUC

A077

M:IWESx 1)

A083

M:DIUD

A083

M:IWEx

A089

empty

A089

M:IWESx 1)

A095

M:IWEx

A095

M:IWEx

A101

M:IWESx 1)

A107

M:IWEx

A113

M:IWESx 1)

A101

M:IWESx

A107

M:IWEx

M:LDID

1)

1)

A113

M:IWESx

A119

M:DCCx

A119

M:DCCx

C001

M:DCCx

C001

M:DCCx

C010

M:IWEx

C010

M:IWEx

C016

M:IWESx 1)

C022

M:IWEx

C028

M:IWESx 1)

C034

M:IWEx

C040

M:IWESx 1)

C046

M:IWEx

C052

M:IWESx 1)

C016

M:IWESx

C022

M:IWEx

C028

M:IWESx

C034

M:IWEx

C040

M:IWESx

C046

M:IWEx

1)

1)

1)

1)

M:ALEX

2)

C052

M:IWESx

C058

empty

C058

M:BDE

C065

M:BDB

C065

M:BDE

C071

M:BDCG

C071

M:IWEx

Variant

Tab. 3.8.1 Equipment list

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DSU 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Basic frame F:DLU(A) Shelf 0, 1


Mounting
location

Ext. frame F:DLU(B) Shelf 2...7

Module type
Standard

C077

M:DLUC

C083

M:DIUD

C089

empty

C095

M:IWEx

Mounting
location

Variant

Module type
Standard

M:LDID

1)

C077

M:IWESx 1)

C083

M:IWEx

C089

M:IWESx 1)

C095

M:IWEx

C101

M:IWESx 1)

C101

M:IWESx

C107

empty

C107

M:IWEx

C113

empty

C113

M:IWESx 1)

C119

M:DCCx

C119

M:DCCx

Variant

Tab. 3.8.1 Equipment list


The equipment complement of F:DLU(C) is the same as for F:DLU(B), but it only
occupies mounting location row A.

3.8.5

Mounting Location List


F:DLU(A), F:DLU(B) and F:DLU(C)
Module
type

Address
Basic frame
Shelf 0, 1

Ext. frame 0
Shelf 2, 3

Ext. frame 1
Shelf 4, 5

Mounting
location
Ext. frame 2
Shelf 6, 7

M:ALEX

0 - 15

A113

M:BDB

0-

A065

1-

C065

0-8

A071

1-8

C071

M:BDCG

M:BDE

M:DCCx

M:DIUD

M:LDID

2-

4-

6-

A058

2-

4-

6-

A065

3-

5-

7-

C058

3-

5-

7-

C065

0-0

2-0

4-0

6-0

A001

0-1

2-1

4-1

6-1

A119

1-0

3-0

5-0

7-0

C001

1-1

3-1

5-1

7-1

C119

0 - 10

A083

1 - 10

C083

0 - 10

A083

1 - 10

C083

Tab. 3.8.2 Mounting location list

PROC:DSU 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Module
type

Address
Basic frame
Shelf 0, 1

M:DLUC

Ext. frame 0
Shelf 2, 3

Ext. frame 1
Shelf 4, 5

Mounting
location
Ext. frame 2
Shelf 6, 7

0-9

A077

1-9

C077

M:IWEx

0-0

2-0

4-0

6-0

A010

M:IWEx

1-0

3-0

5-0

7-0

C010

M:IWESx

0-1

2-1

4-1

6-1

A016

M:IWESx

1-1

3-1

5-1

7-1

C016

M:IWEx

0-2

2-2

4-2

6-2

A022

M:IWEx

1-2

3-2

5-2

7-2

C022

M:IWESx

0-3

2-3

4-3

6-3

A028

M:IWESx

1-3

3-3

5-3

7-3

C028

M:IWEx

0-4

2-4

4-4

6-4

A034

M:IWEx

1-4

3-4

5-4

7-4

C034

M:IWESx

0-5

2-5

4-5

6-5

A040

M:IWESx

1-5

3-5

5-5

7-5

C040

M:IWEx

0-6

2-6

4-6

6-6

A046

M:IWEx

1-6

3-6

5-6

7-6

C046

M:IWESx

0-7

2-7

4-7

6-7

A052

M:IWESx

1-7

3-7

5-7

7-7

C052

M:IWEx

2-8

4-8

6-8

A071

M:IWEx

3-8

5-8

7-8

C071

M:IWESx

2-9

4-9

6-9

A077

M:IWESx

3-9

5-9

7-9

C077

M:IWEx

2 - 10

4 - 10

6 - 10

A083

M:IWEx

3 - 10

5 - 10

7 - 10

C083

M:IWESx

2 - 11

4 - 11

6 - 11

A089

M:IWESx

3 - 11

5 - 11

7 - 11

C089

M:IWEx

0 - 12

2 - 12

4 - 12

6 - 12

A095

M:IWEx

1 - 12

3 - 12

5 - 12

7 - 12

C095

M:IWESx

0 - 13

2 - 13

4 - 13

6 - 13

A101

M:IWESx

1 - 13

3 - 13

5 - 13

7 - 13

C101

M:IWEx

0 - 14

2 - 14

4 - 14

6 - 14

A107

3 - 14

5 - 14

7 - 14

C107

2 - 15

4 - 15

6 - 15

A113

3 - 15

5 - 15

7 - 15

C113

M:IWEx
M:IWESx
M:IWESx

0 - 15

Tab. 3.8.2 Mounting location list


The mounting location list for the expansion frame F:DLU(C) is the same as for
F:DLU(B), but only mounting location row A.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DSU 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.8.6

Commissioning
System

Connection of DLU to two LTG

DLU

LTGx
D
I
U
D
L
U
0

D
I
U
D
L
U
1

PDC0

LTU
U21

PDC1

LTU
U21

PDC0

LTU
U20

PDC1

LTU
U20

S
I
L
C

DLU

LTGy
D
I
U
D
L
U
0

D
I
U
D
L
U
1

PDC0

LTU
U21

PDC1

LTU
U21

PDC0

LTU
U20

PDC1

LTU
U20

S
I
L
C

Fig. 3.8.2 Connection of DLU to two LTG

PROC:DSU 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

The diagram above shows the connection of the DLU to two LTGs. One DLU system is
connected to the LTGx and the other to the LTGy. The dotted lines represent the links
without CCS.

3.8.7

Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU

DIU:DLU
Pin No.

LE

LE

PDC0

DIU30A
LTU/U21

49
F2ou

F2in.....F1ou

F1in.....F2ou

Pin No.
49

F2in

50

50

51

51
F2in

F2ou.....F1in

F1ou.....F2in

F2ou

52

Pin No.

52

PDC1

LTU/U20

49
F2ou

F2in.....F1ou

F1in.....F2ou

Pin No.
49

F2in

50

50

51

51
F2in

F2ou.....F1in

52

F1ou.....F2in

F2ou
52

Fig. 3.8.3 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DSU 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.8.8

Connection path from DLU to LTE

DLU
To/from LTGx
D
I
U
D
L
U
0

PDC0

D
I
U
D
L
U
1

PDC0

PCM 30 with CCS

F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in

PCM 30 without CCS

F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in

To/from LTGx
PDC1

To/from LTGy
PCM 30 with CCS

F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in

PCM 30 without CCS

F1ou
F2in
LTE
F2ou
F1in

To/from LTGy
PDC1

Fig. 3.8.4 Connection path from DLU to LTE

PROC:DSU 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.8.9

Connection path from LTG to LTE

LTGx

To/from DLU
F1in
F2ou
LTE
F1ou
F2in

PCM 30 with CCS

LTU
U21

F1in
F2ou
LTE
F1ou
F2in

PCM 30 without CCS

LTU
U20

S
I
L
C

To/from DLU

LTGy

To/from DLU
F1in
F2ou
LTE
F2in
F1ou

PCM 30 with CCS

LTU
U21

F1in
F2ou
LTE
F2in
F1ou

PCM 30 without CCS

LTU
U20

S
I
L
C

To/from DLU

Fig. 3.8.5 Connection path from LTG to LTE

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DSU 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Check of system voltage per rack row

Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6V ... -57V)
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

h ... 1

Basic test (rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

Check switch settings


Check modules for correct positioning of straps and switch settings

Information block

......MMN:DSU,
TAB, MOD

CAUTION:
Areas on the wrap fields with pins for ringing or system voltage (e.g. SLM modules or DCCs) may be
equipped with protection caps. The protection caps protect the operating personnel from touching the pins
with ringing or system voltage and must not be removed.
Switch on exchange voltage (R:DSU)

The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in

......(see 3.8.3)

Switch off all DCCxx and RGMG of the first/ next R:DSU
Unscrew all fuses in this R:DSU

PROC:DSU 10

h ... 7

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Information about DCCxx

If a DCCDB (A001, A119) is installed instead of the DCCCR, there is no need


for the DCCCV or DCCDD (A010). The DCCDB provides all the voltages that
were otherwise provided by the DCCCR and DCCCV/DCCDD. If a DCCDC
(A001) is used, there is also no need for the voltage of 93 V.

Screw in fuses

The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in

...... (see 3.8.3)

Screw in the fuse assigned to the DCCs in the first / next shelf

Switch on left-hand DCCxx


Switch on the left-hand DCCxx (MOLOC A001/C001)
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

10

Y h ... 12
N h ... 10

Replace defective DCCxx


Switch off defective DCCxx
Unscrew relevant fuse
Switch off spare module
Replace defective DCCxx by spare module
Screw in relevant fuse
Switch on DCCxx
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

11

Y h ... 12
N h ... 11

Special fault clearance

Note:
If the green LEDs in all DCCs do not light when the DCCs have been switched
on, the thermal contact is probably defective
Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after successful fault clearance

12

h ... 9

Switch on right-hand DCCxx


Switch on the right-hand DCCxx (MOLOC A119/C119)
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 15
N h ... 13

PROC:DSU 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

13

Commissioning
System

Replace defective DCCxx


Switch off defective DCCxx
Unscrew relevant fuse
Switch off spare module
Replace defective DCCxx by spare module
Screw in relevant fuse
Switch on DCCxx

Y h ... 15
N h ... 14

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

14

Special fault clearance

Note:
If the green LEDs in all DCCs do not light when the DCCs have been switched
on, the thermal contact is probably defective
Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after successful fault clearance

15

Decision: DCCDV/DCCDD
Is there a DCCDV or DCCDD in the shelf?

16

h ... 12
Y h ... 16
N h ... 19

Switch on DCCDV/DCCDD
Switch on DCCDV/DCCDD (MOLOC A010/ C010)
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCDV/DCCDD lit?

17

Y h ... 19
N h ... 17

Replace defective DCCDV/DCCDD


Switch off defective DCCDV/DCCDD
Unscrew relevant fuse
Switch off spare module
Replace defective DCCDV/DCCDD by spare module
Screw in relevant fuse
Switch on DCCDV/DCCDD
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCDV/DCCDD lit?

PROC:DSU 12

Y h ... 19
N h ... 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

18

ITMN - OFFLINE

Special fault clearance

Note:
If the green LEDs in all DCCs do not light when the DCCs have been switched
on, the thermal contact is probably defective
Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after successful fault clearance

19

Next shelf?
Are all DCCs in all shelves switched on?

20

21

h ... 16
Y h ... 20
N h ... 8

Information about connection path test

The connection of the DLU to LTG is shown in:


(LTGs used are LTGB, LTGG, LTGM)

...... (see Fig. 3.8.2)

When the DLU and LTG are connected, care must be taken to ensure 1:1
wiring. This means that F2out of DIU:DLU0 goes via pins 49 and 50, just as F2in
of LTU:U21.

...... (see Fig. 3.8.3)

Information about connection path from DLU to LTE

Because the DLU and the start of the PCM link may be located apart, special
precautions must be taken to ensure that the cabling between DIU:DLU and
LTE (line terminating equipment / loading equipment) is correct. If it is, the corresponding PCM link simply needs to be connected to the LTE. If then no connection can be established between DLU and LTG, the PCM link is interrupted.
The connection of DLU to LTE is shown in

22

...... (see Fig. 3.8.4)

Establish connection DIU:DLU to LTE

The connection first has to be established for DIU:DLU0 and than for DIU:DLU1

23

Establish test loop for PDC0


Link up the outgoing cable with CCS (PDC0) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) to
the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Did the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) go out?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 25
N h ... 24

PROC:DSU 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

24

Commissioning
System

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1)module.

25

Connect PDC0 to the link


Open the loop and connect the PDC0 to the link

26

Establish test loop for PDC1


Link up the outgoing cable without CCS (PDC1) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1)
to the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on the LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE

Y h ... 29
N h ... 27

Did the red LEDs MA1 and SA1 on the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) go out?

27

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) module.

28

Connect PDC1 to the link


Open the loop and connect the PDC1 to the link

29

Decision: next DLU system

......(see Fig. 3.8.2)

Note that DLU system 1 is connected to another LTG as shown in

Y h ... 30
N h ... 23

Has DLU system 1 already been checked?

30

Information about connection LTG to LTE

The connection first has to be established for LTGx (to DLU system 0) and than
for LTGy (to DLU system 1).
The connection of LTG to LTE is shown in

PROC:DSU 14

......(see Fig. 3.8.5)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

31

ITMN - OFFLINE

Establish test loop for cable with CCS


Link the outgoing cable with CCS from the LTU:U21 of LTGx (LTGy) to the LTE
which is to be connected to the LTE of DLU system 0 (DLU system 1), if not
already done.
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out at the output of the LTE to F1in
Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?

32

Y h ... 33
N h ... 32

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.

33

Connect LTU:U21 to the link


Open the loop and connect the LTU:U21 to the link

34

Establish test loop for cable without CCS


Link the outgoing cable without CCS from the LTU:U20 of LTGx (LTGy) to the
LTE which is to be connected to the LTE of DLU system 0 (DLU system 1), if not
already done.
Red LED F2 goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?

35

Y h ... 36
N h ... 35

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.

36

Connect LTU:U20 to the link


Open the loop and connect the LTU:U20 to the link

37

Decision: test DLU-system 1


Has the connection of LTGy to DLU system 1 already been checked?

38

Y h ... 38
N h ... 31

Decision: F:Modem
Are there F:Modem installed in the current R:DSU?

Y h ... PROC:
MODEM

N h ... 39

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DSU 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

39

Commissioning
System

Decision: next R:DSU

Y h ... 40
N h ... 6

Have all R:DSU of the NE already been switched on?

40

Decision: R:Modem
Repeat the following procedure until all R:Modem of the NE are put into
service

h ...PROC:
MODEM

If no R:Modem is installed in the NE or all R:Modem have already been put


into service, continue:

h ... END

END

PROC:DSU 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.9

Off-line Installation of modems for 3.1 kHz


audio bearer services
MODEM

3.9.1
3.9.1.1

Rack Layouts
Rack Layout R:DSU (A-B-B-Modem) / (Fuse Assignment for
Modems)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MODEM 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU
MUT01

Fuse panel
01

Shelf 0

05

MUT02

F:DLU(A)

11

Shelf 1

15
02

Shelf 2
06

MUT03

F:DLU(B)

12

Shelf 3

16

03

Shelf 4
MUT05

07

F:DLU(B)
13

Shelf 5

17
04

14

to PSU

to PSU

Modem

MUT06

Modem
CD

Fig. 3.9.1 R:DSU, Configuration A-B-B-Modem

PROC:MODEM 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.9.1.2

ITMN - OFFLINE

Rack Layout R:Modem / (Fuse Assignment for Modems)


FU 01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19 FU

FU 02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20 FU

FU

Fuse panel
01

to PSU

02

to PSU

03

to PSU

04

to PSU

Modem

05

to PSU

Modem

06

to PSU

Modem

Modem

Modem

Modem

not equipped

not equipped

Fig. 3.9.2 R:Modem

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MODEM 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.9.2

Commissioning
System

Modem Frame Layouts


Two different types of modems for 3.1 kHz audio bearer services can be used in the
DSU:

GPT modem
NEUHAUS modem

According to the type of modem it is possible to place 12 (NEUHAUS) or 14 (GPT)


modems into one frame F:Modem.
All modems in a frame are supplied by one power supply unit (PSU). It is not possible
to mix both types of modems in one frame, because they are fed by different types of
PSUs.
The modem frames F:Modem can be located in the Mounting Units 06 and 07 of the
R:DSU and/or in a separate rack R:Modem.

3.9.2.1

Frame F:Modem (GPT)

P
S
U

10 11 12 13 14

Modem frame (Type GPT)


Fig. 3.9.3 Frame F:Modem (GPT)

PROC:MODEM 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.9.2.2

ITMN - OFFLINE

Frame F:Modem (NEUHAUS)

P
S
U

10

11

12

Modem frame (Type NEUHAUS)


Fig. 3.9.4 Frame F:Modem (NEUHAUS)

Prepare modem frames


Unscrew the fuses of all modem frames F:Modem of the current rack, if not
already done

The fuse assignment for the modem frames is shown in:

...... 3.9.1

Switch on PSU
Unplug all modems in the first/next F:Modem but leave in position
Plug in the PSU of this F:Modem
Screw in the fuse for this F:Modem
Check if PSU is working:

On PSU for GPT: Green LED Mains in and red LED PWR Monitor must
light up

On PSU for NEUHAUS: All 3 Green LEDs must light up

Is the PSU working?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 5
N h ... 3

PROC:MODEM 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Replace PSU
Unscrew the corresponding fuse
Replace the PSU by spare module of the same PSU type
Screw in the corresponding fuse
Check if PSU is working:

On PSU for GPT: Green LED Mains in and red LED PWR Monitor must
light up

On PSU for NEUHAUS: All 3 Green LEDs must light up

Y h ... 5
N h ... 4

Is the PSU working?

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 2

Repeat testing after successful fault clearance

Plug in modems
Plug in the first/next modem of the frame where the PSU has been switched on
Is the modem working? (Red LED for Power must light up)

Y h ... 8
N h ... 6

Replace modem
Replace the modem by spare module of the same modem type
Is the modem working? (Red LED for Power must light up)

Y h ... 8
N h ... 7

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after successful fault clearance

Decision: next modem


Have all modems of the frame already been plugged in

Y h ... 9
N h ... 5

Decision: next F:Modem


Have all modem frames of the current rack already been put into service?

10

h ... 5

Y h ... 10
N h ... 2

Return block
Return to calling procedure

END

PROC:MODEM 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.10

Off-line Installation of Digital Line Unit


(Frames D / E / F)
DLUB

3.10.1

Documents
The following Documents are required as references

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Maintenance Manual MMN:DLUB


AKUHW Lists

PROC:DLUB 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.10.2
3.10.2.1
FU 01

FU

03

02

Fuse Assignments
Fuse Assignment R:DLUB (D-E-D-E)
05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

FU

32

FU

FU

01 A001-057
03
04

C001,C015-033,057*

08 A008,A039-057
11 C001,C015-033

21

C001,C015-033,057*

Shelf 1

M
G
B

R
G
B

D
C
C

D D
C C
C C

D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C

B
D
2

Shelf 2

D
C
C

R
G
B

D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(E)

D D
C C
C C

B
D
3

Shelf 3

F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0

Shelf 1

D D
C C
C C

M
G
B

R D
G C
B C
D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057

24 A001,A015-033
25 A008,A039-057
28 C001,C015-033
29

D D
C C
C C

Fuse panel
F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0

C008,C039-057

18 A001-057
20

R
G
B

C008,C039-057

07 A001,A015-033

12

D
C
C

MUT01

D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C

Shelf 2

Shelf 3

C008,C039-057

B
D
2
B
D
3

F:DLU(E)

D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C

MUT02
A068-121
C116,C068-086

02
05

C123,C092-110

06

MUT03
A116,A068-086

09

A123,A092-110

10

C116,C068-086

13

C123,C092-110

14

MUT05
A068-121
C116,C068-086

19
22

C123,C092-110

23

MUT06
A116,A068-086

26

A123,A092-110

27

C116,C068-086

30

C123,C092-110

31

CD
* 057 Only if MGB is inserted.
Note: If only one DCC is used per halfshelf, the DCC Pos shf-1 and shf-3 are omitted as well as the according
fuses.
Fig. 3.10.1 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-E)

PROC:DLUB 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.10.2.2
FU 01

FU

03

02

Fuse Assignment R:DLUB (D-E-D-D)


05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU

FU
MUT01

Fuse panel

01 A001-057
03
04

C001,C015-033,057*

D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0

Shelf 1

M
G
B

D D
C C
C C

B
D
2

Shelf 2

08 A008,A039-057
11 C001,C015-033

21

C001,C015-033,057*

29

D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(E)

D D
C C
C C

B
D
3

Shelf 3

C001,C015-033,057*

MUT02
A068-121

02

C116,C068-086

F:DLU(D)

M
G
B

R
G
B

D
C
C

D D
C C
C C

06

MUT03
A116,A068-086

09

A123,A092-110

10

C116,C068-086

D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(D)
Shelf 2

Shelf 3

M
G
B

C008,C039-057

R
G
B

D
C
C

D D
C C
C C

13
14

MUT05
A068-121

19

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

D R
C G
C B

05

C123,C092-110

C123,C092-110

Shelf 0

Shelf 1

D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057

24 A001-057
28

D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057

18 A001-057
20

D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057

07 A001,A015-033

12

R D
G C
B C

22
23

MUT06
A068-121

26

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

30
31

CD
* 057 Only if MGB is inserted.
Note: If only one DCC is used per halfshelf, the DCC Pos shf-1 and shf-3 are omitted as well as the according
Fig. 3.10.2 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-D)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.10.2.3
FU 01

FU

03

02

Fuse Assignment Rack R:DLUB (D-E-D-F)


05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

FU

32

FU

FU
MUT01

Fuse panel

01 A001-057
03
04

C001,C015-033

D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(D)
Shelf 0

Shelf 1

M
G
B

D D
C C
C C

B
D
2

Shelf 2

08 A008,A039-057
11 C001,C015-033

21

D D
C C
C C

C001,C015-033,057*

D
C
C

R
G
B

D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(E)

F:DLU(D)

R D
G C
B C
D D
C C
C C

M
G
B

C008,C039-057

24 A001,A015-033

D D
C C
C C

B B
D D
2 3

Shelf 2

25 A008,A039-057

MUT02
A068-121
C116,C068-086

F:
DLU(F)

D D
C C
C C

02
05

C123,C092-110

06

MUT03
A116,A068-086

09

A123,A092-110

10

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

Shelf 0

Shelf 1

D D
C C
C C

D D
C C
C C

B
D
3

Shelf 3

C008,C039-057

18 A001-057
20

D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057*

07 A001,A015-033

12

R D
G C
B C

13
14

MUT05
A068-121
C116,C068-086

19
22

C123,C092-110

23

A116,A074-92

26

A123,A098-110

27

CD
* 057 Only if MGB is inserted.
Note: If only one DCC is used per halfshelf, the DCC Pos shf-1 and shf-3 are omitted as well as the according

Fig. 3.10.3 Sicherungszuordnung R:DLUB (D-E-D-F)

PROC:DLUB 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.10.3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Equipment of the different frames


Detailed information about the equipment of the different frames are listed in the equipment list and the mounting location list of the MMN:DLUB, APP.

3.10.4

Shelter DLU 400/700


The shelter can contain the following equipment:

Remote Shelter DLU 400 (Fig. 3.10.4)


Basic frame D for DLUB (F:DLU(D)) with a max. of 384 subscribers or basic frame
G for DLUD (F:DLU(G)) with a max. of 448 subscribers

Remote Shelter DLU 700 (Fig. 3.10.5)


Basic frame F:DLU(D)) or F:DLU(G)) and also extension frame F for DLUB
(F:DLU(F)) with a max. of 240 subscribers

Transmission equipment for the shelter (optional)


The following transmission equipment is provided in the shelter for connection to the
network node or for the connection of additional shelters (ring or star configuration):
Transmission technology in the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
SDH: synchronous multiplexers (SMA1/4) or, alternatively,
synchronous dual terminal multiplexers (STM1D)
Transmission technology in the plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
PDH technology in the shelter:
Optical/HDSL terminal multiplexer for 2 Mbit/s (OMX2/HMX)
Optical terminal multiplexer for 34 Mbit/s (OMX16)
(PDH technology can also be integrated in the DLU hardware)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.10.4.1

Commissioning
System

MDF/ DDF distribution frame

Air conditioning (fan and heater)

Power supply unit, including standby battery

Cable TV

Modem for OFDC (optional)

Overview Shelter 400/700

SIEMENS

DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))

MDF
200 DA internal

SMA 1/4 or SMT1D


(SDH)

MDF
200 DA internal
1600 mm

Connector panel

Fan
Fan

MDF
200 DA external

DC distribution

OFDC modem

Connector panel
MDF
200 DA external

MDF
200 DA external

AC distribution
OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)
AC/DC converter (48 V/30 A)

(Connection for
emergency power supply)
Mains access (MAP)
or
lightning overvoltage
protection (LOP)

Heater 1600 W
Cable TV
Battery

500 mm

1800 mm

Side view (left)

Front view

Fig. 3.10.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400

PROC:DLUB 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

SIEMENS

DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
DDF
24 PCM30

104 DA
internal

Connecting panel

Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))

MDF
200 DA internal

SMA 1/4 or SMT1D


(SDH)

MDF
200 DA internal

1800 mm

MDF
200 DA internal

Fan

Extension frame F
(F:DLU(F))

MDF
200 DA external

Connecting panel

MDF
200 DA external

Fan
OFDC modem

MDF
200 DA external

DC distribution

MDF
200 DA external

AC distribution

MDF
200 DA external
(Connection for emergency power supply)

OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)

AC/DC
converter
(48 V/30 A)

Heater 1600 W
Cable TV

Mains access (MAP)


or
lightning overvoltage
protection (LOP)

Battery

500 mm

1800 mm

Side view (left)

Front view

Fig. 3.10.5 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 700

3.10.4.2

Fuse Assignment PPD (Primary power distribution)


Sicherungen

gesicherte Einheit

F1

25 A

AC Power supply
(Fehlerstromschutzschalter)

F2

16 A

Rectifier 1

F3

16 A

Rectifier 2 (optional)

F4

10 A

Heater

F5

10 A

Cabel TV (optional)

Tab. 3.10.1 Assignment of primary fuses

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Sicherungen
F6

10 A

gesicherte Einheit
Socket (for OFDC-Modem)

Tab. 3.10.1 Assignment of primary fuses

3.10.4.3

Fuse Assignment SPD (Secondary power distribution)


Fuses

Unit

F1

10 A

DLU Shelf 0 (System side 1)

F2

10 A

DLU Shelf 1 (System side 1)

F3

10 A

DLU Shelf 1 (System side 0)

F4

10 A

DLU Shelf 0 (System side 0)

F5

10 A

Transmission equipment (SDH)


or
Radio equipment SRA L1/SRA L2

F6

10 A

not used

F7

10 A

Transmission equipment (PDH)


or
Radio equipment SRA L1/SRA L2

F8

10 A

Shelter DLU 400: not used


bzw.
Shelter DLU 700: Shelf 2 (System side 1)

F9

10 A

Fan 2

F10

10 A

Fan 1

F11

10 A

Monitoring and heater control

F12

10 A

Shelter DLU 400: not used


bzw.
Shelter DLU 700: Shelf 2 (System side 0)

F13

50 A

Battery

Tab. 3.10.2 Assignment of secondary fuses


Caution:
The fuse cover must not be removed by the maintenance. personnel. If maintenance
work on the fuses is necessary, this can only be carried out by trained specialists. Before
the fuse cover is removed the 220 V AC line voltage must be switched off.

PROC:DLUB 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.10.5
3.10.5.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Remote DLU
Connection of a remote DLU to two LTG
Plug position
DLU

D
I
U
D
L
U
0

D
I
U
D
L
U
1

DLU

D
I
U
D
L
U
0

D
I
U
D
L
U
1

LTGx
PDC0

A2 051

LTU
U21

B2 051

LTU
U21

A2 074

LTU
U20

B2 074

LTU
U20

A2 051

LTU
U21

B2 051

LTU
U21

A2 074

LTU
U20

PDC1

PDC0

PDC1

S
I
L
C

LTGy
PDC0

PDC1

PDC0

PDC1
B2 074

S
I
L
C

LTU
U20

Fig. 3.10.6 Connection of DLUB to two LTG


The diagram above shows the connection of the DLUB to two LTGs. One DLUB system
is connected to the LTGx and the other to the LTGy. The dotted lines represent the links
without CCS.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.10.5.2

Commissioning
System

Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU


DIU120A

DIU:DLU

Pin No.(*)
Pin No. (Plug pin)
Sym.

LE

Koax.

LE

50

29

51

51

F2in...F1out

F1in...F2out

E134

C134

E136

E136

E138

C136

E132

E132

E134

C134

E136

E136

E138

C136

F2out

31

LTU/U20

PDC1
49
F2in...F1out

F2out
50

29

51

51

F2in

F1in...F2out

F1out...F2in

F2out...F1in

F2in
52

E132

F2in

F1out...F2in

F2out...F1in

F2in

49

E132

49
F2out

52

Koax.

LTU/U21

PDC0
49

Sym.

F2out

31

Fig. 3.10.7 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU120A)


(*): The pin numbers refer to the first of four PDC connectors of the DIU120A. An overview of all pin numbers is shown in the following table:
PDC(0)
Sym

Koax

PDC(1)
Sym

Koax

PDC(2)
Sym

Koax

PDC(3)
Sym

Koax

E132

E132

E142

E142

E152

E152

E212

E212

E134

C134

E144

C144

E154

C154

E214

C214

E136

E136

E146

E146

E156

E156

E216

E216

E138

C136

E148

C146

E158

C156

E218

C216

Tab. 3.10.3 Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A

PROC:DLUB 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

DIU120A MOLOCS:

305

255

101

151

203

SU1
F:LTGM(A) Rearview
SU2
row C
(mounting area 1)

SU3
SU4
SU5
SU1
SU2

row D
(mounting area 2)

SU3
SU4

PDC0

PDC1

PDC2

0 (no pins available)


1
2

Pin E 2 1 2
Pins for PDC3 (sym.)

Pin E 2 1 4

Pin E 2 1 6
Pin E 2 1 8
9

Fig. 3.10.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

DIU30D

DIU:DLU

Pin No. (Plug pin)

Pin No. (Plug pin)


Sym.

LE

Koax.

LE

49
F2in...F1out

F2out
50

29

51

51
F2out...F1in

F2in
52

F1in...F2out

F1out...F2in

F2in...F1out

F2out

51

51

F2out...F1in

F2in
52

50

29

51

51

52

31

49

49

50

29

51

51

52

31

LTU/U20

49
29

49

F2out

31

50

49
F2in

PDC1
49

Koax.

LTU/U21

PDC0
49

Sym.

F2in

F1in...F2out

F1out...F2in

F2out

31

Fig. 3.10.9 Wiring between DIU:DLU and LTU (DIU30D)

3.10.5.3

Connection path from DLUB to LTE

DLU

to/from LTGx
D
I
U
D
L
U
0

PDC0

F2in
PCM 30 with CCS

F1out
LTE

F2out

F1in

F2in

F1out

to/from LTGx
PDC1

PCM 30 without CCS

LTE

F2out

F1in

F2in

F1out

to/from LTGy
D
I
U
D
L
U
1

PDC0

PCM 30 with CCS

LTE

F2out

F1in

F2in

F1out

to/from LTGy
PDC1

PCM 30 without CCS


F2out

LTE
F1in

Fig. 3.10.10 Connection path from DLUB to LTE

PROC:DLUB 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.10.5.4

ITMN - OFFLINE

Connection path from LTG to LTE

to/from DLU
F1in
LTE
F1out

F2out
PCM 30 with CCS

LTU
U21

PCM 30 without CCS

LTU
U20

F2in

to/from DLU
F1in

F2out
LTE
F2in
F1out

S
I
L
C

LTGx

LTGy
to/from DLU
F1in

LTE

F2out

F1out

F2in

F1in

F2out

PCM 30 with CCS

LTU
U21

PCM 30 without CCS

LTU
U20

S
I
L
C

to/from DLU
LTE
F1out

F2in

Fig. 3.10.11 Connection path from LTG to LTE

Check of system voltage per rack row

Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6V ... -57V)
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 1

PROC:DLUB 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Basic test (rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

CAUTION:
Areas on the wrap fields with pins for ringing or system voltage (e.g. SLM modules or DCCs) may be
equipped with protection caps. The protection caps protect the operating personnel from touching the pins
with ringing or system voltage and must not be removed.
Check and if necessary correct positioning of straps and switch settings on the
modules

......MMN:DLUB
TAB MOD:DLU

Create basic state

......(see 3.10.2)

The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in


Switch off all DCCxx (RGB, MGB, if present)

h ... 5

Unscrew all fuses in the R:DLU

Information about DCCxx

If SLM_8 or SLMD modules are used, each halfshelf is supplied by one DCC_8
(DCCDD, DCCDC, DCCCR) instead of 2 DCCDF.
These DCC_8 are inserted in the mounting locations of DCC x-0 and DCC x-2.
DCC x-1 and DCC x-3 are omitted and also the corresponding fuses.
The following steps have to be carried out for each shelf of the DLUB.

Information block: Thermal switch

In every DLUB rack, a thermal switch is built into the bottom panel of the rack.
The contact is fixed at the allowable room temperature. If this temperature is
exceeded, then, via this thermal switch all DCCs in the rack receive ground
potential via the individual control input.
In this way the DCCs are switched off.
Exception: The DCCs in basic shelf0 are not switched off. In this way messages
are still possible.
If the temperature goes down, the DCCs are switched back on.

PROC:DLUB 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Screw in fuses

The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in

...... (see 3.10.2)

Screw in the fuse for the first/next DCCxx which is to be switched on


Switch on the corresponding DCCxx
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

Y h ... 10
N h ... 8

Replace DCCxx
Switch off DCCxx
Unscrew corresponding fuse
Switch off spare module
Replace DCCxx by spare module
Screw in corresponding fuse
Switch on DCCxx
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

Y h ... 10
N h ... 9

Special fault clearance

If the green LEDs in all DCCs do not light when the DCCs have been switched
on, the thermal contact is probably defective
Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

10

Decision: next DCCxx


Are all DCCs in the shelf switched on?

11

Y h ... 12
N h ... 7

Decision: RGB
Is at least one module M:RGB present in the rack?

13

Y h ... 11
N h ... 7

Decision: next shelf


Are all DCCs in each shelf of the rack switched on?

12

h ... 7

Y h ... 13
N h ... 18

Switch on RGB

Fuse allocation to DCCxx and RGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(D)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

MUT

FUSE

DCCxx

RGB

02

01

0-0

02

0-2

18

0-0

19

0-2

24

2-0

26

2-2

05

06

Remark

Only in Version D, E, D, D

Switch on the first / next RGB (in F:DLU(D))

Y h ... 16
N h ... 14

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the RGB module lit?

14

Replace defective RGB


Switch off defective RGB
Switch off spare module
Replace defective RGB by spare module
(Replacing the RGB module under power is possible)
Switch on RGB

Y h ... 16
N h ... 15

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the RGB module lit?

15

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 13

Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

16

Measure ringing voltage

The ringing voltage can be measured with a multimeter between the test jacks
on the front panel of the RGB module.

......MMN:DLUB
TAB:MOD

Measure the ringing voltage between the test jacks.


Is the ringing voltage correct?

17

Decision: next RGB


Have all RGB modules in the rack already been switched on?

18

Y h ... 17
N h ... 14
Y h ... 18
N h ... 13

Decision: MGB
Is at least one module M:MGB present in the rack?

PROC:DLUB 16

Y h ... 19
N h ... 23
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

19

ITMN - OFFLINE

Switch on MGB

The MGB modules in F:DLU(D) are (if present) redundantly supplied via the
fuses of DCCxx 1-0 and 1-1
Fuse allocation to DCCxx and MGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(D)
MUT

FUSE

DCCxx

Remark

02

03

1-0

Parallel for one MGB module

04

1-1

20

1-0

21

1-1

28

3-0

29

3-1

05

06

Parallel for one MGB module

Parallel for one MGB module


(Only possible in Version D, E, D,
D)

Switch on MGB in the first / next F:DLU(D)


Is the green LED on the faceplate of the MGB module lit?

20

Y h ... 22
N h ... 20

Replace defective MGB


Switch off defective MGB
Switch off spare module
Replace defective MGB by spare module
(Replacing the MGB module under power is possible)
Switch on MGB
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the MGB module lit?

21

Y h ... 22
N h ... 21

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

22

h ... 19

Decision: next MGB


Have all MGB modules in the rack already been switched on?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 23
N h ... 19

PROC:DLUB 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

23

Commissioning
System

Information about TESMOD2E

Before on-line testing of the DLUB, all the test routines that can be called by the
CP with MML commands can also be called by means of the TESMOD2E (TESt
MOdule for DLU 2 Extended) and the results displayed. In this way TESMOD2E
can be used in off-line mode to obtain a statement on the operability of the
DLUB to be put into service before the DLUB is connected to the parent
exchange via the PCM lines.
Answer the following question with yes only if a TESMOD2E is available and online testing is not possible in the foreseeable future.

Y i....PROC:

Do you want to test the DLUB with the TESMOD2E ?

TESMOD2E

N h ... 24
h ... 24

After finishing DLUB testing with TESMOD2E continue

24

Information about connection path test

The connection of the DLUB to LTG is shown in:


(LTGs used are LTGB, LTGF, LTGG, LTGM)

......(see
Fig. 3.10.
6)

According to the LTG the DIU30D or DIU120A is used as LTU. The wiring
between DIU:DLU and the corresponding LTU is shown in the following figures:

25

Wiring to DIU120A

......(see
Fig. 3.10.
7)

Wiring to DIU30D

......(see
Fig. 3.10.
9)

Information about connection path from DLUB to LTE

Because the DLUB and the start of the PCM link may be located apart, special
precautions must be taken to ensure that the cabling between DIU:DLU and LTE
(line terminating equipment / loading equipment) is correct. If it is, the corresponding PCM link simply needs to be connected to the LTE. If then no connection can be established between DLUB and LTGB, the PCM link is interrupted.

......(see
Fig. 3.10.
10)

The connection of DLUB to LTE is shown in

26

Establish connection DIU:DLU to LTE

The connection first has to be established for DIU:DLU0 and than for DIU:DLU1

PROC:DLUB 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

27

ITMN - OFFLINE

Create test loop for PDC0


Link up the outgoing cable with CCS (PDC0) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) to
the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Did the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) go out?

28

Y h ... 29
N h ... 28

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) module.

29

Connect PDC0 to the link


Open the loop and connect the PDC0 to the link

30

Create test loop for PDC1


Link up the outgoing cable without CCS (PDC1) from the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1)
to the LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on the LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Did the red LEDs MA1 and SA1 on the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) go out?

31

Y h ... 32
N h ... 31

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU:DLU0 (DIU:DLU1) module.

32

Connect PDC1 to the link


Open the loop and connect the PDC1 to the link

33

Decision: next DLUB system

Note that DLUB system 1 is connected to another LTG as shown in


Has DLUB system1 already been checked?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

...... 6)(see Fig. 3.10.


Y h ... 34
N h ... 27

PROC:DLUB 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

34

Commissioning
System

Establish connection LTG to LTE

The connection first has to be established for LTGx (to DLUB system 0) and
than for LTGy (to DLUB system 1).

......(see
Fig. 3.10.
11)

The connection of LTG to LTE is shown in

35

Create test loop for cable with CCS


Link the outgoing cable with CCS from the LTU:U21 of LTGx (LTGy) to the LTE
which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUB system 0 (DLUB system 1), if not
already done.
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out at the output of the LTE to F1in

Y h ... 37
N h ... 36

Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?

36

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.

37

Connect LTU:U21 to the link


Open the loop and connect the LTU:U21 to the link

38

Create test loop for cable without CCS


Link the outgoing cable without CCS from the LTU:U20 of LTGx (LTGy) to the
LTE which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUB system 0 (DLUB system 1), if
not already done.
Red LED F2 goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?

39

Y h ... 40
N h ... 39

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.

40

Connect LTU:U20 to the link


Open the loop and connect the LTU:U20 to the link

PROC:DLUB 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

41

ITMN - OFFLINE

Decision: test connection to DLUB system 1


Has the connection of LTGy to DLUB system 1 already been checked?

Y h ... END
N h ... 35

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUB 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

PROC:DLUB 22

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.11

Testing DLUB with the TESMOD2E


TESMOD2E

3.11.1

Overview of TESMOD2E parts


The test module can be divided into two parts: the control/ memory board and the control
panel. TESMOD2E can have an input and display panel connected and/or a printer.
TESMOD2E is plugged into the mounting location of the DLUC module and the DLUC
module is plugged into TESMOD2E.

X
HEX display

L
E
D

PIOP
8255

off/on
Memory bank
switchover

LIST key
= TESMOD /DLUC
= SME/TESMOD
=A
= LIMITER
= PRINTER

62256-RAM

Plug
DLUC
Control
logic

27C201EPROM
27C201EPROM

= RUN IN

27256EPR

= SINGLE/CONTI.
27256EPR

= STOP
RESET key
Control panel
PT 80 connector
Connector for input
and display panel

Control/memory board
Module frame
connector

Fig. 3.11.1 TESMOD2E -Overview

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.11.2

Commissioning
System

Control and memory unit


The control logic for TESMOD2E is used to access the memory and peripheral components and to switch over the memory areas between the DLUC module and TESMOD2E
The organization of the memory areas on both modules is shown in the following figure.
DLUC

0000H

TESMOD2E
0000H
27C256 /
62256

EPROM

Country

6000H
8000H

RAM

27C256 /
62256

C000H
E000H
62256

0
1
.
31
32
.
.

27C201

27C201

63
FFFFH

FFFFH

Fig. 3.11.2 Memory organization for DLUC and TESMOD2E


The memory area is switched over with the comparator chip and a register. The DLUC
memory area is always enabled if the address wanted is larger than the value stored in
the register. The TESMOD2E memory is disabled during this access procedure. On the
DLUC module the memory chips are accessed or disabled by the enabling and disabling
of the CS chip.
The DLUC memory area is enabled by:

PROC:TESMOD2E 2

switch position on TESMOD2E


access to the RAM area of the DLUC module
switchover by program

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

The memory unit of TESMOD2E is realized by a program memory with a capacity of 48


Kbyte, a data memory with a capacity of 16 Kbyte and 2 country specific EPROMs with
a total capacity of 512 Kbyte. The total memory area of both country specific EPROMs
is divided into 64 memory banks with a capacity of 8 Kbyte each.
Each memory bank contains the country specific loading data of one country. Switchover between the memory banks is realized by a decoder with address latch. The corresponding memory bank is selected by the 'PORT command OUT adr.'.
The addresses of the TESMOD2E memory area are located on the same level as the
EPROM area of the M:DLUC (see Fig. 3.11.2)
The module PIOP 8255 is used as an interface to switches, LEDs, Hex-displays and the
printer.

3.11.3

Control panel
The control panel contains switches, keys and displays.

3.11.3.1

Switch functions
Switch
STOP OFF/ON

SINGLE/CONT

RUN IN OFF/ON

PRINTER OFF/ON

Position

Meaning

ON

A test run can be stopped by putting the switch to the ON position. The
program stops when the job buffer has been processed.

OFF

The test is resumed by changing the switch to the OFF position.

SINGLE

When the switch is in the SINGLE position, the selected program is


executed once. All the tests executed are shown in the test log.

CONT

The selected program executes 65535 times. The test log will contain
only those tests in which faults occurred.

ON

Run-in mode: The program executes 65535 times. A printer must be


connected. If faults have occurred, a summary of the fault messages is
printed out after every program execution. If the same fault occurs on
three consecutive occasions, the message "Same fault from test run X to
Y" is only printed out from time to time. This happens until another fault
occurs.

OFF

The run-in mode is switched off.

OFF

The printer is switched off.

ON

The printer is switched on. A printer must be connected, otherwise the


program does not execute.
Caution! Do not connect a print multiplexer

LIMITER OFF/ON

ON

Only 10 consecutive fault messages are printed out.


Fault output does not start again until a new program step has begun.

OFF

Fault output is only interrupted when the fault field is full (approx. 500
messages).

Tab. 3.11.1 Switch functions

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Switch

Position

A OFF/ON

SME/TESMOD

EPROM
DLUC/TESMOD

Meaning

OFF

Normal initialization procedure:


In this position, the RAM area and the DMA/DLC chips undergo a pretest
in the first run. In a subsequent run these chips are not pretested. If the
configuration data have been entered, the load routine is executed. After
the DLU load routine, the TESMOD2E is ready for test command input.

ON

In this position no more activities are carried out after initialization of the
TESMOD2E .

SME

With the switch in this position, control is taken over by the ETA85
controller.

TESMO
D

TESMOD with original processor on DLUC module.


It is controlled by the input and display panel.

DLUC

When power has been switched on or the reset key pressed, the DLU
operating program is started. The TESMOD2E functions are not available in this setting.

Tab. 3.11.1 Switch functions

3.11.3.2

Key functions
Key

Function

LIST

Printer switch "OFF":


The test log is displayed in the form of a code on the HEX display in single-step mode.
Advance step-by-step by repeatedly pressing the LIST key. When each code number is
output the red LED indicates whether the value displayed refers to a text message or a fault
message.
Red LED on: Fault message
Red LED off: Text message
Printer switch "ON":
The test log is printed out.

RESET

The RESET key resets the processor and restarts the program depending on the EPROM
DLUC/TESMOD.

Tab. 3.11.2 Key functions

3.11.3.3

Displays
Display
Hexadecimal display

Meaning
This identifies the test routines and the coded test results.

Tab. 3.11.3 Displays

PROC:TESMOD2E 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Display

Meaning

Red LED

Each time a code number is output, the red LED indicates whether the value
displayed refers to a text message or a fault message.
red LED on - fault message
red LED off - text message

Green LED

The green LED indicates that a test is currently running.

Tab. 3.11.3 Displays

3.11.4

Input and display panel

DISPLAY

HEX - INPUT

S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
K
E
Y

FUNCTION KEYS

Fig. 3.11.3 Input and display panel

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

As shown in the figure above, the input and display panel contains:

3.11.4.1

a 16-character alphanumeric display

a hexadecimal key pad

a function key pad

two switches

a RESET key

16-character display
The 16-character alphanumeric display shows the test messages, addresses and data.

3.11.4.2

RESET key
Press the RESET key to reset the DLUC, initialize, and then to load the DLU.

3.11.4.3

Switch functions
Switch
TEST PORT/ALL

RAM TESMOD /DLUC

Position

Meaning

PORT

With the switch in this position, one module can be tested on its own.

ALL

With the switch in this position, all the modules of a module type are
tested.

TESMOD

Press the G key to modify or display files, or to start programs from


the TESMOD2E memory area.

DLUC

Press the G key to modify or display files, or to start programs from


the DLUC memory area.

Tab. 3.11.4 Switch functions

3.11.4.4

Hexadecimal key pad


The hexadecimal key pad is used to enter the module flag byte, to select test routines
and to enter addresses and data.

3.11.4.5

Function key pad


The function key pad comprises eight keys. When one of these function keys is pressed,
the function is selected on the basis of the key value that has been read in, a corresponding status byte is set and the necessary memory cells reserved. The two key pads
are then interrogated for input. If one of the hexadecimal keys is now pressed, this value
is stored and displayed. When a new function key is pressed, the status byte is reset
and the memory cells reserved again. If the E key is pressed, the function called is
executed. When the function has terminated, the status byte is cleared and the keys are
interrogated again for input. The function keys are explained below:

PROC:TESMOD2E 6

E key
The E key (Enter) starts routines or initiates actions which have been called by the
other function keys.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.11.5

ITMN - OFFLINE

B key
Before starting the test routines, the configuration data of the DLU (each inserted
module is represented by an identification byte) have to be input. By pressing the B
key all modules, except the controller modules (DLUC,DIUD,BDCG) and the TU
modules (FMTU, LCMM) will be preset with the identification byte of a normal
subscriber line module.
The preset id bytes are only written into the memory if pressing the B key is followed
by pressing the E key. Thus it can be avoided that identification bytes, which have
been input manually, are unintentionally overwritten by pressing the B key.

T key
Press the T key (Test) and state the test block number to call all test routines. The
test routines are started by pressing the E key. After the test the result is output and
the keys are interrogated for new input.

D key
Press the D key to display the DLUC or TESMOD2E data. The position of the RAM
TESMOD2E /DLUC switch determines the memory area from which the data are
taken. After pressing the D key, enter the required address. The contents of the
address are displayed when the E key has been pressed. The I key can be used to
display neighboring memory cells.

I key
Press the I key to increment the address by one. This key can also be used for the
decrement function when the configuration data are being entered, if the TEST
PORT/ALL switch is in the PORT position when the I key is pressed.

S key
Press the S key (Substitute) to change the contents of memory cells. The display
shows the address of the memory location to be changed, the contents of the
memory location and the data to be entered. Press the E key to transfer the data
entered on the keypad into the memory cell.

G key
Press the G key (Go) to start a program from any address.

L key
Press the L key (List) to print out the last test log.

Test options with TESMOD2E


To call the individual test routines, press the T key and then specify the test by stating
the test code number. The following table gives an overview of the individual test
routines.
Test code no.

Test object

Entire DLU system

DLUC

GCG

All BD/DCC if switch PORT/ALL is at ALL

One BD/DCC if switch PORT/ALL is at PORT

Tab. 3.11.5 Test codes and test routines

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Test code no.

Test object

DIU:DLU

All SLMACs if switch PORT/ALL is at ALL

One SLMAC if switch PORT/ALL is at PORT

SASC

All TU modules

FMTU

LCMM

LVMM (not possible in DLUB)

EMSP

All SLMD if switch PORT/ALL is at ALL

One SLMD if switch PORT/ALL is at PORT

ALEX

MTA

MTAM

10

LTAM

11

TBAM

12

SLCI Version 6.2 or later

20

DIAGNOSIS for Version 6.2

30

QUICKCHECK for SLMA / SLMD

40

MDF test for Version 5.1

Tab. 3.11.5 Test codes and test routines


Tests of the entire DLU system are carried out in the following sequence:

DLUC test
GCG test
BD test
DIU:DLU test
TU test
SLMAC test
EMSP test

The tests listed above check the following:

DLUC test

Checksum per EPROM with reference value


Checksum of all EPROMs
Writability of the RAM cells
Writability of the RAM cells with different bit patterns
Availability of memory addresses

GCG test
Switchover of clock systems
Loop test for checking the correct DLU clock distribution

PROC:TESMOD2E 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Analysis of acknowledgments issued by the GCG

BD test
Disconnection of an SLMA group of four
DCC and RGB flag tests are already implemented in the diagnosis

DIU:DLU test

TU test

TSX status bit


All PCM channels
PCM link up to the LTGB interface
Signaling path to the LTGB
PCM link up to the COSLAC/SICOFI
meter pulse
Ringing current indicator
Leak current, short-to-ground and voltage failure indicator
LN-, LR, C-, D-, EN-, EH- and UN-indicators
Reference values on LCMM for resistance, voltage and capacitance

SLMA test

Signaling path DLUP <---> SLMCP


Interface between SLMCP and COSLAC/SICOFI
Line-dependent COSLAC data (if COSLAC is used)
Loopback setting of COSLAC/SICOFI in analog area
B seizure:
Testing feeding voltage
Port seizure as B subscriber
Ringing trough connection
Ring tripping
Testing feeding voltage (low impedance)
Testing feeding voltage (high impedance)
clear back
A subscriber:
Port seizure as A subscriber
Digit input
Testing speech path (frequency and level)
Testing meter pulse
Reversal
(Loop open)
clear forward
overload test
Testing the test relays

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

EMSP test
The EMSP test checks the line-dependent COSLAC data.

PROC:TESMOD2E 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.11.6
3.11.6.1

Commissioning
System

Tables relevant for the procedure


Basic switch settings
Switch
EPROM

Switch position

DLUC/TESMOD

TESMOD

STEUERUNG SME/TESMOD

TESMOD

OFF/ON

OFF

LIMITER

OFF/ON

ON

PRINTER

OFF/ON

ON
OFF (only if there is no printer)

RUN IN

OFF/ON

OFF

TEST

SINGLE/CONT

SINGLE

STOP

OFF/ON

OFF

Tab. 3.11.6 Basic switch settings on control panel

Switch
TEST
RAM

Switch position

PORT/ALL
TESMOD/DLUC

PORT
TESMOD

Tab. 3.11.7 Basic switch settings on the input and display


panel

3.11.6.2

Mounting locations for SLMD short circuit connectors


Frame

left halfshelf

right halfshelf

F:DLU(D)

C2 15/27/39/51

C2 68/80/92/104

F:DLU(E)

A2 15/27/39/51

A2 68/80/92/104

C2 15/27/39/51

C2 68/80/92/104

A2 15/27/39/51

A2 80/92/104

F:DLU(F)

Tab. 3.11.8 Mounting locations for module types


Q965, Q1101, Q838

PROC:TESMOD2E 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Frame

left halfshelf

right halfshelf

F:DLU(D)

F:DLU(E)

F:DLU(F)

C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110

A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

A2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110

C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110

A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

A2 74/80/86/92/98/104/110

Tab. 3.11.9 Mounting locations for module types


Q1103, Q1192

3.11.6.3

Mounting locations for SLMX short circuit connectors


Frame

left halfshelf

right halfshelf

F:DLU(D)

F:DLU(E)

F:DLU(F)

C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110

A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

A2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110

C2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

C2 68/74/80/86/92/98/104/110

A2 15/21/27/33/39/45/51/57

A2 74/80/86/92/98/104/110

Tab. 3.11.10 Mounting locations for module type Q1338

3.11.6.4

ID-Bytes for Configuration Data


Shelf

ID-Bytes for DCCs in left


halfshelf

ID-Bytes for DCCs in right


halfshelf

00 / 01

02 / 03

04 / 05

06 / 07

08 / 09

0A / 0B

0C / 0D

0E / 0F

Tab. 3.11.11 DCC ID-Bytes

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Flag byte

Module

not present

DCC

RGB

Tab. 3.11.12 Flag-Bytes

ID-Byte

Module

00

not present

01

SLMA:COS

02

SLMA:CM16

03
04

SLMA:CCBR

05

SLMA:CRMP

06

SLMD:C

07

LMEM

08

LVMM

09

FTEM

0A

ALEX

0B

EMSP

0C

GCG

0D

DLUC

0E

DIU:DLU

0F

SLMA:C12R

10

SLMA:CMC

11

SLMA:SAB

12

SLMA:TPL / SLMA:TAB

13

SLMA:DID

14

SLMA:CAB

15

SLMA:CMRL

18

SLMA:GAB

19

SLMA:GLAB

1A

MTAM

1B

LTBAM-TBA

EBP 1F

1C

LTBAM-LTA

EBP 1E

Q828 or Q1094-X1/X2

1D
1E

SLMA:DIOD

1F
20

SLMA:FPB

Tab. 3.11.13 Module ID-Bytes

PROC:TESMOD2E 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

ID-Byte

Module

21

SLMA:CSR

22

SLMD:A

23

SLMA:BEL

24

SLMA:12R

25

SLMD:B

27

SLMA:FPC

28

FMTU

29

LCMM

2A
2B
2C

EMSP

2D

SASC

2F

SLCIM

Q1094-X4

30
31
32

SLMA:FPS

33

IWEA

34
35

IWEB

36

SLMA CSP (Brasil)

37

ALMA (Brasil)

38

OLMA (Brasil)

39

OLMAC (Brasil)

3A

SLMA FPD

3C

SLMA:FPC8 (Austria)

41

SLMX

49

DIUDRA (SDE)

4A

DIUDRB (SDE)

4B

SUR

50

SLMA:FPE

51

SLMA:FPF

52

MGB

Tab. 3.11.13 Module ID-Bytes

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Switch settings on the TESMOD2E


Put all switches on the control panel to the basic position according to:
Put switches on the input and display panel to the basic position according to:

......(see
Tab.
3.11.6)
......(see
Tab.
3.11.7)

Connect the TESMOD2E


Switch off current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf of shelf 0 and switch off
RGB0 (if present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of DCCxx and RGB in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0 go out
Pull control module DLUC0 in the left halfshelf of shelf 0
Plug TESMOD2E into the mounting location of DLUC0
Plug module DLUC0 onto the TESMOD2E module
Connect control and display panel to TESMOD2E
Switch on printer and connect to control and display panel

Plug in ADL
Plug ADL test module onto the rear of mounting location A2/B2 051 and C2/D2
074
Set switches on the ADL test module to the following positions:

S1 = ON

S2 = OFF

S3 = OFF

S4:
S4 = OFF : No CRC4 mode (switch S5 on M:DIUDC at OFF) for WM
S4 = ON : CRC4 mode (if S5 on M:DIUDC is ON) for DBP

As of Version 6.2, only the ADL is used as a DIU termination

Prepare SLMD-Test
Connect the network terminator (NT) for ISDN subscribers on the back of the
SLMD modules.

PROC:TESMOD2E 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

For module frames with code number S30804-B2709-X- * (F:DLU(D)) to the


following points:

A-wire of NT to pin B2 039 37

B-wire of NT to pin B2 039 38

The SLMD short-circuit connector S30189-H4906-A110 can be used for SLMD


module types Q965, Q1101 and Q838. One SLMD short-circuit connector is
required per SLMD. The SLMD short circuit connector is like the SLMD module
plugged into a mounting location with integer value.

The following mounting locations for SLMD short-circuit connectors are


possible:
The SLMD short-circuit connector S30189-H4906-A110 must be used for SLMD
module types Q1103 and Q1192. One SLMD short-circuit connector is required
per SLMD.

The following mounting locations for SLMD short-circuit connectors are


possible:

...... 3.11.9)
(see Tab.

Prepare SLMX-Test
The SLMX short-circuit connector S30257-Z7103-A20 can be used for SLMX
module type Q1338. One SLMX short-circuit connector is required per SLMX.
The SLMX short circuit connector must be plugged into the rear side of the
SLMX mounting location.

The following mounting locations for SLMX short-circuit connectors are


possible:

...... 3.11.8)
(see Tab.

...... 3.11.10)
(see Tab.

Information about Country settings

If the STOP-Switch is in position OFF before switching on the power, the last
selected country memory bank is active.
If another country is to be activated, the STOP Switch has to be set to position
ON before power is switched on. Then the program runs in an endless loop after
switching on the power and the user can select the relevant country memory
bank. After selecting the correct country memory bank the STOP Switch is to be
set to position OFF again and the automatic initializing starts.

Decision: select memory bank with country specific loading data


Is already the correct memory bank with the country specific loading data
selected?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 9
N h ... 8

PROC:TESMOD2E 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Select memory bank with country specific loading data


Set STOP-Switch to position ON
Switch on current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf and RGB0 (if present)
The program runs in an endless loop.
Select the correct memory bank with the HEX-keys or by pressing the I-key
(increment) or L-key (decrement)

h ... 10

Set STOP-Switch to position OFF

Switch on DCCxx
Switch on current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf and RGB0 (if present)
The LEDs on the faceplates of modules DCCxx and RGB in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0 light up.

10

Initializing TESMOD2E

TESMOD2E is automatically initialized. A RAM test and a DLC/DMA test are


then carried out on the DLUC. If no faults are found during the test, the DLUC is
subsequently initialized.
At the end of the TESMOD initialization the display shows:
' BASIC - TEST ' ' **NO FAULTS DETECTED** ' ' END OF TEST '
and the configuration data can be entered.

Y h ... 12
N h ... 11

Does the display panel show '**NO FAULT DETECTED**'?

11

Replace defective TESMOD2E

The TESMOD2E is probably defective and must be replaced


Switch off current converter DCCxx and RGB0 (if present) in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0
Remove input and display panel from TESMOD2E
Remove DLUC0 module from TESMOD2E
Replace TESMOD2E in DLUC0 mounting location
Plug DLUC0 onto TESMOD2E
Connect input and display panel to TESMOD2E

h ... 9

After replacing defective TESMOD2E continue

12

Decision: automatic input of configuration data

The rack capacity stage has to be input before starting the DLU test. For this
reason it is necessary to generate the configuration data. Every module which is
present in the DLU is entered in the configuration data.
Caution: Only the modules entered in the configuration data will be tested

PROC:TESMOD2E 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Depending on the switch A OFF/ON the configuration data are input automatically or manually:

A=OFF : Configuration data are input automatically

A=ON : Configuration data have to be input manually

Is the configuration data input automatically?

13

Y h ... 13
N h ... 15

Automatic input of configuration data

A printer should be connected for automatic input of configuration data so that a


printout of the data can be made. Whenever automatic configuration data is
executed, the display "GET EQUIPMENT DATA" appears on the control panel or
on the printout. Each time an automatic input of configuration data has taken
place, the printout of the data should be compared with the actual rack configuration. If a module is installed at a mounting location, the printout of the configuration data must show the hardware ID of the module in question. If it shows 00,
however, instead of the right hardware ID, the module in question is defective.
The BD modules do not appear in the configuration data printout.
The RGB, MGB and DCC modules are recognized automatically.
The DCCs are assigned to the following HEX-numbers:

...... 3.11.11)
(see Tab.

In the case of automatic configuration data input, only the DIUD in the shelf in
which the TESMOD2E is plugged in is entered in the configuration data; the
DIUD in the other DLUC system is not entered, however.
DLUB READY is printed out after successful input of the configuration data
DLUB READY
Compare the configuration data printout with the rack layout
Are all the modules contained in the configuration data?

14

Y h ... 16
N h ... 14

Replace modules
Switch off DCC
Modules marked 00 must be replaced
Switch on DCC
After replacing modules continue

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 13

PROC:TESMOD2E 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

15

Commissioning
System

Manual input of configuration data

The TESMOD2E needs the configuration data for the DLU load routine. The
configuration data contain the module data and the capacity stage.
Press the B key on the input panel
"DLU DATA" appears on the alphanumeric display
Press the E key on the input panel
The alphanumeric display shows the number of the first DCC and the corresponding flag byte.

......(see
Tab.
3.11.12)

The flag byte must be entered on the keypad according to:

The TESMOD2E begins with the left-hand DCC in shelf 0. After entering the
code number, press the I key and the TESMOD2E is ready for entry of the next
code number. The DCCxx are numbered from 00 through 0F. Simply enter that
the DCCxx is present or not. The bus distributors are automatically entered
when the DCCxx are entered. If both DCCxx in a shelf are entered as not
present, the entire shelf is taken as not present. Positions 10 and 11 are
reserved for the RGB.
Caution!
When the TEST PORT/ALL switch is changed to the ALL position, the I key no
longer has the increment function, but the decrement function. This means that
if an input error is made, the entire configuration data do not have to be reentered.
Enter the configuration data for all DCCxx and RGB according to the following
table:

......(see
Tab.
3.11.12)

Press the E key when all 18 flag bytes have been entered.
The bytes are stored in the EPROM EMULATOR.

The TESMOD2E is now ready for entry of the remaining module types.

......(see
Tab.
3.11.13)

Enter the configuration data for the remaining modules according to:
Press the E key when all flag bytes have been entered.
All flag bytes are stored in the EPROM EMULATOR.
When the configuration data have been entered, the DLU is loaded with system,
device, module and port data. The operation and maintenance program of the
DLU is then started up until all the modules present have been created and activated.
When the load routine has terminated, TESMOD2E is ready for tests to be
executed and indicates this on the display with DLUB READY.

PROC:TESMOD2E 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

16

ITMN - OFFLINE

Test entire DLU with TESMOD2E


Press the T key
The display shows a 0

The code number 0 executes all the possible tests on the DLU in sequence.

...... (see 3.11.5)

Start the tests by pressing E

When these tests have terminated, the green LED on the control panel goes out
and the number of errors is shown on the display panel.

17

Evaluate message
Branch to the following blocks according to the message which is displayed

18

The message NO ERRORS DETECTED is displayed

h ... 28

The message XX ERRORS DETECTED is displayed (XX indicates the


number of errors that have occurred)

h ... 18

L key

If a module needs to be replaced, it must be marked as faulty once it has been


removed.
Press the L key
The display outputs the first error that occurred, stating the fault location
(module identification).

19

Identify the errors that have occurred (1)


Does the error displayed relate to an SLMAC module?

20

Identify the errors that have occurred (2)


Is LOOP TEST ERROR displayed?

21

If LOOP TEST ERROR is output for the entire SLMAC

h ... 23
h ... 22

Pull SLMAC module


Pull the identified SLMAC module and then reinsert it

23

Y h ... 21
N h ... 23

Identify the errors that have occurred (3)


If LOOP TEST ERROR is output for one port only

22

Y h ... 20
N h ... 23

h ... 26

Decision: fault clearance


Is it probable that the displayed error can be cleared?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 24
N h ... 25

PROC:TESMOD2E 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

24

Clear error
Clear displayed error

25

h ... 26

Replace module
Replace the module indicated in the display

26

Commissioning
System

h ... 26

Display next error


Display the next error by pressing I
Is another error displayed?

27

RESET
Press RESET key

28

Y h ... 19
N h ... 27
h ... 16

DLU system 1 already tested?


Has DLU system 1 already been tested?

PROC:TESMOD2E 20

Y h ... 30
N h ... 29

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

29

ITMN - OFFLINE

Test DLU system 1


Switch off current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf of shelf 0 and switch off
RGB0 (if present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of DCCxx and RGB in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0 go out
Pull control module DLUC0 in the left halfshelf of shelf 0
Unplug TESMOD2E
Plug in DLUC0 again
Switch on current converter DCCxx in the left halfshelf and RGB0 (if present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of DCCxx and RGB in the left halfshelf of
shelf 0 are lit
Switch off current converter DCCxx in the right halfshelf of shelf 0 and switch off
RGB1 (if present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of DCCxx and RGB in the right halfshelf of
shelf 0 go out
Pull control module DLUC1 in the right halfshelf of shelf 0
Plug TESMOD2E into the DLUC1 mounting location
Plug the DLUC1 onto the TESMOD2E
Switch on printer and connect to the control and display panel
Switch on current converter DCCxx in the right halfshelf of shelf 0 and RGB1 (if
present)
The LEDs on the module faceplates of the DCCxx and RGB in the right halfshelf
of shelf 1 light up.

TESMOD2E is automatically initialized when power is switched on. A RAM test


and a DLC/DMA test are then carried out on the DLUC. If no faults are found
during the tests, the DLUC is subsequently initialized. The configuration data do
not have to be reentered for DLU system 1 as they are still stored in the EPROM
emulator. After initialization the DLU is loaded with system, device, module and
port data. Subsequently, the operation and maintenance software of the DLU is
started until all the modules present have been created and activated.
When the load routine has terminated, the TESMOD2E is ready for tests to be
executed and indicates this by displaying DLUB READY.

h ... 12
30

End of DLU-Test with TESMOD2E

End of DLU-Test with TESMOD2E


Return to calling procedure

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:TESMOD2E 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

PROC:TESMOD2E 22

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.12

Off-line Installation of Digital Line Unit


(Frames G / E / F)
DLUD

3.12.1

Documents
The following Documents are required as references

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Maintenance Manual MMN:DLUD


AKUHW Lists

PROC:DLUD 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.12.2

Fuse Assignments

3.12.2.1
FU 01

FU

03

02

Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-E)


05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

FU

32

FU

FU

01 A001-057
03
04

C001,C015-033,057*

D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C

Sicherungsschiene
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0

Shelf 1

11 C001,C015-033

D D
C C
C C

B
D
2

Shelf 2

C001,C015-033,057*

D
C
C

D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(G)

Shelf 0

D
C
C
D
C
C

B
D
3

Shelf 3

Shelf 1

F:DLU(E)

D
C
C

D R
C G
C B
D
C
C

M
G
B

D
C
C

D
C
C

C008,C039-057

24 A001,A015-033
25 A008,A039-057
28 C001,C015-033
29

D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057

18 A001-057

21

D
C
C

M
G
B

08 A008,A039-057

20

D R
C G
C B

C008,C039-057

07 A001,A015-033

12

MUT01

D D
C C
C C
D D
C C
C C

Shelf 2

Shelf 3

C008,C039-057

B
D
2
B
D
3

F:DLU(E)

D
C
C
D
C
C

D
C
C
D
C
C

MUT02
A066-125
C116,C068-086

02
05

C123,C092-110

06

MUT03
A116,A068-086

09

A123,A092-110

10

C116,C068-086

13

C123,C092-110

14

MUT05
A066-125
C116,C068-086

19
22

C123,C092-110

23

MUT06
A116,A068-086

26

A123,A092-110

27

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

30
31

CD
* 057 nur wenn MGB gesteckt ist.
Hinweis: Wird nur ein DCC pro Halbshelf verwendet, entfallen die DCC Pos shf-1 und shf-3 und somit auch
die zugehrigen Sicherungen.
Fig. 3.12.1 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-E)

PROC:DLUD 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.12.2.2
FU 01

FU

03

02

Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-G)


05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

32

FU

FU

FU

01 A001-057
03
04

C001,C015-033,057*

D R
C G
C B

D D
C C
C C

Sicherungsschiene
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0

Shelf 1

M
G
B

D D
C C
C C

11 C001,C015-033

C001,C015-033,057*

29

R
G
B

D
C
C

D
C
C

R
G
B

D D
C C
C C

D
C
C

D
C
C

C001,C015-033,057*

MUT02
A066-125

02

C116,C068-086

D
C
C

D
C
C

M
G
B

R
G
B

D
C
C

06

MUT03
A116,A068-086

09

A123,A092-110

10

C116,C068-086

D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(G)

Shelf 2

Shelf 3

C008,C039-057

M
G
B

D
C
C
D
C
C

R
G
B

D
C
C

13
14

MUT05
A066-125

19

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

D R
C G
C B

05

C123,C092-110

C123,C092-110

F:DLU(G)

Shelf 0

D
C
C

D
C
C

B
D
3

Shelf 3

Shelf 1

F:DLU(E)

C008,C039-057

24 A001-057
28

D D
C C
C C

C008,C039-057

18 A001-057

21

D
C
C

B
D
2

Shelf 2

08 A008,A039-057

20

D
C
C

C008,C039-057

07 A001,A015-033

12

MUT01

22
23

MUT06
A066-125

26

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

30
31

CD
* 057 nur wenn MGB gesteckt ist.
Hinweis: Wird nur ein DCC pro Halbshelf verwendet, entfallen die DCC Pos shf-1 und shf-3 und somit auch die
Fig. 3.12.2 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-G)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.12.2.3
FU 01

FU

03

02

Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-F)


05

04

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

21

19

18

20

23

22

25

24

27

26

29

28

33 FU

31

30

FU

32

FU

FU

01 A001-057
03
04

C001,C015-033,057*

D R
C G
C B
D D
C C
C C

Sicherungsschiene
F:DLU(G)
Shelf 0

Shelf 1

11 C001,C015-033

D D
C C
C C

B
D
2

Shelf 2

D D
C C
C C

C001,C015-033,057*

D
C
C

R
G
B

D D
C C
C C

F:DLU(E)

Shelf 3

R
G
B
D
C
C

D
C
C

D
C
C

F:DLU(G)

D
C
C

D
C
C

M
G
B

R
G
B

D
C
C

C008,C039-057

24 A001,A015-033

D D
C C
C C

Shelf 2

25 A008,A039-057

MUT02
A066-125
C116,C068-086

B B
D D
2 3

F:
DLU(F)

D
C
C

D
C
C

02
05

C123,C092-110

06

MUT03
A116,A068-086

09

A123,A092-110

10

C116,C068-086
C123,C092-110

Shelf 0

Shelf 1

D
C
C

D
C
C

B
D
3

C008,C039-057

18 A001-057

21

D
C
C

M
G
B

08 A008,A039-057

20

D
C
C

C008,C039-057

07 A001,A015-033

12

MUT01

13
14

MUT05
A066-125
C116,C068-086

19
22

C123,C092-110

23

A116,A074-92

26

A123,A098-110

27

CD
* 057 nur wenn MGB gesteckt ist.
Hinweis: Wird nur ein DCC pro Halbshelf verwendet, entfallen die DCC Pos shf-1 und shf-3 und somit auch die

Fig. 3.12.3 Fuse Assignment R:DLUD (G-E-G-F)

PROC:DLUD 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.12.3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Equipment of the different Frames


Detailed information about the equipment of the different frames are listed in the equipment list and the mounting location list of the MMN:DLUD, APP.

3.12.4

Shelter DLU 400/700


The shelter can contain the following equipment:

Remote Shelter DLU 400 (Fig. 3.12.4)


Basic frame D for DLUB (F:DLU(D)) with a max. of 384 subscribers or basic frame
G for DLUD (F:DLU(G)) with a max. of 448 subscribers

Remote Shelter DLU 700 (Fig. 3.12.5)


Basic frame F:DLU(D)) or F:DLU(G)) and also extension frame F for DLUB
(F:DLU(F)) with a max. of 240 subscribers

Transmission equipment for the shelter (optional)


The following transmission equipment is provided in the shelter for connection to the
network node or for the connection of additional shelters (ring or star configuration):
Transmission technology in the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
SDH: synchronous multiplexers (SMA1/4) or, alternatively,
synchronous dual terminal multiplexers (STM1D)
Transmission technology in the plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
PDH technology in the shelter:
Optical/HDSL terminal multiplexer for 2 Mbit/s (OMX2/HMX)
Optical terminal multiplexer for 34 Mbit/s (OMX16)
(PDH technology can also be integrated in the DLU hardware)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.12.4.1

Commissioning
System

MDF/ DDF distribution frame

Air conditioning (fan and heater)

Power supply unit, including standby battery

Cable TV

Modem for OFDC (optional)

Overview Shelter 400/700

SIEMENS

DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))

MDF
200 DA internal

SMA 1/4 or SMT1D


(SDH)

MDF
200 DA internal
1600 mm

Connector panel

Fan
Fan

MDF
200 DA external

DC distribution

OFDC modem

Connector panel
MDF
200 DA external

MDF
200 DA external

AC distribution
OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)
AC/DC converter (48 V/30 A)

(Connection for
emergency power supply)
Mains access (MAP)
or
lightning overvoltage
protection (LOP)

Heater 1600 W
Cable TV
Battery

500 mm

1800 mm

Side view (left)

Front view

Fig. 3.12.4 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 400

PROC:DLUD 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

SIEMENS

DDF
DDF
24 PCM30 24 PCM30
DDF
24 PCM30

104 DA
internal

Connecting panel

Basic frame D
(F:DLU(D)) or G
(F:DLU(G))

MDF
200 DA internal

SMA 1/4 or SMT1D


(SDH)

MDF
200 DA internal

1800 mm

MDF
200 DA internal

Fan

Extension frame F
(F:DLU(F))

MDF
200 DA external

Connecting panel

MDF
200 DA external

Fan
OFDC modem

MDF
200 DA external

DC distribution

MDF
200 DA external

AC distribution

MDF
200 DA external
(Connection for emergency power supply)

OMX2/HMX or OMX16
(PDH)

AC/DC
converter
(48 V/30 A)

Heater 1600 W
Cable TV

Mains access (MAP)


or
lightning overvoltage
protection (LOP)

Battery

500 mm

1800 mm

Side view (left)

Front view

Fig. 3.12.5 Configuration of Remote Shelter DLU 700

3.12.4.2

Fuse Assignment PPD (Primary power distribution)


Sicherungen

gesicherte Einheit

F1

25 A

AC Power supply
(Fehlerstromschutzschalter)

F2

16 A

Rectifier 1

F3

16 A

Rectifier 2 (optional)

F4

10 A

Heater

F5

10 A

Cabel TV (optional)

Tab. 3.12.1 Assignment of primary fuses

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Sicherungen
F6

10 A

gesicherte Einheit
Socket (for OFDC-Modem)

Tab. 3.12.1 Assignment of primary fuses

3.12.4.3

Fuse Assignment SPD (Secondary power distribution)


Fuses

Unit

F1

10 A

DLU Shelf 0 (System side 1)

F2

10 A

DLU Shelf 1 (System side 1)

F3

10 A

DLU Shelf 1 (System side 0)

F4

10 A

DLU Shelf 0 (System side 0)

F5

10 A

Transmission equipment (SDH)


or
Radio equipment SRA L1/SRA L2

F6

10 A

not used

F7

10 A

Transmission equipment (PDH)


or
Radio equipment SRA L1/SRA L2

F8

10 A

Shelter DLU 400: not used


bzw.
Shelter DLU 700: Shelf 2 (System side 1)

F9

10 A

Fan 2

F10

10 A

Fan 1

F11

10 A

Monitoring and heater control

F12

10 A

Shelter DLU 400: not used


bzw.
Shelter DLU 700: Shelf 2 (System side 0)

F13

50 A

Battery

Tab. 3.12.2 Assignment of secondary fuses


Caution:
The fuse cover must not be removed by the maintenance. personnel. If maintenance
work on the fuses is necessary, this can only be carried out by trained specialists. Before
the fuse cover is removed the 220 V AC line voltage must be switched off.

PROC:DLUD 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.12.5
3.12.5.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Remote DLU
Connection of a remote DLUD to two LTG

Plug position
DLU

LTGx
D
L
U
S
0

D
L
U
S
1

LTU
U21

PDC0
B2 057

LTU
U21

PDC1

S
I
L
C

LTU
U20

PDC0
B2 066

LTU
U20

PDC1

DLU

LTGy
D
L
U
S
0

D
L
U
S
1

LTU
U21

PDC0
B2 057

LTU
U21

PDC1

S
I
L
C

LTU
U20

PDC0
B2 066
PDC1

LTU
U20

Fig. 3.12.6 Connection of remote DLUD to two LTG


The diagram above shows the connection of the remote DLUD to two LTGs. One DLUD
system is connected to the LTGx and the other to the LTGy. The dotted lines represent
the links without CCS.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.12.5.2

Commissioning
System

Wiring between DLUS and LTU


DIU120A

DLUS

Pin No.(*)

Pin No. (Plug Pin)

Sym.

LE

Koax.

LE

54

57

55

55

F2in...F1out

F1in...F2out

E134

C134

E136

E136

E138

C136

E132

E132

E134

C134

E136

E136

E138

C136

F2out

58

LTU/U20

PDC1
43
F2in...F1out

F2out
44

47

45

45

F2in

F1in...F2out

F1out...F2in

F2out...F1in

F2in
46

E132

F2in

F1out...F2in

F2out...F1in

F2in

43

E132

53
F2out

56

Koax.

LTU/U21

PDC0
53

Sym.

F2out

48

Fig. 3.12.7 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU120A)


(*): The pin numbers refer to the first of four PDC connectors of the DIU120A. An overview of all pin numbers is shown in the following table:
PDC(0)
Sym

Koax

PDC(1)
Sym

Koax

PDC(2)
Sym

Koax

PDC(3)
Sym

Koax

E132

E132

E142

E142

E152

E152

E212

E212

E134

C134

E144

C144

E154

C154

E214

C214

E136

E136

E146

E146

E156

E156

E216

E216

E138

C136

E148

C146

E158

C156

E218

C216

Tab. 3.12.3 Pin numbers for PCM30 connectors of DIU120A

PROC:DLUD 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

DIU120A MOLOCS:

305

255

101

151

203

SU1
F:LTGM(A) Rearview
SU2
row C
(mounting area 1)

SU3
SU4
SU5
SU1
SU2

row D
(mounting area 2)

SU3
SU4

PDC0

PDC1

PDC2

0 (no pins available)


1
2

Pin E 2 1 2
Pins for PDC3 (sym.)

Pin E 2 1 4

Pin E 2 1 6
Pin E 2 1 8
9

Fig. 3.12.8 Numbering method on F:LTGM

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

DIU30D

DLUS
Pin No. (Plug Pin)
Sym.

Pin No. (Plug pin)


LE

Koax.

LE

53
F2in...F1out

F2out
54

57

55

55
F2out...F1in

F2in
56

F1in...F2out

F1out...F2in

F2in...F1out

F2out

45

45

F2out...F1in

F2in
46

50

29

51

51

52

31

49

49

50

29

51

51

52

31

LTU/U20

43
47

49

F2out

58

44

49
F2in

PDC1
43

Koax.

LTU/U21

PDC0
53

Sym.

F2in

F1in...F2out

F1out...F2in

F2out

48

Fig. 3.12.9 Wiring between DLUS and LTU (DIU30D)

3.12.5.3

Connection path from DLUD to LTE

To/from LTGx

DLU
D
L
U
S
0

PDC0

F2in
PCM 30 with CCS

F1out
LTE

F2out

F1in

F2in

F1out

To/from LTGx
PDC1

PCM 30 without CCS

LTE

F2out

F1in

F2in

F1out

To/from LTGy
D
L
U
S
1

PDC0

PCM 30 with CCS

LTE

F2out

F1in

F2in

F1out

To/from LTGy
PDC1

PCM 30 without CCS


F2out

LTE
F1in

Fig. 3.12.10 Connection path from DLUD to LTE

PROC:DLUD 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.12.5.4

ITMN - OFFLINE

Connection path from LTG to LTE

To/from DLU
F1in
LTE
F1out

F2out
PCM 30 with CCS

LTU
U21

PCM 30 without CCS

LTU
U20

F2in

To/from DLU
F1in

F2out
LTE
F2in
F1out

LTGx

S
I
L
C

LTGy
To/from DLU
F1in

LTE

F2out

F1out

F2in

F1in

F2out

PCM 30 with CCS

LTU
U21

PCM 30 without CCS

LTU
U20

S
I
L
C

To/from DLU
LTE
F1out

F2in

Fig. 3.12.11 Connection path from LTG to LTE

Check of system voltage per rack row

Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6V ... -57V)
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 1

PROC:DLUD 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Basic test (rack)


Check rack layout and issues against exchange specific document (AKUHW
lists), if not already done.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place.
Look at wrap fields to check that wrap pins and contacts are not bent or
touching and that there are no foreign bodies.

CAUTION:
Areas on the wrap fields with pins for ringing or system voltage (e.g. SLM modules or DCCs) may be
equipped with protection caps. The protection caps protect the operating personnel from touching the pins
with ringing or system voltage and must not be removed.
Check and if necessary correct positioning of straps and switch settings on the
modules

......MMN:DLUD
TAB MOD:DLU

Create basic state

......(see 3.12.2)

The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in


Switch off all DCCxx (RGB, MGB, if present)

h ... 5

Unscrew all fuses in the R:DLUD

Information about DCCxx

If SLM_8 or SLMD modules are used, each halfshelf is supplied by one DCC_8
(DCCDD, DCCDC, DCCCR) instead of 2 DCCDF.
These DCC_8 are inserted in the mounting locations of DCC x-0 and DCC x-2.
DCC x-1 and DCC x-3 are omitted and also the corresponding fuses.
The following steps have to be carried out for each shelf of the DLUD.

Information block: Thermal switch

In every DLUD rack, a thermal switch is built into the bottom panel of the rack.
The contact is fixed at the allowable room temperature. If this temperature is
exceeded, then, via this thermal switch all DCCs in the rack receive ground
potential via the individual control input.
In this way the DCCs are switched off.
Exception: The DCCs in basic shelf0 are not switched off. In this way messages
are still possible.
If the temperature goes down, the DCCs are switched back on.

PROC:DLUD 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Screw in fuses

The assignment of fuses to the individual modules is given in

...... (see 3.12.2)

Screw in the fuse for the first/next DCCxx which is to be switched on


Switch on the corresponding DCCxx
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

Y h ... 10
N h ... 8

Replace DCCxx
Switch off DCCxx
Unscrew corresponding fuse
Switch off spare module
Replace DCCxx by spare module
Screw in corresponding fuse
Switch on DCCxx
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the DCCxx lit?

Y h ... 10
N h ... 9

Special fault clearance

If the green LEDs in all DCCs do not light when the DCCs have been switched
on, the thermal contact is probably defective
Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

10

Decision: next DCCxx


Are all DCCs in the shelf switched on?

11

Y h ... 12
N h ... 7

Decision: RGB
Is at least one module M:RGB present in the rack?

13

Y h ... 11
N h ... 7

Decision: next shelf


Are all DCCs in each shelf of the rack switched on?

12

h ... 7

Y h ... 13
N h ... 18

Switch on RGB

Fuse allocation to DCCxx and RGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(G)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

MUT

FUSE

DCCxx

RGB

02

01

0-0

02

0-2

07

2-0

09

2-2

18

0-0

19

0-2

24

2-0

26

2-2

03

05

06

Remark

Only in Version G,G,G,G

Only in Version G,E,G,G or


G,G,G,G

Switch on the first / next RGB (in F:DLU(G))

Y h ... 16
N h ... 14

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the RGB module lit?

14

Replace defective RGB


Switch off defective RGB
Switch off spare module
Replace defective RGB by spare module
(Replacing the RGB module under power is possible)
Switch on RGB

Y h ... 16
N h ... 15

Is the green LED on the faceplate of the RGB module lit?

15

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 13

Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

16

Measure ringing voltage

The ringing voltage can be measured with a multimeter between the test jacks
on the front panel of the RGB module.

......MMN:DLUD
TAB:MOD

Measure the ringing voltage between the test jacks.


Is the ringing voltage correct?

17

Y h ... 17
N h ... 14

Decision: next RGB


Have all RGB modules in the rack already been switched on?

PROC:DLUD 16

Y h ... 18
N h ... 13

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

18

ITMN - OFFLINE

Decision: MGB

Y h ... 19
N h ... 23

Is at least one module M:MGB present in the rack?

19

Switch on MGB

The MGB modules in F:DLU(D) are (if present) redundantly supplied via the
fuses of DCCxx 1-0 and 1-1
Fuse allocation to DCCxx and MGB-modules (if present) in F:DLU(D)
MUT

FUSE

DCCxx

Remark

02

03

1-0

Parallel for one MGB module

04

1-1

11

3-0

12

3-1

20

1-0

21

1-1

28

3-0

29

3-1

03

05

06

Parallel for one MGB module


(Only possible in Version G,G,G,G)
Parallel for one MGB module

Parallel for one MGB module


(Only possible in Version G,E,G,G
or G,G,G,G)

Switch on MGB in the first / next F:DLU(G)


Is the green LED on the faceplate of the MGB module lit?

20

Y h ... 22
N h ... 20

Replace defective MGB


Switch off defective MGB
Switch off spare module
Replace defective MGB by spare module
(Replacing the MGB module under power is possible)
Switch on MGB
Is the green LED on the faceplate of the MGB module lit?

21

Y h ... 22
N h ... 21

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
Repeat testing after finishing special fault clearance

22

h ... 19

Decision: next MGB


Have all MGB modules in the rack already been switched on?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 23
N h ... 19
PROC:DLUD 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

23

Commissioning
System

Information about connection path test

The connection of the DLUD to LTG is shown in:


(LTGs used are LTGB, LTGF, LTGG, LTGM)

......(see
Fig. 3.12.
6)

According to the LTG the DIU30D or DIU120A is used as LTU. The wiring
between DIU:DLU and the corresponding LTU is shown in the following figures:

24

Wiring to DIU120A

......(see
Fig. 3.12.
7)

Wiring to DIU30D

......(see
Fig. 3.12.
9)

Information about connection path from DLUD to LTE

Because the DLUD and the start of the PCM link may be located apart, special
precautions must be taken to ensure that the cabling between DLUS and LTE
(line terminating equipment / loading equipment) is correct. If it is, the corresponding PCM link simply needs to be connected to the LTE. If then no connection can be established between DLUD and LTGB, the PCM link is interrupted.

......(see
Fig. 3.12.
10)

The connection of DLUD to LTE is shown in

25

Establish connection DLUS to LTE

The connection first has to be established for DLUS0 and than for DLUS1

26

Create test loop for PDC0


Link up the outgoing cable with CCS (PDC0) from the DLUS0 (DLUS1) to the
LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Did the red LED for PDC0 alarm on DLUS0 (DLUS1) go out?

27

Y h ... 28
N h ... 27

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DLUS0 (DLUS1) module.

28

Connect PDC0 to the link


Open the loop and connect the PDC0 to the link

PROC:DLUD 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

29

ITMN - OFFLINE

Create test loop for PDC1


Link up the outgoing cable without CCS (PDC1) from the DLUS0 (DLUS1) to the
LTE which is to be connected with the LTE of LTGx (LTGy).
Red LED F2 on the LTE goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Did the red LED for PDC0 alarm on DLUS0 (DLUS1) go out?

30

Y h ... 31
N h ... 30

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DLUS0 (DLUS1) module.

31

Connect PDC1 to the link


Open the loop and connect the PDC1 to the link

32

Decision: next DLUD system

Note that DLUD system 1 is connected to another LTG as shown in


Has DLUD system1 already been checked?

33

...... 6)(see Fig. 3.12.


Y h ... 33
N h ... 26

Establish connection LTG to LTE

The connection first has to be established for LTGx (to DLUD system 0) and
than for LTGy (to DLUD system 1).
The connection of LTG to LTE is shown in

34

...... 11)
(see Fig. 3.12.

Create test loop for cable with CCS


Link the outgoing cable with CCS from the LTU:U21 of LTGx (LTGy) to the LTE
which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUD system 0 (DLUD system 1), if not
already done.
Red LED F2 on LTE goes out
Link F1out at the output of the LTE to F1in
Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?

35

Y h ... 36
N h ... 35

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:DLUD 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

36

Commissioning
System

Connect LTU:U21 to the link


Open the loop and connect the LTU:U21 to the link

37

Create test loop for cable without CCS


Link the outgoing cable without CCS from the LTU:U20 of LTGx (LTGy) to the
LTE which is to be connected to the LTE of DLUD system 0 (DLUD system 1), if
not already done.
Red LED F2 goes out
Link F1out to F1in at the output of the LTE
Have the red LEDs MA0 and SA0 on the DIU:LTG gone out?

38

Y h ... 39
N h ... 38

Fault clearance
First check the cable for continuity.
If no faults can be found here, replace the DIU module in question.

39

Connect LTU:U20 to the link


Open the loop and connect the LTU:U20 to the link

40

Decision: test connection to DLUD system 1


Has the connection of LTGy to DLUD system 1 already been checked?

Y h ... END
N h ... 34

END

PROC:DLUD 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13

Off-line Installation of CP113D


CP113D

3.13.1

Documents
The following Documents are required as references

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

AKUHW Lists (Equipment Lists)


Maintenance Manual MMN:CP113D
Maintenance Manual MMN:PC - BASIS, Ordering no.: A30808-X3069-Y260- * 7620
MMN:SW
NM:CP113D
NM:CP Devices
Manuals required:
MTD
MDD
PC

PROC:CP113D 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13.2

Commissioning
System

Abbreviations
Abb.

3.13.3

B:CMY

bus to common memory

B:IOC

bus system for input/output control

BAP

base processor

CAP

call processor

CI

common interface

CMY

common memory

F:

frame

IOC

input/output control

IOP

input/output processor

LMY

local memory

MDD

magnetic disk device

MI

memory interface

MOLOC

mounting location

MTD

magnetic tape device

MUT

mounting unit

MYB

memory bank

MYC

memory control

PI

processor interface

PU

processor unit

R:

rack

Test Equipment and Resources

3.13.4

Meaning

APS (contained on both disks)


Multimeter (DMM)
Scratch tapes with write ring

General Information about Testing CP113D


The coordination processor CP113D undergoes a system test before leaving the manufacturing plant. The individual racks are tested to check that the voltage converters, the
logic components and the internal cabling function correctly.
a) The cables of the CP rack row are supplied as a supplementary package to the coordination processor and are given a system test in the rack (except when cables are
supplied later).

PROC:CP113D 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

b) Once accepted by the test department, all modules are protected from unauthorized
access (by means of a loop secured round each individual module frame).
c) The magnetic tape device, the disk drives and the personal computers are systemtested and separately packed for delivery. The disk storage units had the test-APS
copied onto them in the test department.
d) The coordination processor is checked in the system test department with a test
APS. This APS is located on both magnetic disks.
e) The CP113D installation test can begin once installation is completed. The APS on
the disks is used for system testing.
f)

The CP113D is tested in the following steps:


Off-line test:
Visual check of devices and cabling
Preset all devices (if not already done at the factory)
Start up the PC on-line following manufacturer's instructions (if not already done
at the factory)
Start the fans
Switch on power to all equipment
Off-line diagnostics of CMY, IOC, IOP, (BAP/CAP only if faulty)
On-line test:
Start up hardware
Load application program system (test APS) and start operating system (APS
present on both system disks)
Configure the necessary operating states in the CP area
Check the logic components and devices:
common memory (CMY),
base processor (BAP),
input/output control (IOC)
input/output processor (IOP)
bus to common memory (B:CMY)
magnetic tape device (MTD) and
magnetic disk device (MDD)
using the appropriate test and diagnostic software
Introduce hardware modifications if necessary
Incorporate the current operating APS and repeat the on-line tests

g) Error messages output by the test programs are handled on the basis of the MMN.
h) Implementation of modifications according to instructions (notices are sent by the
modification service). The modification guidelines must be observed. If the installation tester does not carry out the modifications himself, he should at least know

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

which ones are made.Any faults that occur when the modifications have been incorporated must be eliminated with the operating APS and the MMN.
i)

After each hardware modification to a device, the modification service must be


informed of the new device issue.

j)

A fault report must be written on each hardware fault (for repairs and statistics).

k) Always disconnect power before unplugging modules and plugging them in again.
l)

PROC:CP113D 4

If modules with DIP switches are replaced by spares, find the correct new settings
in the MMN:CP113D - TAB.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13.5

Overview of the Hardware belonging to the CP Complex

MAXIMUM Configuration
MINIMUM Configuration

IOP

IOP

IOP

IOP

IOC-1

IOC-3

CAP-5

CAP-0

BAP-0

BAP-1

LMY

LMY

LMY

LMY

LMY

LMY

PU PU
0
1

PU PU
0
1

PU PU
0
1

PU PU
0
1

PU PU
0
1

PU PU
0
1

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

PI

PI

PI
MI
PI

B:IOC

PI

PI

PI
MI

B:CMY-1

IOC-2

MI

PI

PI

MI

CMY-0

CMY-1
MYC

MYB
0

B:IOC

PI

PI

B:CMY-0
PI

IOC-0

MYB
1

MYB
2

MYC
MYB
3

MYB
0

MYB
1

MYB
2

MYB
3

Fig. 3.13.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-Complex

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.13.6

Overview of Interfaces B:CMY

BAP-0

IOC-0

BAP-1

IOC-1

IOC-2

IOC-3

CAP-0

CPCIA
CPCIB

CPCIA
CPCIB

CPCIA
CPCIB

CPCIA
CPCIB

CPCIA
CPCIB

CPCIA
CPCIB

CPCIA
CPCIB

.....

CAP-5
CPCIA
CPCIB

Only for CP113D with R:CP113B.


Connection with PIDAT and PIADR as for other Processors.

Interface modules to B:CMY


Interface modules to the processors

PIDAT
PIADR

PIDAT
PIADR

PIDAT
PIADR

PIDAT
PIADR

PIDAT
PIADR

PIDAT
PIADR

B:CMY-0

B:CMY

PIDAT
PIADR

PIDAT
PIADR

B:CMY-1
Interface modules to the CMY

MIAD

MIAD

MIAD

MIAD

CMYA
CMYD

CMYA
CMYD

CMYA
CMYD

CMYA
CMYD

CMY

CMY-0

CMY-1

Control C
(MYC)

Control D

Control C
(MYC)

Control D

Fig. 3.13.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY

PROC:CP113D 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.13.7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Module Connectors and Numbering

C
D

Backplane labelling

112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
1
2
3

Rear view and numbering of a module connector in CP113D

4
5
6
7
8
129

240
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
248

Fig. 3.13.3 Module Connectors and numbering

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13.8

Commissioning
System

Coding Switch on Module MUH:1088

MUH:1088

ON
Coding switch
1 2 3 4

Fig. 3.13.4 Coding switch on module MUH:1088

Variant
S30810-Q1088-

Capacity stage in
MBYTE

Switch Settings
S1

S2

S3

S4

X200

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

X400

16

ON

ON

OFF

ON

X500

16

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

X600

32

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

X800

64

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Coding switch settings

Tab. 3.13.1 Coding switch settings

PROC:CP113D 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.13.9
3.13.9.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Rack Overview
Rack for CP113A - Variant A
FU

01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19

FU

02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20

Fuse panel, AD:RAL

MUT01

F:CMY 0

CMY 0

MUT03

F:CMY 1

CMY 1

MUT04

Fans

F:MI 0

F:P/IOC 0

F:P/IOC 1

MUT06

BCMY 1

BAP 0

MUT07

IOC 0

BAP 1

Frame

Unit

19

---

AD:RAL,
HW-Tracer

20

---

AD:RAL,
HW-Tracer

02

F:CMY 0

CMY 0

12

F:CMY 1

CMY 1

07

--

Fans
(AIC 1)

04

F:MI 0

BCMY 0

14

F:MI 1

BCMY 1

05

F:P/IOC 0

BAP 0

06

F:P/IOC 0

IOC 0

15

F:P/IOC 1

BAP 1

16

F:P/IOC 1

IOC 1

17

--

Fanbox
(AIC 0)

MUT05

BCMY 0

F:MI 1

FU

IOC 1

Fanbox

MUT09

MUT10

MUT12

Fig. 3.13.5 Rack R:CP113A - Variant A

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13.9.2

Commissioning
System

Rack for CP113B - Variant A


FU

01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19

FU

02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20

MUT01

F:P/IOC 2

CAP 0

IOC 2

MUT03

F:P/IOC 3

CAP 1

IOC 3

MUT04

F:PI 0

F:PI 1

F:P/IOC 4

F:P/IOC 5

Fans

MUT05

BCMY 0

MUT06

BCMY 1

CAP 2

MUT07

CAP 3

CAP 4

CAP 5

Fanbox

MUT09

MUT10

FU

Frame

Unit

01

F:P/IOC 2

CAP 0

02

F:P/IOC 2

IOC 2

11

F:P/IOC 3

CAP 1

12

F:P/IOC 3

IOC 3

07

---

Fans (AIC 17)

03

F:PI 0

BCMY 0

13

F:PI 1

BCMY 1

05

F:P/IOC 4

CAP 2

06

F:P/IOC 4

CAP 3

15

F:P/IOC 5

CAP 4

16

F:P/IOC 5

CAP 5

17

--

Fanbox
(AIC 16)

MUT12

Fig. 3.13.6 Rack R:CP113B - Variant A

PROC:CP113D 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.13.9.3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Rack for DEVD - Variant A


FU

01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19

FU

02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20

Fuse panel, AD:RAL

MUT01

F:IOP 0

IOPG 0

MUT03

F:IOP 1

IOPG 1

MUT04

Fans

MUT05

MTD 0

MUT06

Luftableitblech
F:DEV(E)
or
F:DEV(F)

M
O
D
0

M
D
D
0

M
O
D
1

Fanbox

M
D
D
1

MUT08

FU

Frame

Unit

01

F:IOP 0

IOPG 0

02

F:IOP 0

IOPG 0

05

F:IOP 0

M:LAUB

06

F:IOP 0

M:LAUB

11

F:IOP 1

IOPG 1

12

F:IOP 1

IOPG 1

15

F:IOP 1

M:LAUB

16

F:IOP 1

M:LAUB

14

---

Fans
(AIC 9)

03

---

MTD 0

07

F:DEV(E) or
F:DEV(F)

MDD 0,
MOD 0

17

F:DEV(E) or
F:DEV(F)

MDD 1,
MOD 1

08

--

Fanbox
(AIC 8)

MUT12

Fig. 3.13.7 Rack R:DEVD - Variant A

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13.10
3.13.10.1

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment
Fuse Assignment of R:CP113A (Variant A)
MUT
01

Frame
AD:RAL

FU

Unit

19

External devices,
e.g. tracer

20

External devices

MOLOC

Module

03

F:CMY 0

02

CMY 0

C101,
C327

DCCx,
DCCx

04

F:CMY 1

12

CMY 1

C101,
C327

DCCx,
DCCx

05

FAN

07

Fans

06

F:MI 0

04

BCMY 0

C101,
C327

DCCx,
DCCx

07

F:MI 1

14

BCMY1

C101,
C327

DCCx,
DCCx

09

F:P/IOC 0

05

BAP 0

C101

DCCx

06

IOC 0

C327

DCCx

15

BAP 1

C101

DCCx

16

IOC 1

C327

DCCx

10

12

F:P/IOC 1

FANBOX

17

Tab. 3.13.2 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113A (Variant A)

3.13.10.2

Fuse Assignment of R:CP113B (Variant A)


MUT

Frame

01

AD:RAL

03

F:P/IOC 2

04

F:P/IOC 3

FU

Unit

MOLOC

Module

01

CAP 0

C101

DCCx

02

IOC 2

C327

DCCx

11

CAP 1

C101

DCCx

12

IOC 3

C327

DCCx

05

FAN

07

Fans

06

F:PI 0

03

BCMY 0

C101,
C327

DCCx,
DCCx

07

F:PI 1

13

BCMY 1

C101,
C327

DCCx,
DCCx

09

F:P/IOC 4

05

CAP 2

C101

DCCx

06

CAP 3

C327

DCCx

15

CAP 4

C101

DCCx

16

CAP 5

C327

DCCx

17

Fans

10

12

F:P/IOC 5

FANBOX

Tab. 3.13.3 Fuse Assignment of R:CP113B (Variant A)

PROC:CP113D 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.13.10.3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fuse Assignment of R:DEVD (Variant A)


MUT

Frame

FU

Unit

MOLOC

Module

01

AD:RAL

--

--

03

F:IOP 0

01

IOPG 0

C101,C331

DCCMS

02

IOPG 0

C313

DCCMR

05

M:LAUB

LAUB:B
LAUB:E

06

M:LAUB

LAUB:D
LAUB:S

11

IOPG 1

C101,C331

DCCMS

12

IOPG 1

C313

DCCMR

15

M:LAUB

LAUB:B
LAUB:E

16

M:LAUB

LAUB:D
LAUB:S

04

F:IOP 1

05

FAN

14

Fans

06

MTD

03

MTD 0

08

F:DEF(F)

07

MDD 0

A056

DCCDA

MOD 0

A049

DCCDA

MDD 1

A121

DCCDA

MOD 1

A115

DCCDA

07

MDD 0

A001

DCCDA

17

MDD 1

A115

DCCDA

08

Fan

17

08

F:DEV(E)

12

FANBOX

Remark

F:DEV(E) or
F:DEV(F) can be
used alternatively

Tab. 3.13.4 Fuse Assignment of R:DEVD (Variant A)

3.13.10.4

Fuse Assignment to Fans


Rack
R:CP113A

R:DEVD

R:CP113B
(Extension Rack)

Fuse

Fans in MUT

Remark

FU 07

05

--

FU 17

12

FANBOX

FU19

--

External devices, e.g. tracer

FU 20

--

External devices

FU 14

05

--

FU 08

12

FANBOX

FU 07

05

--

FU 17

12

FANBOX

Tab. 3.13.5 Fuse Assignment to Fans

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.13.11

Commissioning
System

Overview OEM-Devices / IOPs / frames

OEM-Device

IOP-type required

Frame required

MTD:STC 2922

IOP:MTD

MTD:STC 2925

IOP:UNI

MTD:HP 88781

IOP:UNI

MDD M2263SA
(780 MByte)

IOP:MDD

F:DEV(E)

MDD HP C2490A
(2,1 GByte)

IOP:MDD
or
IOP:UNI

F:DEV(E)
or
F:DEV(F)

MDD XP34550S
(4,5 GByte)

IOP:UNI

F:DEV(F)
or
F:DEV(E)

MOD Sony SMO-F531


(1,3 GB)

IOP:UNI

F:DEV(F)

MOD Sony SMO-F541


(2,6 GB)

IOP:UNI

F:DEV(F)

Tab. 3.13.6 Overview: OEM-Devices / IOPs / frames

3.13.12

Sequence for Switching on the Frames

Rack
R:CP113A

Frame

FU

Unit

F:MI 0

06

04

BCMY 0

F:MI 1

07

14

BCMY 1

F:CMY 0

03

02

CMY 0

F:CMY 1

04

12

CMY 1

F:P/IOC 0

09

05

BAP 0

06

IOC 0

15

BAP 1

16

IOC 1

01

IOPG 0

02

IOPG 0

05

M:LAUB

06

M:LAUB

11

IOPG 1

12

IOPG 1

15

M:LAUB

16

M:LAUB

F:P/IOC 1

R:DEVD

MUT

F:IOP 0

F:IOP 1

10

03

04

Remark

Tab. 3.13.7 Sequence for Switching on the Frames

PROC:CP113D 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Rack
R:CP113B

Frame

MUT

FU

Unit

F:PI 0

06

03

BCMY 0

F:PI 1

07

13

BCMY1

F:P/IOC 2

03

01

CAP 0

02

IOC 2

11

CAP 1

12

IOC 3

05

CAP 2

06

CAP 3

15

CAP 4

16

CAP 5

F:P/IOC 3

04

F:P/IOC 4

09

F:P/IOC 5

10

Remark
Extension rack

Tab. 3.13.7 Sequence for Switching on the Frames

3.13.13
3.13.13.1

Displays on Module Faceplates


Displays after successful Hardware Start-up
Unit

Module

Display

LED

Remarks

4321
B:CMY-0

B:CMY-1

BCTI

none

PIDAT

PIDAT

see procedure
*(05A131) / (05A145) in BAP-SPR the inhibit-bit remains set
until startup is concluded

PIDAT

none

(05A163) for IOC-0

PIDAT

none

(05A175) for IOC-1

BCTI

none

PIDAT

PIDAT

*(06A131) / (06A145) in BAP-SPR the inhibit bit remains set


until startup is concluded

PIDAT

none

(06A163) for IOC-0

PIDAT

none

(06A175) for IOC-1


The displays on both CMY2Cs in a CMY must be identical,
otherwise error. Switching power off then at the CMY
concerned may remedy the situation

CMY-0

CMY 2C

any

none

CMY-1

CMY 2C

any

none

BAP-0

CPCL

xxxx

Sequence on the 7-segment displays is shown in the procedure

*A925

After manual start-up with BAP-0

Tab. 3.13.8 Displays after successful Hardware Startup

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Unit

Module

Display

LED

Remarks

4321
BAP-1

CPCL

xxxx

Sequence on the 7-segment displays is shown in the procedure

*A925

After manual start-up with BAP-1

IOC-0

CPCL

A385

A1A5 is also possible

IOC-1

CPCL

A385

A1A5 is also possible

IOP

IOP:TA

******CF

none

*Time display (not time-of-day) for several minutes

IOP:MB
IBREQ
IOP:SCD
V
IF:MDD
IK:DTD

none
*

*H1 or H2 or none

none

Tab. 3.13.8 Displays after successful Hardware Startup

Check the Basic State (Preparation) of R:CP113 and R:DEVD

Check the basic state of R:CP113A, R:DEVD and if present R:CP113B (extension rack).
Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6 V... -57V)
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

h ... 1

Switch off DCCs


Switch off all DCCs
Check: System test log (if included)

PROC:CP113D 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Check Mechanical Layout


Check racks and module frames (R:CP113A, R:DEVD and R:CP113B if
present) to see if any parts are touching, or if there is any foreign material or
transport damage.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place
If any transport damage or damaged seals have been detected, the rack layout
(R:CP113A and R:DEVD or R:CP113B) has to be checked against the equipment list.
Check the layout of the module frames and the standard cabling plan
Break module seal
Check connections between wire wrap field and chassis ground bus.
Check cabling against cable laying list A30808-A....-X...- * -33

Check Memory Settings

Check that the memory settings on all MUH:1088 modules are correct.
Unplug module MUH:1088 from all mounting locations.

The module contains a coding switch for adapting memory addressing to the
possible equipment variants.
Check switch settings of the coding switch on the MUH:1088 modules and
correct if necessary

Coding switch and the correct switch settings are given in

...... (see 3.13.8)

Check the Jumpering in F:MI0


Check the following wire wrap connections:

From MOLOC 277 PIN E 212 to MOLOC 277 PIN C 212

From MOLOC 285 PIN E 212 to MOLOC 285 PIN C 212

Test Fans
Screw in the fuses for the fans consecutively and turn fan switches on

The assignment of fuses to the fans is given in


Are all fans working?

...... 3.13.5)
(see Tab.
Y h ... 9
N h ... 8

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 7

PROC:CP113D 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Switching on the MTD


Branch to one of the following procedures for switching on the MTD according to
the MTD used:
Switching on the MTD: STC 2922 of Storage Tek
(Connected to IOP:MTD)

i....PROC:
MTD_STC2922

Switching on the MTD: STC 2925 of Storage Tek


(Connected to IOP:UNI / SCSI-Interface)

i....PROC:
MTD:STC2925

Switching on the MTD: HP 88781 A of Hewlett Packard


(Connected to IOP:UNI / SCSI Interface)

i....PROC:
MTD:HP
88781A

h ... 10

After the MTD is successfully put into service, continue:

10

Check Cabling of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)

The following different types of MDD can be used for the CP113D:

Quantum Atlas Disk storage Unit XP34550S (4,5GByte)

HP Disk storage Unit HP C2490A (2,1Gbyte)

Fujitsu Disk storage Unit M2263SA (780 Mbyte)

Check that interface cables to the IOP:MDD / IOP:UNI are connected according
to the following instructions:
If Quantum Atlas disk storage unit XP34550S (4,5Gbyte) is used
(Connected to IOP:UNI / SCSI-Interface)

i....NM:CP Devices, MDD


XP34550S
(4,5 Gbyte)

If HP disk storage unit MDD HP C2490A (2,1Gbyte) is used


(Connected to IOP:MDD or IOP:UNI)

i....NM:CP Devices, MDD


HP C2490A
(2,1 Gbyte)

If Fujitsu disk storage unit MDD M2263SA (780 Mbyte) is used


(Connected to IOP:MDD)

i....NM:CP Devices,
MDD M2263SA
(780 Mbyte)

No transport safety catches (bolts etc.) have to be removed in this disk generation.
Have one or both disk memories (MDD) been replaced or supplied after the
original installation?

PROC:CP113D 18

Y h ... 11
N h ... 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Check Switch Settings of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)


Check that switch settings are set according to the following instructions:
If Quantum Atlas disk storage unit XP34550S (4,5Gbyte) is used

If HP disk storage unit MDD HP C2490A (2,1Gbyte) is used

If Fujitsu disk storage unit MDD M2263SA (780 Mbyte) is used

12

i ... NM:CP Devices, MDD


XP34550S
(4,5 Gbyte)
i ... NM:CP Devices, MDD
HP C2490A
(2,1 Gbyte)
i ... NM:CP Devices,
MDD M2263SA
(780 Mbyte)

Check Cabling of MODs (Only in F:DEV(F))

Check the following cable connections of the MODs:

13

Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD

Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD-fan

Correct attachment of the SCSI bus cabling

For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB): check these cable connections according
to the instructions in

...... Devices,
NM:CP -

For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6 GB): check these cable connections according
to the instructions in

...... Devices,
NM:CP -

MOD Sony
SMO-F531

MOD Sony
SMO-F541

Check Settings of the MODs (Only in F:DEV(F))

Check the following settings of the operation mode plug of the MODs:

14

Check the setting to the correct SCSI address (SCSI-ID 2)

Check the correct jumper setting in the operation mode plug for deactivating
the internal terminating resistor (Depending on the SCSI devices connected)

For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB): check these settings according to the
instructions in

...... Devices,
NM:CP -

For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6 GB): check these settings according to the
instructions in

...... Devices,
NM:CP -

Screw in Fuse
Screw in fuse for MDD-0 (and MOD-0 in F:DEV(F))
(One fuse supplies the DCCs of both devices)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

MOD Sony
SMO-F531

MOD Sony
SMO-F541

...... 3.13.4)
(see Tab.

PROC:CP113D 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

15

Commissioning
System

Switch on MDD-0

......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

Switch on DCC for MDD-0


LED of the DCC lights up
LED of the MDD lights up for approx. 30 s

16

Switch on MOD-0 (Only in F:DEV(F))

......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

Switch on DCC for MOD-0


LED of the DCC lights up
MOD fan starts up
MOD-LED lights up shortly

17

Screw in Fuse

......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

Screw in fuse for MDD-1 (and MOD-1 in F:DEV(F))


(One fuse supplies the DCCs of both devices)

18

Switch on MDD-1

......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

Switch on DCC for MDD-1


LED of the DCC lights up
LED of the MDD lights up for approx. 30 s

19

Switch on MOD-1 (Only in F:DEV(F))

......(see
Tab.
3.13.4)

Switch on DCC for MOD-1


LED of the DCC lights up
MOD fan starts up
MOD-LED lights up shortly

20

Installation of PC

Information about the inverter:


The 220V outputs of the inverter (220V, 1KVA and 2,5KVA) are floating. If test
devices are supplied by the inverter, electrostatical charging or grounding loops
may lead to faulty test results or defects.
Remedy: Grounding one line of the 220V output, before switching on the
inverter (If not already done by the manufacturer).
Switch on the inverter for the PC.
Installation of the PC according to
After the PC has been installed and a CP session opened

PROC:CP113D 20

......MMN:PC
BASIS
h ... 21

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

21

ITMN - OFFLINE

Prepare Switching on DCCs


Put all inhibit bit switches in module faceplates (on PIDAT, BCTI) in ON position
(up). Put the TEST switches on the faceplates of the CPCL modules (in BAP0/1
and IOC0/1) up to the ON position.
Make sure that all DCCs of the CP113D are switched off

22

Switch on DCCs

A distinction is drawn between the capacity stages of the CP113Ds. Because of


clock synchronization the module frames are tested in the following sequence :

...... 3.13.7)
(see Tab.

Screw in fuse for the first (next) module frame (see preceding table).
Switch on power with the switch on the assigned DCC module faceplates.

Caution: If there are several DCCs in one MI, CMY or IOP module frame, the
switches of all these DCCs must be switched on.
Are the green LEDs on the DCC modules lit?

23

Decision: Next Modules


Are all units listed in the table in operation?

24

Y h ... 23
N h ... 24
Y h ... 32
N h ... 22

Fault Clearance
Switch off the voltage converter(s) immediately and unscrew the assigned fuse

25

Check the Fuse for DCC


Is the corresponding fuse in the fuse panel defective?

26

Replace Fuse
Replace the fuse in the fuse panel

27

h ... 22

Decision Block: DCC


Has the current converter already been replaced?

28

Y h ... 26
N h ... 27

Y h ... 29
N h ... 28

Replace DCC
Replace the DCC with spare DCC
Mark the replaced DCC as defective

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 22

PROC:CP113D 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

29

Commissioning
System

Decision Block: Cable

Y i....NM:

Is a cable the next unit to be cleared of faults?

CP113D, TAB,
CP0050

N h ... 31
30

Decision Block

Y h ... 22
N h ... 31

Could the fault be cleared?

31

Special Fault Clearance


The fault could not be cleared by standard fault clearance measures. A system
specialist must carry out fault clearance.

h ... 22

After successful fault clearance

32

Diagnosis 0 CMY

The off-line diagnostics must be carried out on both CMYs one after the other.
Set the inhibit bit switches for the CMY to be tested on the BCTI modules of
both B:CMYs to the ON position
Press the DIAG key on the CMY to be tested
Diagnostic 0 is started and indicated by LED DIAG0. On completion, if no errors
have been found, 5AAA is displayed.
Is 5AAA displayed?

33

Y h ... 34
N h ... 33

Fault Clearance
Fault clearance according to

i....NM:CP113D,
TAB, CP053

After successful fault clearance

PROC:CP113D 22

h ... 32

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

34

ITMN - OFFLINE

Diagnosis 2 CMY
Press RESET key on the CMY to be tested
The display shows E-01 (- = dark) and the DIAG0 LED goes out.
Press DIAG key on the CMY to be tested
Diagnostic 2 is started and indicated by the LED DIAG2. On completion, if no
errors have been found, 5AAA is displayed.

Diagnostic 2 can be restarted by pressing the DIAG key again. Diagnostic 3 can
only be started if diagnostic 2 ends with an error. Press the RES key again
(display then shows E-02) to start diagnostic 0 again.
Is 5AAA displayed?

35

Y h ... 35
N h ... 36

Decision: Next CMY


Switch the inhibit-bit switches for the tested CMY in the BCTI modules of both
B:CMYs to OFF
Have off-line diagnostics been performed on both CMYs?

36

Y h ... 37
N h ... 32

Diagnosis 3 CMY
Press RESET key on the CMY to be tested
The display goes dark and the DIAG2 LED goes out.
Press DIAG key on the CMY to be tested
Diagnostic 3 is started and indicated by the LEDs DIAG0 and DIAG2.

Diagnostic 3 can be restarted by pressing the DIAG key again.


Analyze track numbers and carry out fault clearance according to

i ... NM:CP113D,
TAB, CP053

After successful fault clearance

37

h ... 35

Off-line Diagnostics IOC

Perform off-line diagnostics in both IOCs, and for further IOCs in the extension
frame R:CP113B, if present.
The TEST switch (down = OFF) on the CPCL module is used to switch off the
supervisory circuit (comparator).
The TEST switch should only be put in the OFF position during fault clearance
for test purposes.
The BOOT or RES key triggers a RESET in the IOC.
Diagnostics are started by pressing the RES and BOOT keys simultaneously.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 23

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

The display is changed with the DIAG switch.

Switch ON (up): The part of the diagnostic register belonging to the leading
processor half within the IOC is displayed.

Switch OFF (down): The part of the diagnostic register belonging to the
secondary processor half within the IOC is displayed.

The contents of the diagnostic registers are the same if PU-0 and PU-1 in an
IOC come to the same result during an audit.
Press RES key
Press RES and BOOT keys simultaneously
Off-line diagnostics are started. If executed without error, x55x appears in the
display. (x has no significance for the analysis).

Y h ... 39
N h ... 38

Is x55x displayed?

38

Fault Clearance
Analyze the track numbers

i....NM:CP113D,

Carry out fault clearance according to

TAB, CP052

h ... 39

After finishing fault clearance

39

Decision: Next IOC

Y h ... 40
N h ... 37

Have off-line diagnostics already been performed on all IOCs?

40

Off-line Diagnostics IOP

These off-line diagnostics must be run on all IK:DTD and IOP:SCDV modules.
When the off-line diagnostics are started on module IK:DTD, the MDD must be
switched on for the IOP:MDD and the MTD for the IOP:MTD. A tape must also
be mounted in the MTD, and the device must be switched on-line.
The PC must be ready for operation (a printer may not be
necessary)
Start the off-line diagnostics with the DIAG key on the faceplate of modules
IK:DTD and IOP:SCDV.
Track numbers of the RESET test are indicated by way of LEDs.
The LEDs go dark for 1 second on completion of the RESET test.
The IOP type is displayed for 1.5 secs.:

PROC:CP113D 24

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

LED display

IOP type

D3

D2

D1

D0

IOP:MTD

IOP:MDD

IOP:SCDX

The track numbers of the test/diagnostic programs are then displayed.


Following error-free execution, the LEDs on the IOP:MDD, IOP:MTD and the
IOP:SCDX go dark again.
The LEDs of the IOP:SCDV, however, light up.

Performing SCDV diagnostics is only possible if the firmware of module


IOP:SCDV is not issue G5.
Start off-line diagnostics by pressing the DIAG key on the faceplate of module
IOP:SCDV.
Track numbers of the RESET test are indicated by way of LEDs.
The LEDs go dark for 1 second on completion of the RESET test.
The IOP type is displayed for 1.5 secs.:
LED display

IOP type

D3

D2

D1

D0

IOP:SCDV

LED display goes dark for 1 second


The track numbers of the test/diagnostic programs are then displayed.
Following error-free execution, the LEDs on the IOP:SCDV, light up.
The printer and the screen of the PC output the following:
CP113 off-line diagnostics
Please enter the following characters:
ASDFGHJKL
Enter the string 'ASDFGHJKL' on the PC and confirm with <ENTER>
CP113 off-line diagnostics passed
LEDs on the SCDV module go out
Off-line diagnostics terminated without error?

41

Y h ... 42
N h ... 41

Fault Clearance
Analyze the LED display
Carry out fault clearance according to

i ... NM:CP113D,

After finishing fault clearance

h ... 42

TAB, CP054

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 25

ITMN - OFFLINE

42

Commissioning
System

Off-line Diagnostics IOP:TA


Press DISPLAY key in module faceplate of IOP:TA.

The following can be checked by pressing the DISPLAY key in the faceplate of
module IOP:TA:

Press key down = (off-line) the displays are checked.

Key up

= (on-line) the time is displayed.

Press the DIAG key in the faceplate of module IOP:TA.


Diagnostics are started. On completion without error, the display goes dark
again for a short time.
Off-line diagnostics terminated without error?

43

Y h ... 44
N h ... 43

Fault Clearance
Analyze the LED display
Carry out fault clearance according to

i....NM:CP113D,

After finishing fault clearance

h ... 44

TAB, CP054

44

Decision: IOPAUC

The IOPAUC is only used in CP113 of AC (authentication center)


Is there at least one IOPAUC in use

45

Y h ... 45
N h ... 47

Off-line diagnostics of IOPAUC


Press the RESET key on the front panel of the IOPAUC module

The progress of the test is indicated via the LEDs of the IOPAUC
For evaluating the LED displays of the IOPAUC see

i....NM:
CP113D, TAB,
CP0054

Has the diagnostics ended without faults?

46

Y h ... 47
N h ... 46

Fault clearance
Carry out fault clearance according to

i....NM:
CP113D, TAB,
CP0054

After successful fault clearance

47

h ... 47

Prepare BAP Hardware Start-up


Flick all inhibit-bit switches to OFF
Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP-0 and BAP-1, if not already done

PROC:CP113D 26

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

48

ITMN - OFFLINE

Information about BAP Hardware Start-up

When the DCCs have been switched on, the initialization and test programs in
the individual processors are run (hardware start-up). Track numbers are
displayed which give information on the type of error if one occurs.
The BAP to which power is first applied becomes the MASTER, as long as this
BAP is error-free.
For start-up with the APS, it is necessary for the following units to be connected
to a B:CMY (displayed by reset inhibit bits (SPB LED = off)):

one BAP (SPB LED on module PIDAT A131 or A145)

one IOC (SPB LED on module PIDAT A163 or A175)

one CMY (SPB LED on module BCTI)

Ensure that the following IOPs can be reached via the IOC connected to the
B:CMY, and that they have the status shown in the table:

one IOP:MDD

one IOP:SCDV (for connection of the PC)

The BAP that becomes MASTER formats both CMYs first. Display on master:
A885' for approx. 5sec.
It then initializes BCMY0/1, and IOC0/1
Display: 'A8A5',...,'A8C5',...,'AB05'
When 'AB05' is displayed, the test APS is already being loaded from one of the
disks (MDD0 or MDD1). This can be seen by the rhythmic flashing of one of the
LEDs. (module IF:MDD H1-reading from MDD).
Displays on the other module faceplates after initialization, if no errors are found
in the processors during hardware start-up are given in:

49

...... 3.13.8)
(see Tab.

Switch on BAP0 and BAP1


Screw in the fuses for the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1
Switch on DCCs in BAP0 and BAP1
Are the green LEDs on both DCC modules lit?

50

Y h ... 58
N h ... 50

Fault Clearance
Switch off the DCC on which the LED is not lit immediately and unscrew the
relevant fuse. After a successful test start-up, remove the fault from the defective unit with the test APS (provided a BAP can load the APS).
If only one BAP is defective, continue
If both BAPs are defective, the errors must be removed immediately

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 58
h ... 51

PROC:CP113D 27

ITMN - OFFLINE

51

Commissioning
System

Check the Fuse for DCC

Y h ... 52
N h ... 53

Is the corresponding fuse in the fuse panel defective?

52

Replace Fuse

h ... 49

Replace the fuse in the fuse panel

53

Decision Block: DCC

Y h ... 55
N h ... 54

Has the current converter already been replaced?

54

Replace DCC
Replace the DCC with spare DCC

h ... 49

Mark the replaced DCC as defective

55

Decision Block: Cable

Y i....NM:

Is a cable the next unit to be cleared of faults?

CP113D, TAB,
CP0050

N h ... 57
56

Decision Block

Y h ... 49
N h ... 57

Could the fault be cleared?

57

Special Fault Clearance


The fault could not be cleared by standard fault clearance measures. A system
specialist must carry out fault clearance.

h ... 49

After successful fault clearance

58

Decision: Start-up with Test APS Possible

Y h ... 87
N h ... 59

Has the system been configured to allow start-up with the test APS?

59

Decision: BAP-0/-1 already Reset


Has the firmware been reinitiated in processor BAP-0/1 by means of the BOOT
key on the faceplate of module CPCL?

60

Y h ... 60
N h ... 61

Analyze Inhibit-bit LEDs


Analyze the inhibit-bit LEDs and eliminate errors using

i....MMN:CP113D
- FC

When errors have been successfully eliminated

PROC:CP113D 28

h ... 47

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

61

Decision: SPB0 and SPB1 Lit


Are the red SPB, SPB0 and SPB1 LEDs lit on the faceplates of modules BCTI
and PIDAT (F:MI 0, F:MI 1)?

62

ITMN - OFFLINE

Y h ... 63
N h ... 62

Check DCCs
Check that all DCCs have power ON

63

Decision: Inhibit-bit Switches


Is the corresponding inhibit-bit switch SPB still ON?

64

Inhibit-bit Switch
Flick corresponding inhibit-bit switch (SPB, SPB0 or SPB1) to OFF

65

Y h ... 64
N h ... 65
h ... 47

Decision: Other BAP MASTER

The inhibit-bit has been set by the firmware

66

If no start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has been attempted the startup has to be repeated with switching on the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1 in a
different order

h ... 47

If a start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has already run through a
manual start-up must be attempted

h ... 66

Manual Start-up Part 1

BAP-0 becomes master if the inhibit-bit switch in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on


module PIDAT (mounting location 145) is put ON (up).
BAP-1 becomes master if the inhibit-bit switch in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on
module PIDAT (mounting location 131) is put ON (up).
BAP-0 becomes master with the procedure described below. If you want BAP-1
to be master, set the inhibit-bit switch accordingly and press the BOOT key on
module CPCL in BAP-1.
Flick the inhibit-bit switch to ON (up) in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on module PIDAT
(mounting location 145).
Related LEDs on the modules light up
Press BOOT key on faceplate of module CPCL in BAP-0.

When the DCCs have been switched on, the initialization and test programs
(hardware start-up) run in the individual processors. Track numbers are
displayed which give information on the type of fault if a fault occurs. The BAP-0
becomes MASTER.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 29

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

For start-up with the APS, it is necessary for the following units to be connected
to a B:CMY (displayed by reset inhibit bits (SPB LED = off)):

one BAP (SPB LED on module PIDAT A131 or A145)

one IOC (SPB LED on module PIDAT A163 or A175)

one CMY (SPB LED on module BCTI)

Ensure that the following IOPs can be reached via the IOC connected to the
B:CMY, and that they have the status shown in the table:

one IOP:MDD

one IOP:SCDV (for connection of the PC)

Displays on the module faceplates when the BOOT key has been pressed, if no
errors have been found in the processors during hardware start-up:
Has the system been configured so that start-up with the test APS is possible?

67

68

......(see
Tab.
3.13.8)
Y h ... 68
N h ... 67

Decision: Manual Start-up with second BAP


Repeat manual start-up with second BAP, if not already done

h ... 66

If the manual start-up has already been attempted with the second BAP, offline diagnostics must be executed

h ... 82

Manual Start-up Part 2


IPL113: MANUAL START - CURRENT CONFIGURATION
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
IPL113: ENTER PARAMS
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE

: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX

Is the preceding message output?

PROC:CP113D 30

Y h ... 73
N h ... 69

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

69

Decision: Check IOP:SCDV/Cabling to PC


Have the switch settings on module IOP:SDCV and the cable connection to the
PC already been checked?

70

71

ITMN - OFFLINE

Y h ... 70
N h ... 71

Decision: Manual Start-up with second BAP


Repeat manual start-up with second BAP, if not already done

h ... 66

If the manual start-up has already been attempted with the second BAP, offline diagnostics must be executed

h ... 82

Check Cabling to PC
Check and if necessary replace connecting cable to the PC or change plug position

72

Check Switches on IOP:SCDV

Check and if necessary adjust the switches on module IOP:SCDV. The


mounting location for this IOP can be found in the exchange configuration documents. The location and setting of the switches can be found in:

...... -MMN:CP113D
TAB

Switch off power at the switch on the DCC faceplate in the IOP module frame.
To connect the PC to the IOP:SCDV, check and if necessary adjust the settings.
Switch on power again

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 47

PROC:CP113D 31

ITMN - OFFLINE

73

Commissioning
System

Manual Start-up Part 3


Enter ; and press <ENTER>
IPL113: MANUAL START ENTER PARAMS
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO

START APS MANUALLY


:
START INSTALLAT.RECOV :
START UTILITY(MONITOR) :
STOP INITIAL START
:
START APS AUTOMATICALLY:

MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX

Enter MAN; and press <ENTER>


IOC-0 MDD : BZS/AKD AND GENERATION LIST
IOC-1 MDD : BZS/AKD AND GENERATION LIST

The current generation list is output:


xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
99999999

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

MANUAL RECOVERY - LOADING VIA IOC : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

Enter IOC-0; or IOC-1; and press <ENTER>


LOAD.DEV. - *MDD* -GENERATION TO LOAD :NAME; (8 CHAR)

Enter the current APS generation 8 characters (in APS documentation or at the
place marked 9999999 in the generation list printed out previously).
Enter 'Generation-No.' and press <ENTER>

If the APS version is unknown and cannot be found out, enter *. For safety
reasons this must be repeated 3 times after system enquiry.
MANUAL RECOVERY - LTG LOADING : Y;/N;

Enter "N;" and press <ENTER>


Flick inhibit-bit switch in BCMY-0 and BCMY-1 on module PIDAT (mounting
location 145) to OFF (down).
Related LEDs on the modules go out

Manual start-up is initiated.


The track numbers to be run through on the module CPCL in the BAP master
are shown in block:

......(see 87)

To make things clearer, only the headline is given for the system messages.
Wait for the following system message:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED

Was the manual start-up with the test APS successful?

PROC:CP113D 32

Y h ... 89
N h ... 74

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

74

Decision: Manual Start-up with other BAP


Has the manual start-up been attempted with another BAP?

75

Y h ... 76
N h ... 75

Boot Key
Press BOOT key of other BAP and repeat manual start-up

76

ITMN - OFFLINE

h ... 66

Decision: Manual Start-up via IOC-1


Branch to one of the following blocks
Repeat manual start-up via IOC-1, if not already done
If manual start-up via IOC-1 has already been attempted

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 66
h ... 77

PROC:CP113D 33

ITMN - OFFLINE

77

Commissioning
System

START/UTILITY

When working with the IMON, ensure that the PC can be reached via the IOC
specified in the Start Utility.
Press BOOT key in BAP-0
IPL113: MANUAL START - CURRENT CONFIGURATION
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
IPL113: ENTER PARAMS
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE

: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX

h ... 69

If the preceding message did not appear


Enter ; and press <ENTER>
IPL113: MANUAL START ENTER PARAMS
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO

START APS MANUALLY


:
START INSTALLAT.RECOV :
START UTILITY(MONITOR) :
STOP INITIAL START
:
START APS AUTOMATICALLY:

MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX

Enter UTI; and press <ENTER>


UTILITY - RECOVERY - DEVICE - TYPE TO USE : MDD;/MTD;

Enter MDD; and press <ENTER>


UTILITY - RECOV. - LOAD FROM MDD VIA : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

Enter IOC-0; or IOC-1; and press <ENTER>


PLEASE ENTER UTILITY - FILE - NAME

Acknowledge this message with SY.INSTALL


IMON : V0031 START
IMON : ENTER COMMAND

Y h ... 79
N h ... 78

Was it possible to start IMON?

78

Fault Clearance
Check connection of MDD to IOP:MDD against the cable laying list.
Check switch settings and cable connections in the MDD against the manufacturer's documentation.
After successful fault clearance

PROC:CP113D 34

h ... 47

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

79

ITMN - OFFLINE

Display Disk Contents


Display disk contents with the following commands:
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=010E01; (for MDD-0)
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=030E01; (for MDD-1)

All disk files of MDD-0 (MDD-1) are displayed


Branch to one of the following blocks according to the files displayed

80

If all system files are present continue

h ... 80

If not all system files are present the files must be copied again from tape to
disk. System test with test APS must be omitted

h ... 93

Decision: BAP Off-line Diagnostics


Have BAP off-line diagnostics been carried out?

81

Branch according to Off-line Diagnostics


If all off-line diagnostics have been terminated without error, one or more
system files have probably been destroyed. In this case the test with the test
APS must be omitted
Otherwise

82

Y h ... 81
N h ... 82

h ... 93
h ... 21

Prepare BAP Off-line Diagnostics (Special Fault Clearance)

Off-line diagnostics must be performed on both BAPs.


Flick the TEST switch on module CPCL to OFF to switch off the supervisory
circuit. It should only be switched OFF for test purposes. Diagnostics cannot be
initiated by MML or key when the supervisory circuit is switched off.
Initiate hardware start-up with the BOOT key on the CPCL module. The BAP in
which the BOOT key was pressed becomes the master.
Reset the processor with the RES key.
Start diagnostics by pressing the RES and BOOT keys simultaneously.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 35

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Change the display with the DIAD switch.

When the switch is ON (up), the part of the diagnostic register that belongs
to the leading processor half (PU) in the BAP is displayed.

When the switch is OFF (down) the part of the diagnostic register that
belongs to the secondary processor half (PU) in the BAP is displayed.

The contents of the diagnostic registers are the same if the PU-0 and PU-1 in a
BAP come to the same result in the audit.
Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP0/1

For the off-line diagnostics in the BAPs, disconnect the start-up lines and put the
corresponding PINs in the multilayer to 0 V.
Disconnect the start-up lines shown in the following table:
Rack

Frame

MUT

MOLOC

R:CP113A

P/IOC0

09

D179P3
D179P4

P/IOC1

10

D179P3
D179P4

Insert the following links:


Rack

R:CP113A

MUT

09

from

to

MOLOC

PIN

MOLOC

PIN

179

A248

179

C248

10
Switch on DCCs connected to BAP0/1
An initialization program runs in both BAPs
Is 'A435' displayed in at least one BAP?

83

Y h ... 84
N h ... 83

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance according to

i....NM:CP113D,

After finishing special fault clearance

h ... 47

TAB, CP052

PROC:CP113D 36

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

84

ITMN - OFFLINE

Start BAP Off-line Diagnostics


Start diagnostics in the BAP with the correct display ('A435') by pressing the
RES and BOOT keys simultaneously.
Off-line diagnostics are started. On termination without error, xAAx is displayed.
(x has no significance for the analysis).
Is xAAx displayed?

85

Y h ... 86
N h ... 85

Fault Clearance
Analyze the track numbers and clear faults using

i ... NM:CP113D,
TAB, CP052

After successful fault clearance

86

h ... 47

Check Internal Cabling

The BAP(s) is/are OK. The fault is in the cabling between BAP-0/1 and BCMY0/1, or in the cabling between BCMY-0/1 and CMY-0/1 or in the CMY-0/1.
Check the internal cabling of the R:CP113A against the cable laying list
If any faults have been found in the internal cabling, remove faults and
continue

h ... 47

If no faults have been found in the internal cabling, evaluate and clear faults
according to

i ... NM:CP113D,

After successful fault clearance

h ... 47

TAB, CP052

87

Software Start-up with test APS

Software start-up is initiated as soon as the display of the CPCL module of the
BAP master changes from 'Axx5' to 'Bxx4'. (xx - different track points of start-up)
The following track points run trough:

Bx34
Bx54
Bx74
Bx94

or: Dxx2 or Exx1 (changes every 4 s)


(xx-arbitrary, with:
'Dxx2' the call processing load is shown in Erl.
'Exx1' the entire processor load in percent)
Have the track points shown above been run trough?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 88
N h ... 66

PROC:CP113D 37

ITMN - OFFLINE

88

Commissioning
System

System Messages

To make things clearer, only a headline is given for system messages.


If startup with test APS was successful the following message is output:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED

Wait for system message


Branch to the following blocks according to the system reaction:

h ... 89
h ... 66
h ... 71

ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED is displayed


Any other message is displayed
No message is displayed

89

Enter USER-ID and Password

USER-ID and password will be interrogated.


For the first OMT EWSD0 and for further OMTs EWSD1, EWSD2,
EWSD3 has to be entered as USER-ID.
The password is SYSTEM-1.
(All inputs in capital letters)
Enter USER-ID and password

90

Enter Date and Time

Enter date and time:

ENTR TIME:DATE=yy-mm-dd,TIME=hh-mm-ss,WD=xx;

Secure time:

CORR TIME:MODE=SECURE;

91

Check Fan Alarms


Switch off the individual fans in each fan module by the switches on the
modules. After about 5 secs. this is logged on the printer.

Caution:
Do not leave the fans switched off for longer than 5 mins. as racks warm up rapidly, endangering components.
System message fan alarm
Switch on fans again (do not wait for longer than 5 mins.)

Y h ... 93
N h ... 92

Was it possible to generate this message from each fan module?

92

Check Alarm Lines


Check alarm lines from the fan modules to the IOP:TA against cabling list and if
necessary perform special fault clearance IOP:TA according to the MMN.
After finishing fault clearance

PROC:CP113D 38

h ... 91
A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

93

ITMN - OFFLINE

Install Hardware APS

The term Hardware APS indicates that the APS contains only the data of the
hardware which is present in the exchange and no routing-, zoning-, or
subscriber-data.
The following is necessary before installing the hardware APS:

error-free configuration of CP113D with the test APS

APS documentation

Observe the notes in the APS documentation supplied.


Note:
The APS installation is to be carried out according to procedure SW140 (if delivered on Tape) or according to procedure SW141 (If delivered on MOD).
Install the APS, using one of the following procedures (According to the medium
on which the APS is delivered).
For APS delivered on tape

h ... NM:SW,
PROC:SW140

For APS delivered on MOD

h ... NM:SW,
PROC:SW141

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113D 39

ITMN - OFFLINE

PROC:CP113D 40

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.14

Switching on MTD STC 2922 of Storage Tek


MTD_STC2922

3.14.1

Introduction

The scope of delivery of the magnetic tape device STC 2922 of Storage Tek contains
a user manual.

MTD-fault clearance should only be carried out by especially trained personnel.

Basic test Magnetic Tape Device STC 2922


Check that interface cables to the IOP:MTD are connected according to

...... Devices,
NM:CP MTD:STC 2922

Open the door of MTD


Turn POWER switch to OFF
Unscrew the cover of MTD module frame (using special tool Torx 15) and
remove foam rubber in front of the modules.
Unplug the IFP module of the MTD

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MTD_STC2922 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Observe the EGB regulations

......NM:CP
Devices,

The switch settings must be checked or set according to

MTD:STC 2922
Reconnect the IFP module
Replace the foam rubber in front of the modules and screw on the cover of the
MTD module frame
Open the cover of the tape path
Before testing the MTD, cleaning must be carried out according to the instructions given in

......MMN:CP113,
MAINT:MTD
STC 2922

The cleaning should be recorded in a copy of the maintenance list which accompanies the MMN. The list should be attached to the door of the rack.

If the cover does not close tightly due to a physical defect, the magnetic tape will
not be automatically threaded. In this case spare catches must be obtained and
exchanged.

......MMN:CP113,
MAINT:MTD
STC 2922

Close the cover of the tape path


Switch on the main supply switch at the rear of the MTD, if not already done

The location of the main supply switch is given in:

......NM:CP
Devices,
MTD:STC 2922

PROC:MTD_STC2922 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Switch on Magnetic Tape Device

A short self-test is carried out after switching on the power. Operating or hardware faults are shown on the MTD display. An explanation of the fault numbers
is to be found on the inside of the MTD door, or in Section "INTF FCD" (Fault
Code Dictionary 2921&2922 with Industry standard Interface) of the manual that
is supplied.
The tape leader must be cleanly cut, i.e. not have a plastic threading end (cut off
with a special tool) as this prevents the tape from being guided when it is
threaded in. If automatic tape threading is not possible, e.g. at altitudes over
1.800m, it must be threaded by hand. Manual threading is started by pressing
the LOAD-REW key twice. The magnetic spool must be turned so that the tape
is inserted into the suction opening. If SHUT DOOR is displayed on the MTD,
ensure that the MTD door is properly closed.
Screw in fuse 3 for MTD (in R:DEVD)
Close MTD door
Put POWER switch to ON position
If the self-test completes without finding a fault, - - - - is displayed.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MTD_STC2922 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Diagnose Magnetic Tape Device

The following inputs relate to the MTD keyboard


Press the <ENTER ADDR> key, enter '1 F F A' and then press <ENTER>
(Request the firmware version)
D1 is shown in the MTD display
Press <ENTER>
'16' or '17' appears on the MTD display

MTDs with FW < D1 16 may not be used.


Open the MTD door
Insert a fault-free empty tape with a write enable ring, but do not load (Scratch
Tape)
Press <ENTER DIAG> enter '1 0' and then press <ENTER>

The last input starts the complete MTD device diagnostics. The magnetic tape is
automatically loaded after internal checks are carried out. Read/write tests with
both recording densities are then made. After a positive run the diagnostics end
with - - - - on the display. If there is a fault, a fault number is displayed. Details
about the cause of the fault together with fault numbers are listed in the STC
Manual, Section "INTF FCD" (Fault Code Dictionary 2921&2922 with Industry
standard Interface) . Fault clearance is explained in the section for Maintenance, Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics in the STC Manual.

Y h ... 5
N h ... 4

Is - - - - displayed after the diagnostics?

Fault clearance
Carry out fault clearance as described in STC Manual, sections Maintenance,
Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics

h ... 5

After successful fault clearance

Check Tape
Open MTD door

The following test overwrites any files that may exist!


Press the door contact (below left) with a pen or any other suitable tool and hold
it down
Press <ENTER DIAG>, enter 'D' and then press <ENTER>

The tape is written to with higher recording density 6250 BPI and read in the
READ AFTER WRITE MODE. MTD Display: @D
'@D' appears in the MTD display

PROC:MTD_STC2922 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

The following 2 system responses are possible:

If the magnetic tape is fault-free, it is wound back when the end-of-tape mark
(EOT) is recognized.

If the magnetic tape is faulty it is stopped after 5 faults. MTD display: ODC
(In this case the tape cannot be used)

Is the tape fault-free?

Y h ... 6
N h ... 7

Unload fault-free tape


Unload tape and remove it
Remove pen (or tool) from the door contact.
Close the MTD door
Return to calling procedure

Unload faulty tape


Rewind tape
Unload tape and remove it
Tape must not be used anymore
Remove pen (or tool) from the door contact.
Close the MTD door
Return to calling procedure

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MTD_STC2922 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

PROC:MTD_STC2922 6

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15

Off-line Installation of CP113C/CR


CP113C/CR

3.15.1

Documents
The following Documents are required as references

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

AKUHW Lists (Equipment Lists)


Maintenance Manual MMN:CP113C/CR
Maintenance Manual MMN:PC - BASIS, Ordering no.: A30808-X3069-Y260- * 7620
MMN:SW
NM:CP113C/CR
NM:CP-Devices
Manuals required:
MTD
MDD
PC

PROC:CP113C/CR 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.2

Commissioning
System

Abbreviations
Abb.

3.15.3

B:CMY

bus to common memory

B:IOC

bus system for input/output control

BAP

base processor

CAP

call processor

CI

common interface

CMY

common memory

F:

frame

IOC

input/output control

IOP

input/output processor

LMY

local memory

MDD

magnetic disk device

MI

memory interface

MOLOC

mounting location

MTD

magnetic tape device

MUT

mounting unit

MYB

memory bank

MYC

memory control

PI

processor interface

PU

processor unit

R:

rack

Test Equipment and Resources

3.15.4

Meaning

APS (contained on both disks)


Multimeter (DMM)
Scratch tapes with write ring

General Information about Testing CP113C/CR


The coordination processor CP113C/CR undergoes a system test before leaving the
manufacturing plant. The individual racks are tested to check that the voltage
converters, the logic components and the internal cabling function correctly.
a) The cables of the CP rack row are supplied as a supplementary package to the coordination processor and are given a system test in the rack (except when cables are
supplied later).

PROC:CP113C/CR 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

b) Once accepted by the test department, all modules are protected from unauthorized
access (by means of a loop secured round each individual module frame).
c) The magnetic tape device, the disk drives and the personal computers are systemtested and separately packed for delivery. The disk storage units had the test-APS
copied onto them in the test department.
d) The coordination processor is checked in the system test department with a test
APS. This APS is located on both magnetic disks.
e) The CP113C/CR installation test can begin once installation is completed. The APS
on the disks is used for system testing.
f)

The CP113C/CR is tested in the following steps:


Off-line test:
Visual check of devices and cabling
Preset all devices (if not already done at the factory)
Start up the PC on-line following manufacturer's instructions (if not already done
by the manufacturer)
Start the fans
Switch on power to all equipment
Off-line diagnostics of CMY, IOC, IOP, (BAP/CAP only if faulty)
On-line test:
Start up hardware
Load application program system (test APS) and start operating system (APS
present on both system disks)
Configure the necessary operating states in the CP area
Check the logic components and devices:
common memory (CMY),
base processor (BAP),
input/output control (IOC)
input/output processor (IOP)
bus to common memory (B:CMY)
magnetic tape device (MTD) and
magnetic disk device (MDD)
using the appropriate test and diagnostic software
Introduce hardware modifications if necessary
Incorporate the current operating APS and repeat the on-line tests

g) Error messages output by the test programs are handled on the basis of the MMN.
h) Implementation of modifications according to instructions (notices are sent by the
modification service). The modification guidelines must be observed. If the installation tester does not carry out the modifications himself, he should at least know

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

which ones are made. Any faults that occur when the modifications have been incorporated must be eliminated with the operating APS and the MMN.
i)

After each hardware modification to a device, the modification service must be


informed of the new device issue.

j)

A fault report must be written on each hardware fault (for repairs and statistics).

k) Always disconnect power before unplugging modules and plugging them in again.
l)

PROC:CP113C/CR 4

If modules with DIP switches are replaced by spares, find the correct new settings
in the MMN:CP113C/CR - TAB.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.5

Overview of the Hardware Belonging to the CP Complex

Maximum Configuration

Minimum Configuration
IOP

IOP

IOP

IOP
IOC-3

IOC-1
IOC-2

IOC-0
CAP-0

CAP-5

BAP-0

BAP-1

B:IOC

B:IOC

LMY

LMY

LMY

LMY

LMY

LMY

PU PU
0 1

PU PU
0 1

PU PU
0 1

PU PU
0 1

PU PU
0 1

PU PU
0 1

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

PI

PI

PI

MI
PI

PI

PI

MI
PI

PI
MI

PI

MI

CMY-0
BCMY-0

PI

PI

PI

CMY-1
MYC

MYC

MYB MYB MYB MYB


0
3
1
2

MYB MYB MYB MYB


0
3
1
2

BCMY-1

Fig. 3.15.1 Overview: Hardware belonging to the CP-Complex

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.6

Processors

Commissioning
System

Overview of Interfaces B:CMY

Interface to the
processors

B:CMY

M:PIA 0
BAP-0
IOC-0

Interface to the
CMY

Stg 0

BAP-1
IOC-1

M:MTI
Stg 1

CMY0
Stg 0

CMY1
HW tracer

Stg 1
M:PIA 1
CAP-0
CAP-1

Stg 0

IOC-2
IOC-3

Stg 1

M:PIA 2
CAP-2
CAP-3

Stg 0

CAP-4
CAP-5

M:BCM
Stg 1
Stg 0
M:PIA 3

Stg 1

MP:
CP113C

Stg 0
Reserve

Control bus (doubled)


Stg 1
Address/ Data bus (ECC secured)

Capacity dependent part


of the BCMY

Fig. 3.15.2 Overview of Interfaces B:CMY

PROC:CP113C/CR 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.7

Overview IOPs (DE5/2)

GPS-Receiver

GPS-Receiver
IOP:TA

IOP:TA

Fan Alarms

Fan Alarms
CCG(A)-0

-1

IOP:MB 40

IOP:MB 41

SYPC
IOP:MB42

IOP:MB43

MB-0-0

1-0

IOP:MB 32

IOP:MB 33

MB-0-1

1-1

IOP:MB 34

IOP:MB 35

CCNP-0
MTD

MOD

IOP:MB 0

MDD

IOP:UNI-0

X.21

-1

IOP:MB 1

IOP:UNI-1

MDD

MOD

MTD

X.21
OMT-1

OMT-0

IOP:SCDP-0

IOP:SCDP-1

DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
IOC-0

B:IOC
LMY

IOC-1

PU-0
PU-1

Fig. 3.15.3 Overview IOPs (DE5/2)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.15.8
3.15.8.1

Overview IOPs (DE5/4)


IOPs (DE5/4) Part 1

GPS-Receiver

GPS-Receiver
IOP:TA

IOP:TA

Fan Alarms

Fan Alarms
CCG(A)-0

-1

IOP:MB 40

IOP:MB 41

SYPC
IOP:MB42

IOP:MB43

MB-0-0

1-0

IOP:MB 32

IOP:MB 33

MB-0-1
IOP:MB 34

1-1
IOP:MB 35

MDD
MTD

MOD

MDD

X.21

IOP:UNI-0

IOP:UNI-1

MOD

MTD

X.21
OMT-1

OMT-0

IOP:SCDP-0

IOP:SCDP-1

DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
DC/AC-Conv. DCIRC
IOC-0

B:IOC
LMY

IOC-1

PU-0
PU-1

Fig. 3.15.4 Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 1

PROC:CP113C/CR 8

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.8.2

IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2

MB-0-2

1-2

IOP:MB 36

IOP:MB 37

MB-0-3

1-3

IOP:MB 38

IOP:MB 39

CCNP-0
IOP:MB 0

Optional

-1

IOP:MB 1

Optional

B:IOC

IOC-2

LMY

IOC-3

PU-0
PU-1

Fig. 3.15.5 Overview IOPs (DE5/4) Part 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 9

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.9
3.15.9.1

Commissioning
System

Inverter
Cabling of the 230V Inverter DCIRC
Terminal strip

Load compensation
L1

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

L2

11 ...

Feedtrough elements

230V/AC from WR-1


Connectors 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 are
internally grounded

230V/AC
To OEM-Devices

230V/AC

230V/AC to F:Modem

15
14
13

Terminal strip

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4

Grounding!
To fuse panel
(20A fuse)

When installing the DCIRC into the


rack, this connector is to be used for
grounding the DCIRC

-UE2

+UE1

3
2
1

DCIRC
500 VA

3
2
1

inside

UA2
UA1

inside

+UE1

-UE2

E
N
L

WR-0

DCIRC
500 VA
inside

inside

UA2
UA1

WR-1

Fig. 3.15.6 Cabling of the 230V inverter DCIRC

PROC:CP113C/CR 10

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.9.2

230V AC-Connectors on Inverter DCIRC

Load comp.

- UE

Load comp.

Feedtrough elements
OMT-0

20 A

20 A

Modem

OMT-1

Modem

DCIRC 500 VA

DCIRC 500 VA

Fig. 3.15.7 230V AC-Connectors on Inverter DCIRC

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 11

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.10

Commissioning
System

Fan Alarm Cabling on CP113C/CR

RACK
SU 1

SU 2

AD:RAL

Cable:
AD:RAL - IOPTA

Alarm-Inputs

Switches for activating the


Alarm inputs

Wires

Plug position:
To fuse panel
(03 C329P4)

IOPTA-0

(07 C329P4)

IOPTA-1

04

FAN (AIC-2)

08

FAN (AIC-1)

Alarm-Switch

-UE

FANBOX (AIC-0)

+UE (GND)
Grounding bar

Fig. 3.15.8 Fan Alarm Cabling in CP113C/CR

PROC:CP113C/CR 12

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.11
3.15.11.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

SCSI Bus Cabling CP113C/CR


SCSI Bus with 1 MTD
Rear view of the rack

IOP:UNI0

MTD0

MTD1 MTD0

IOP:UNI1

Terminating
resistor
(active)
MDD1 MOD1

MDD0

R:CP113C/CR

R:DEV(B)
MTD-0 can be
plugged as
MTD-1 onto
the other bus

MDD0
IOP:UNI0

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)

MDD1

MTD0

Terminating
resistor (active)

MOD1

IOP:UNI1

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)

Fig. 3.15.9 SCSI bus cabling for MDD, MOD and MTD
(CP113C/CR)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 13

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.11.2

Commissioning
System

SCSI-Bus with 2 MTDs


Rear view of the rack

MTD1
IOP:UNI0

MTD0

Terminating
resistor
(active)

IOP:UNI1

Terminating
resistor
(active)
MDD1

MDD0

R:CP113C/CR
MDD0
IOP:UNI0

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)

R:DEV(B)
MTD0

MOD0 (Option)

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)

Terminating
resistor (active)
MTD1

MDD1
IOP:UNI1

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z56...)

Terminating resistor
(active)

Fig. 3.15.10 SCSI bus cabling of 2 MTDs (CP113C/CR)

PROC:CP113C/CR 14

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.11.3

ITMN - OFFLINE

SCSI Bus with MDD and MOD


Rear view of the rack

IOP:UNI0

IOP:UNI1

MOD0

MDD1 MOD1 MDD0

R:CP113C/CR

IOP:UNI0

MDD0

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)

IOP:UNI1

SCSI-Bus
(Cable Z55...)

R:DEV(B)
MOD0

Terminal
resistor
(active)

MDD1

MOD1

Terminal
resistor
(active)

Fig. 3.15.11 SCSI bus cabling with MDD and MOD


(CP113C/CR)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 15

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

3.15.12

001

F:DEVF Overview

029

015

049 056

081

067

115 122

095

FAN

FAN

MDD0

MDD1

MOD0

MOD1

DCCDA

DCCDA
support plate

Fig. 3.15.12 F:DEVF front view


from
IOP:UNI0

from
IOP:UNI1

DCCDA

DCCDA

MDD1

MOD1

MDD0

MOD0

ribbon cable

ribbon cable

to MTD-1

to MTD-0

Fig. 3.15.13 F:DEV(F) rear view with cabling to:


MDD, MOD and MTD (CP113C/CR)

PROC:CP113C/CR 16

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.13

ITMN - OFFLINE

Maintenance Panel MP:CP113C


An outline functional description and short introduction to the MP follows below.
Complete operating instructions for the MP are contained in NM:CP113C/CR.

3.15.13.1

Performance Features
The maintenance panel unit is remote from the PC and can be connected via a cable
simultaneously with a maximum of three different units of the CP.
These units are:

Processor (BAP, CAP, IOC)

Common memory (CMY0, CMY1)

Bus to the Common memory (BCMY0, BCMY1)

Input/output processor of the peripheral devices (IOP:UNI)

The MP is connected to these units, via the module front-facing connector, which are
situated on the following modules for the above-named units:
Unit

Module with front connector for


MP

Processor

M:PEX

CMY

M:CMYC

BCMY

M:BCM

IOP:UNI

M:IOP:UNI

Tab. 3.15.1 Modules with front connector for MP:CP113C


The maintenance panel is for the display or input of data and commands relating to the
CP units to which it is connected. The MP power supply is realized via the current
converter module DCCMC.
Several of these DCCMCs are located in each CP module frame.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 17

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.13.2

Commissioning
System

Overview of MP:CP113C

RESET-key
LCD-display,
consists of 4 LCD rows
SELECT UNIT

Potentiometer for
LCD-brightness
Menu keys

Cable to:

Power
connection

Unit 1

Unit 2

Unit 3

Fig. 3.15.14 Overview of MP:CP113C

3.15.13.3

Operation of the MP
There are 5 keys and one LCD display for operating the MP. The "SELECT UNIT" key
is on the left of the LCD display. The other four are directly beneath the LCD display.
They have various uses which can be read off in the last line of the LCD display. The
LCD display has 4 lines with 20 characters each and basically provides three different
types of display:
normal display, extended display and fault display. This short description only refers to
the normal display:
Command field (six characters)
Data field (eight characters)
Unit identification (four characters)

Unit 1: Data 1 Comm.1


Unit 2:
Comm.2
Unit 3:
Comm.3
disp | req | cmd | send

Fig. 3.15.15 Normal display of MP:CP113C

PROC:CP113C/CR 18

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.13.4

ITMN - OFFLINE

Key Functions of MP
Key

Key function

SELECT UNIT
MENU KEYS

Meaning
Selects the unit for which a command is to be entered
The selected unit is shown inverted in the display

Their function is
shown in the last
line of the display
disp

switches between normal and extended display

esc

ends the current input or output and reactivates the latest valid
menu key assignment

cmd

selects the next command from the currently valid command list
(dependent on the selected unit) and shows the selected unit in
the command field

beg

jumps to the first command of the current command list

send

carries out the displayed command

Tab. 3.15.2 Key functions of MP


A list of all menu key functions as well as all possible commands is in the MP Operating
Instructions in NM:CP113C/CR.

3.15.13.5

New Start of the MP


A new start is made by pressing the "RESET" key or by unplugging the MP transformer
and plugging it in again.
Notes for use:

The MP:CP113C can be unplugged or plugged in again without interrupting the


computer.

After pulling MP:CP113C the processes which were started by the MP in all
connected CP units are reset.

The CP unit to be controlled must be in MBL status.

The serial interface of the MP:CP113C functions with TTL level and is therefore
compatible to a standard V.28 interface.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 19

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.14
3.15.14.1

Commissioning
System

Rack Equipment
Rack (R) for CP113 COMPACT
FU
FU

01

03
02

05
04

07
06

09
08

11
10

13
12

15
14

17
16

Fuse panel, AD:RAL

F:PIOP 2

F:PIOP 0

C
A
P
4
C
A
P
2

I
O
C
2
I
O
C
0

F:PBC 0

F:PBC 1

F:PIOP 1

B
A
P
1
C
A
P
3

C
A
P
0

IOPG 2

C
A
P
1
I
O
C
1

BCMY 1

MUT03

MUT04

CMY 0

F:PIOP 3

F:DEV (F)

I
O
C
3

M
O
D
0

M
D
D
0

CMY 1

MUT06

MUT07

IOPG 1

MUT08

MUT09

IOPG 3

M
O
D
1
Fanbox

23
22

25
24

27
26

29
28

M
D
D
1

MUT10

MUT11

33

31
30

32

FU

Frame

Units

01

F:DEV (F)

MOD 0,
MDD 0

02

F:PIOP 2

CAP 4

03

F:PIOP 0

CAP 2

04

F:PIOP 2

IOC 2

05

F:PIOP 0

IOC 0

06

F:PIOP 2

M:LAUB

07

F:PIOP 0

M:LAUB

08

F:PIOP 2

IOPG 2

09

F:PIOP 0

IOPG 0

12

---

Fans
(MUT04)

13

F:PBC 0

BAP 0

14

F:PBC 0

CAP 0

15

F:PBC 0

BCMY 0

16

F:PBC 0

M:BCM 0

17

F:PBC 0

CMY 0

18

F:PBC 1

BAP 1

19

F:PBC 1

CAP 1

20

F:PBC 1

BCMY 1

21

F:PBC 1

M:BCM 1

22

F:PBC 1

CMY 1

23

F:PIOP 1

CAP 3

24

F:PIOP 3

CAP 5

25

F:PIOP 1

IOC 1

26

F:PIOP 3

IOC 3

27

F:PIOP 1

M:LAUB

28

F:PIOP 3

M:LAUB

29

F:PIOP 1

IOPG 1

30

F:PIOP 3

IOPG 3

31

---

Fanbox

32

---

Fans, optional
(MUT08)

33

F:DEV (F)

MOD 1,
MDD 1

MUT05

Fans
C
A
P
5

20

MUT02

IOPG 0

BCMY 0

18

MUT01

Fans
B
A
P
0

21

19

Fig. 3.15.16 Rack R:CP113C

PROC:CP113C/CR 20

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.14.2

ITMN - OFFLINE

Rack (R) for CP113 COMPACT RURAL


FU

01

FU

03
02

05
04

07
06

09
08

11
10

13
12

15
14

17
16

Fuse panel, AD:RAL

F:SMSC 0

F:PIOP 0

MUT04

IOPG 0

MUT03

Fans

F:PBC 0

F:PBC 1

B
A
P
0

BCMY 0

B
A
P
1

BCMY 1

MUT08

CMY 0

MUT05

CMY 1

MUT06

Fans
I
O
C
1

F:PIOP 1

F:DEV (F)

M
O
D
0

MUT09

IOPG 1

M
D
D
0

MUT07

M
O
D
1
Fanbox

20

MUT02

SMSC 1

I
O
C
0

18

MUT01

SMSC 0

F:SMSC 1

21

19

M
D
D
1

MUT10

23
22

25
24

27
26

29
28

33

31
30

32

FU

Frame

Units

01

F:DEV (F)

MDD 0,
MOD 0

02

F:SMSC 0

SMSC 0

04

F:SMSC 0

SMSC 0

05

F:PIOP 0

IOC 0

06

F:SMSC 0

SMSC 0

07

F:PIOP 0

M:LAUB

08

F:SMSC 0

SMSC 0

09

F:PIOP 0

IOPG 0

10

F:SMSC 0

SMSC 0

12

---

Fans
(MUT08)

14

F:PBC 0

BAP 0

15

F:PBC 0

BCMY 0

16

F:PBC 0

M:BCM 0

17

F:PBC 0

CMY 0

19

F:PBC 1

BAP 1

20

F:PBC 1

BCMY 1

21

F:PBC 1

M:BCM 1

22

F:PBC 1

CMY 1

23

F:SMSC 1

SMSC 1

25

F:SMSC 1

SMSC 1

26

F:PIOP 1

IOC 0

27

F:SMSC 1

SMSC 1

28

F:PIOP 1

M:LAUB

29

F:SMSC 1

SMSC 1

30

F:PIOP 1

IOPG 1

31

---

Fanbox

32

---

Fans
(MUT09)

33

F:DEV (F)

MDD 1,
MOD 1

MUT11

Fig. 3.15.17 Rack R:CP113 CE

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 21

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.15.15
3.15.15.1

Commissioning
System

Fuse Assignment
Fuse Assignment for R:CP113C
MUT

01

02

03

Frame

AD:RAL

F:PIOP(A)

F:PIOP(A)

FU

Plug
position
of supply
plug

Supplied
module

Mounting location of
the supplied module

Allocated unit

12

external devices, e.g.Tracer

31

external devices

02

C101

DCCMC

C101

CAP 4

04

C127

DCCMC

C127

IOC 2

06

C249

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

08

C337

DCCMC

C337

IOPG 2

03

C101

DCCMC

C101

CAP 2

05

C127

DCCMC

C127

IOC 0

07

C249

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

09

C337

DCCMC

C337

IOPG 0

F2 (-UE)

FAN

04

FAN

12

05

F:PBC(A)

13

C101

DCCMC

C101

BAP 0

14

C125

DCCMC

C125

CAP 0

15

C151

DCCMC

C151

BCMY 0

16

C159

M:BCM

C167

M:BCM0

17

C339

DCCMC

C339

CMY 0

18

C101

DCCMC

C101

BAP 1

19

C125

DCCMC

C125

CAP 1

20

C151

DCCMC

C151

BCMY 1

21

C159

M:BCM

C167

M:BCM1

22

C339

DCCMC

C339

CMY 1

23

C101

DCCMC

C101

CAP 3

25

C127

DCCMC

C127

IOC 1

27

C249

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

29

C337

DCCMC

C337

IOPG 1

F2 (-UE)

FAN

06

07

F:PBC(A)

F:PIOP(A)

08

FAN

32

09

F:PIOP(A)

24

C101

DCCMC

C101

CAP 5

26

C127

DCCMC

C127

IOC 3

28

C249

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

30

C337

DCCMC

C337

IOPG 3

Note: every fuse is 10 A

Tab. 3.15.3 Fuse Assignment R:CP113C

PROC:CP113C/CR 22

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

MUT

10

Frame

F:DEV(F)

FU

Plug
position
of supply
plug

Supplied
module

01

33

11

FANBOX

Mounting location of
the supplied module

Allocated unit

DCCDA

A056

MDD 0

DCCDA

A049

MOD 0

DCCDA

A122

MDD 1

DCCDA

A115

MOD 1

X22 (-UE)

FANBOX

31

Note: every fuse is 10 A

Tab. 3.15.3 Fuse Assignment R:CP113C

3.15.15.2

Fuse Assignment for R:DEVB


MUT

Equipment

FU

Ampere

04

MTD

05

10

07

MTD

02

10

10

DCIRC0

19

20

11

DCIRC1

20

20

Tab. 3.15.4 Fuse Assignment R:DEVB

3.15.15.3

Fuse Assignment to Fans


Rack
CP113C

Fuse

Fan in MUT

Remarks

12

04

Fan and external devices, e.g. HW tracer

32

08

Fan (if available)

31

11

Fan and external devices

Tab. 3.15.5 Fuse Assignment to fans

3.15.15.4

Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural)


MUT

01

Frame

AD:RAL

FU

Plug
position
of supply
plug

Supplied
module

Mounting location of
the supplied module

12

external devices

31

external devices

Allocated unit

Note: every fuse is 10 A

Tab. 3.15.6 Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 23

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

MUT

02

Frame

F:SMSC(C)

FU

Plug
position
of supply
plug

Supplied
module

Mounting location of
the supplied module

02

DCCCR

C101

SYP

04

DCCCR

C153

CCG-0

06

SYPD-0/1

08
10

C343

DCCDE

C259

MB-0

DCCMC

C343

SN-0

11
03

04

05

06

07

F:PIOP(A)

F:SMSC(C)

F:PBC(A)

F:PBC(A)

F:PIOP(A)

Allocated unit

ext. hooter/ ext.


Alarms

03

C101

DCCMC

C101

05

C127

C127

IOC-0

07

C249

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

09

C337

C337

IOPG-0

23

DCCCR

C101

CDEX

25

DCCCR

C153

CCG-1

27

DCCDE

C259

MB-1

29

C343

DCCMC

C343

SN-1

13

C101

DCCMC

C101

BAP 0

14

C125

DCCMC

C125

CAP 0

15

C151

DCCMC

C151

BCMY 0

16

C159

M:BCM

C167

M:BCM0

17

C339

DCCMC

C339

CMY 0

18

C101

DCCMC

C101

BAP 1

19

C125

DCCMC

C125

CAP 1

20

C151

DCCMC

C151

BCMY 1

21

C159

M:BCM

C167

M:BCM1

22

C339

DCCMC

C339

CMY 1

24

C101

DCCMC

C101

26

C127

DCCMC

C127

IOC 1

28

C249

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

30

C337

DCCMC

C337

IOPG 1

08

FAN

12

F2 (-UE)

FAN

09

FAN

32

F2 (-UE)

FAN

10

F:DEV(F)

01

DCCDA

A056

MDD 0

DCCDA

A049

MOD 0

DCCDA

A122

MDD 1

DCCDA

A115

MOD 1

X22 (-UE)

FANBOX

33

11

FANBOX

31

Note: every fuse is 10 A

Tab. 3.15.6 Fuse Assignment for R:CE (CP113 Compact Rural)

PROC:CP113C/CR 24

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.16

ITMN - OFFLINE

Memory Organization
Two different types of modules M:CMYM can be used in the CMY:
Serial Number

Memory capacity of a CMYM


module in Mbyte

..Q1256-X100

64

..Q1256-X200

128

Tab. 3.15.7 Memory organization

3.15.17

Sequence for Switching on the Modules in R:CP113C

3.15.17.1

Sequence for Switching on the Modules in R:CP113C

Fuse

MUT

Supplied module

Mounting location of
the supplied module

Allocated unit

Frame

16

05

M:BCM

C167

*)

PBC0

21

06

M:BCM

C167

*)

PBC1

15

05

DCCMC

C151

BCMY0

PBC0

20

06

DCCMC

C151

BCMY1

PBC1

17

05

DCCMC

C339

CMY0

PBC0

22

06

DCCMC

C339

CMY1

PBC1

05

03

DCCMC

C127

IOC0

PIOP

09

03

DCCMC

C337

IOPG0

PIOP

25

07

DCCMC

C127

IOC1

PIOP

29

07

DCCMC

C337

IOPG1

PIOP

07

03

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

PIOP

27

07

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

PIOP

Remark

Remark

Minimum
configuration

Parallel

Parallel

*) Note: The fuses for M:BCM supply the DCCs on board. These DCCs supply the clock generator on the module directly,
so that the clock generator is still able to work, even if the DCC of the corresponding BCMY is switched off or defective.
The LEDs of the modules M:BCM remain dark when these fuses are screwed in

Tab. 3.15.8 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CP113C

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 25

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Fuse

MUT

Supplied module

Mounting location of
the supplied module

Allocated unit

Frame

14

05

DCCMC

C125

CAP0

PBC0

19

06

DCCMC

C125

CAP1

PBC1

03

03

DCCMC

C101

CAP2

PIOP

23

07

DCCMC

C101

CAP3

PIOP

04

02

DCCMC

C127

IOC2

PIOP

08

02

DCCMC

C337

IOPG2

PIOP

26

09

DCCMC

C127

IOC3

PIOP

30

09

DCCMC

C337

IOPG3

PIOP

06

02

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

PIOP

28

09

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

PIOP

02

02

DCCMC

C101

CAP4

PIOP

24

09

DCCMC

C101

CAP5

PIOP

Remark

Remark

Extension

Parallel

Parallel

*) Note: The fuses for M:BCM supply the DCCs on board. These DCCs supply the clock generator on the module directly,
so that the clock generator is still able to work, even if the DCC of the corresponding BCMY is switched off or defective.
The LEDs of the modules M:BCM remain dark when these fuses are screwed in

Tab. 3.15.8 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CP113C

3.15.17.2

Sequence for Switching on the Modules in R:CE

Fuse

MUT

Supplied module

Mounting location of
the supplied module

Allocated unit

Frame

16

05

M:BCM

C167

*)

PBC0

21

06

M:BCM

C167

*)

PBC1

15

05

DCCMC

C151

BCMY0

PBC0

20

06

DCCMC

C151

BCMY1

PBC1

17

05

DCCMC

C339

CMY0

PBC0

22

06

DCCMC

C339

CMY1

PBC1

05

03

DCCMC

C127

IOC0

PIOP

09

03

DCCMC

C337

IOPG0

PIOP

26

07

DCCMC

C127

IOC1

PIOP

30

07

DCCMC

C337

IOPG1

PIOP

07

03

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

PIOP

28

07

M:LAUB

C153, C177, C199, C221

LAU

PIOP

Remark

Parallel

Parallel

*) Note: The fuses for M:BCM supply the DCCs on board. These DCCs supply the clock generator on the module directly,
so that the clock generator is still able to work, even if the DCC of the corresponding BCMY is switched off or defective.
The LEDs of the modules M:BCM remain dark when these fuses are screwed in

Tab. 3.15.9 Sequence for switching on the modules R:CE

PROC:CP113C/CR 26

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

3.15.18
3.15.18.1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Displays on Module Faceplates


Displays after Successful Hardware Start-up
Unit
B:CMY-0

B:CMY-1

CMY-0

Module
BCM

Display

LED

Remarks

MST

green

CG0

green if selected/red if not

CG1

green if selected/red if not.


one LED must be green, the other is automatically red

ILBS

green if the ILB is reset


red if the ILB is set

PIA

MST

green

PIA

MST

green

PIA

MST

green

PIA

MST

green

MTI

MST

green

BCM

MST

green

CG0

green if selected/red if not

CG1

green if selected/red if not


one LED must be green, the other is automatically red

ILBS

green if the ILB is reset


red if ILB is set

PIA

MST

green

PIA

MST

green

PIA

MST

green

PIA

MST

green

MTI

MST

green

CMYC

MST

green

ILB0

green if the ILB is reset to B:CMY0


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY0

ILB1

green if the ILB is reset to B:CMY1


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY1

CMYM0

MST

green

CMYM1

MST

green

CMYM2

MST

green

CMYM3

MST

green

Tab. 3.15.10 Displays after successful Hardware Startup

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 27

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Unit
CMY-1

BAP-0

Module

Display

CMYC

LED

Remarks

MST

green

ILB0

green if the ILB is reset to B:CMY0


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY0

ILB1

green if the ILB is reset to B:CMY1


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY1

CMYM0

MST

green

CMYM1

MST

green

CMYM2

MST

green

CMYM3

MST

green

PEX

Display at the MP
The sequence of the BAP master is described in the procedure
(DY A925 if manually booted with BAP-0)

BAP-1

PEX

Display at the MP
The sequence of the BAP master is described in the procedure
(DY A925 if manually booted with BAP-1)

IOC-0

IOC-1

IOP

PEX

PEX

IOP:TA

DY A385

Display at the MP (A1A5 is also possible)


MST

green

ILB0

green if the ILB is reset to the B:CMY0


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY0

ILB1

green if the ILB is reset to B:CMY1


red if ILB is set to B:CMY1

DY A385

Display at the MP (A1A5 is also possible)


MST

green

ILB0

green if the ILB is reset to the B:CMY0


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY0

ILB1

green if the ILB is reset to the B:CMY1


red if the ILB is set to B:CMY1

*******

* Time is displayed for approx. 5 mins. if the display key


is pressed

IOP:MB

IBREQ

green for a few minutes

IOP:UNI

MST

green

Tab. 3.15.10 Displays after successful Hardware Startup

3.15.19

Commands for Creating CAPs


List of CAPs and corresponding PBI-numbers

PROC:CP113C/CR 28

CR CAP:CAP=0,PBI=4;

CR CAP:CAP=1,PBI=6;

CR CAP:CAP=2,PBI=8;

CR CAP:CAP=3,PBI=9;

CR CAP:CAP=4,PBI=10;

CR CAP:CAP=5,PBI=11;

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Check the Basic State (Preparation) of Racks R:CP113C / R:DEVB / R:CE

Check the basic state of the racks R:CP113C / R:DEVB / R:CE


Ensure that the main fuses are unscrewed before starting the check
Measure the system voltage for each rack row at the last frame

The operational voltage is dependent upon the charging status of the batteries:
Tolerance range: -60V (-54V .... -71V)
Tolerance range: -48V (-45.6V ... -57V)
Is system voltage -60V (-48V) present?

Y h ... 3
N h ... 2

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance
After finishing special fault clearance

h ... 1

Switch off DCCs


Switch off all DCCs

Check Mechanical Layout


Check racks and module frames (R:CP113C / R:DEVB / R:CE) to see if any
parts are touching, or if there is any foreign material or transport damage.
Check that all modules and cables are firmly in place
If any transport damage or damaged seals have been detected, the rack layout
(R:CP113C and R:DEVB) / R:CE has to be checked against the equipment list.
Check the layout of the module frames and the standard cabling plan
Break module seal
Check connections between wire wrap field and chassis ground bus.
Check cabling against cable laying list A30808-A....-X...- * -33

Automatic Memory Setting

No manual memory setting is necessary for CP113C/CR.


An address decoder is loaded when the voltage is switched on via the CMY-FW.
This enables memory modules of the most differing level of component placement and DRAM layout to be mixed in a CMY.
The memory is distributed on one till four modules (M:CMYM0 - M:CMYM3).
Two different types of modules can be used:

...... 3.15.7)
(see Tab.

The CMY has no set BCMY connection number in the hardware. This is allocated with the RESET incode from BCMY during the system run-up, and stores
them in the RAM of the MC and in ASIC MFC.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 29

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Check Cabling of Fan Alarm Lines

......(see
Fig. 3.15.
8)
......(see
Fig. 3.15.
8)

Check cabling between AD:RAL and both IOP:TA


Check switches for activating the alarm inputs in AD:RAL

Test fans
Insert the following fuses (depending on the rack to be switched on) one after
the other and switch on the fans:
Rack

Fuse

Fan in MUT

Remarks

R:CP113C

FU 12

04

Fan and external devices e.g. HW Tracer

FU 32

08

Fan (if available)

FU 31

11

Fan and external devices

Rack

Fuse

Fan in MUT

Remarks

R:CE

FU 12

08

Fan and external devices e.g. HW Tracer

FU 32

09

Fan (if available)

FU 31

11

Fan and external devices

Y h ... 9
N h ... 8

Are the corresponding LEDs lit?

Special fault clearance


Carry out special fault clearance

h ... 7

After finishing special fault clearance

Basic State DCCs


Make sure that all DCCs of the CP113C/CR are switched off

10

Switch on DCCs

To prevent module damage and because of clock synchronization the module


frames are switched on in a special sequence:
Sequence for switching on the modules in R:CP113C

......(see
Tab.
3.15.8)

Sequence for switching on the modules in R:CE

......(see
Tab.
3.15.9)

Screw in the first (next) fuse (see table mentioned above).

PROC:CP113C/CR 30

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

The following system responses are possible, according to the fuse screwed in:

Fuse for M:BCM:


The DCCs on board of the corresponding module M:BCM are supplied with
system voltage but the LEDs on the module faceplate remain dark.

Fuse for DCCMC:


No system reaction until the corresponding DCC is switched on

Fuse for M:LAUB:


LEDs on the corresponding module M:LAUB light up

Switch on power with the switch on the assigned DCC module faceplates.
(Except for M:LAUB and M:BCM which are directly connected to the fuse)

The following system responses are possible, according to the module switched
on:

DCCMC:
Green LED on the module faceplate of the DCCMC lights up
The green LEDs of the DCCs for IOPG and IOC only light up if both
DCCMCs have been switched on

DCCMC for BCMY0:


Green LED on the module faceplate of the DCCMC lights up
LED on M:BCM in F:PBC0 lights green immediately

DCCMC for BCMY1:


Green LED on the module faceplate of the DCCMC lights up
LED on M:BCM in F:PBC1 lights yellow for approx. 5 sec. and then green

Does the LED of the module switched on light as shown in the preceding list?

11

Decision: Next Module


Are all units listed in the table in operation?

12

Y h ... 11
N h ... 12
Y h ... 22
N h ... 10

Fault Clearance
Switch off the voltage converter immediately and unscrew the assigned fuse

13

Check the Fuse for DCC


Is the corresponding fuse in the fuse panel defective?

14

Replace Fuse
Replace the fuse in the fuse panel

15

Y h ... 14
N h ... 15
h ... 10

Decision Block: DCC


Has the current converter already been replaced?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 17
N h ... 16

PROC:CP113C/CR 31

ITMN - OFFLINE

16

Commissioning
System

Replace DCC
Replace the DCC with spare DCC

h ... 10

Mark the replaced DCC as defective

17

Decision Block: Module

Y h ... 19
N h ... 18

Have all corresponding modules already been replaced?

18

Replace the Corresponding Modules


Replace modules of the affected unit successively by spare modules.

If the green LED of the DCC is still not lit after replacing a module, the spare
module has to be replaced with the original module again.

h ... 10

After each module replacement

19

Decision Block: Cable

Y i....NM:

Is a cable the next unit to be cleared of faults?

CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0050

N h ... 21
20

Decision Block

Y h ... 10
N h ... 21

Could the fault be cleared?

21

Special Fault Clearance


The fault could not be cleared by standard fault clearance measures. A system
specialist must carry out fault clearance.
After successful fault clearance

22

Information Block: SCSI Bus

The cabling of the complete SCSI bus is shown in

23

h ... 10

......(see 3.15.11)

Switch on Magnetic Tape Device


Branch to one of the following MTD procedures according to the MTD used:
Switching on MTD: STC 2925 of Storage Tek

i....PROC:

Switching on MTD: HP 88781 A of Hewlett Packard

i....PROC:

MTD:STC2925
MTD:HP
88781A

After successful MTD start-up, continue:

PROC:CP113C/CR 32

h ... 24

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

24

ITMN - OFFLINE

Check Cabling of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)

The following cabling of the MDDs has to be checked:

Correct connection of the power supply plug to the MDD

Correct connection of the SCSI-bus cabling to MDD

For MDD HP C2490A (2,1 GByte), check cabling according to:

...... Devices,
NM:CP MDDHP
C2490A
(2,1 GByte)

For MDD Quantum Atlas XP34550S (4,5 GByte), check cabling according to:

...... Devices,
NM:CP MDD
XP34550S
(4,5 GByte)

25

26

Check Switch Settings of Disk Storage Unit (MDD)


For MDD HP C2490A (2,1 GByte): check that switch settings are set according
to:

...... Devices,
NM:CP MDD

For MDD Quantum Atlas XP34550S (4,5 GByte): check that switch settings are
set according to:

...... Devices,
NM:CP MDD

HP C2490A
(2,1 GByte)

XP34550S
(4,5 GByte)

Check Cabling of MODs

Check the following cable connections of the MODs:

Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD

Correct attachment of the power supply plug to the MOD-fan

Correct attachment of the SCSI bus cabling

For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB) check cabling according to

...... Devices,
NM:CP MOD Sony
SMO-F531

For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6GB) check cabling according to

...... Devices,
NM:CP -

MOD Sony
SMO-F541

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:CP113C/CR 33

ITMN - OFFLINE

27

Commissioning
System

Check Settings of the MODs

Check the following settings of the operation mode plug of the MODs:

Check the setting to the correct SCSI address (SCSI-ID 2)

Check the correct jumper setting in the operation mode plug for deactivating
the internal terminating resistor (Depending on the SCSI devices connected)

For MOD Sony SMO-F531 (1,3 GB) check settings according to

......NM:CP
Devices,
MOD Sony
SMO-F531

For MOD Sony SMO-F541 (2,6GB) check settings according to

......NM:CP
Devices,

MOD Sony
SMO-F541

28

Screw in Fuse
Screw in fuse for MDD-0 and MOD-0
(One fuse supplies the DCCs of both devices)

29

Switch on MDD-0
Switch on DCC for MDD-0

......(see 3.15.15)
......(see 3.15.15)

LED of the DCC lights up


LED of the MDD lights up

30

Switch on MOD-0
Switch on DCC for MOD-0

......(see 3.15.15)

LED of the DCC lights up


MOD fan starts up
MOD-LED lights up shortly

31

Screw in Fuse
Screw in fuse for MDD-1 and MOD-1
(One fuse supplies the DCCs of both devices)

32

Switch on MDD-1
Switch on DCC for MDD-1

......(see 3.15.15)
......(see 3.15.15)

LED of the DCC lights up


LED of the MDD lights up

PROC:CP113C/CR 34

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

33

Switch on MOD-1
Switch on DCC for MOD-1

ITMN - OFFLINE

...... (see 3.15.15)

LED of the DCC lights up


MOD fan starts up
MOD-LED lights up shortly

34

Installation of PC

Information about the inverter:


The 230V outputs of the inverter (230V, 500 VA) are floating.
Before switching on the inverter one line of the 230V output has to be grounded.
Normally the grounding is already done by the manufacturer but has to be
checked again now.
Check / establish the correct grounding of the inverter
Switch on the inverter for the PC.
(To this inverter no further PCs can be connected)
Installation of the PC according to
After the PC has been installed and a CP session opened

35

...... 6)(see Fig. 3.15.


...... 7)(see Fig. 3.15.
...... BASIS
MMN:PC h ... 35

Connecting the Maintenance Panel

The Maintenance Panel (MP) can be connected in any order with up to three
units and the voltage supply of any unit of the CP113C/CR. An interference of
active units by a non-initialized MP is excluded.
Connect the Maintenance Panel to the voltage supply on the front panel plug of
any DCCMC voltage converter of the CP113C/CR.

After connecting the operating voltage to the MP, self-tests are first carried out
by the FW.
After a successful test the following text is displayed on the MP:
**************************
*
*
* MP:CP113C, FW xxxx
*
* Selftest OK !!
*
* -------------------- *
* Hit any key to start *
*
*
**************************

FW xxxx identifies the current firmware version


Has the self-test been terminated successfully?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 37
N h ... 36

PROC:CP113C/CR 35

ITMN - OFFLINE

36

Commissioning
System

Fault Clearance

......NM:
CP113C/CR,

Carry out fault clearance according to the instructions of the MP, given in

TAB

h ... 35

After finishing fault clearance

37

Diagnosis 0 CMY

The off-line diagnostics must be carried out on both CMYs one after the other.
Connect the maintenance panel via the front panel plug to the module M:BCM
of both BCMYs and to the M:CMYC module of the CMY to be tested.

The interface lock bits of the CMY to be tested must be set to both BCMYs as
follows.
Select BCMY0 with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "SILBM0" ("SILBM1") with the menu keys for setting the
interface lock bits to the CMY0 (CMY1).
Select BCMY1 with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "SILBM0" ("SILBM1") with the menu keys for setting the
interface lock bits to the CMY0 (CMY1).
The interface lock bits of the CMY0 (CMY1) are set to both BCMYs.
Select CMY with "SELECT UNIT" and enter the command "RESET" for the
CMY with the menu key.
The module is reset (otherwise the diagnostic command is ineffective).
Enter the command "DIAG0" for the CMY with the menu keys.
Diagnostics 0 is started (complete CMY diagnostics). The LED MST on module
M:CMYC flashes green. (Diagnostics ends after approx. 10 seconds, even if the
LED continues to flash).

The diagnostics result can be found in the fourth entry of the trace RAM.
Enter the command "TRINF" for the CMY with menu keys.
**************************
*
*
* CMYx < list > TRINF
*
* Show trace RAM
*
* FAILNR 4: 5AAA5AAA
*
* disp ---- ++++
end *
*
*
**************************

<- positive pattern after the diagnostics

Is "5AAA5AAA" displayed for FAILNR?

PROC:CP113C/CR 36

Y h ... 39
N h ... 38

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

38

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fault Clearance
Carry out fault clearance according to

i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB:CP053

After successful fault clearance

39

h ... 37

Diagnosis 2 CMY
Enter the "RESET" command for the CMY with the menu keys

The module is reset (otherwise the diagnostics command is ineffective)


Enter the "DIAG2" command for the CMY with menu keys (diagnostics of the
CMY memory medium)
Diagnostics 2 is started (diagnostics of the CMY memory medium). The LED
MST flashes green on module M:CMYC. (The diagnostics ends after approx. 10
secs., even if the LED continues to flash).

The diagnostics result can be found in the fourth entry of the trace RAM.
Enter the command "TRINF" for the CMY with menu keys.
**************************
*
*
* CMYx < list > TRINF
*
* Show trace RAM
*
* FAILNR 4: 5AAA5AAA
*
* disp ---- ++++
end *
*
*
**************************

<- positive pattern after the diagnostics

The diagnostics 2 can be restarted by repeatedly entering the DIAG2 command.


Diagnostics 3 can only be started if the diagnostics 2 has ended with faults.
Is "5AAA5AAA" displayed for FAILNR?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 41
N h ... 40

PROC:CP113C/CR 37

ITMN - OFFLINE

40

Commissioning
System

Diagnosis 3 CMY
Enter the "RESET" command for the CMY with the menu keys

The module is reset (otherwise the diagnostics command is ineffective)


Enter the "DIAG3" command for the CMY with menu keys
Diagnostics 3 is started (localizing the defect RAM chip). The LED MST flashes
green on the M:CMYC module. (The diagnostics ends after approx. 10 secs.,
even if the LED continues to flash).

The diagnostics result can be found in the fourth entry of the trace RAM.
Enter the command "TRINF" for the CMY with menu keys.
**************************
*
*
* CMYx < list > TRINF
*
* Show trace RAM
*
* FAILNR 4:
*
* disp ---- ++++
end *
*
*
**************************

<- Result after the diagnostics

i....NM:

Make an evaluation of the track numbers and carry out fault clearance
according to

CP113C/CR TAB:CP0053

h ... 41

After successful fault clearance

41

Reset Interface Lock Bits


Enter the "RESET" command for CMY with the menu keys
Select BCMY0 with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "RILBM0" ("RILBM1") with the menu keys for resetting the
interface lock bits to the CMY0 (CMY1).
Select BCMY1 with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "RILBM0" ("RILBM1") with the menu keys for resetting the
interface lock bits to the CMY0 (CMY1).
The interface lock bits of the CMY0 (CMY1) are reset again.

Y h ... 43
N h ... 42

Has the off-line diagnostics been carried out at both CMYs?

42

Decision Block: other CMY


Repeat CMY-diagnosis for other CMY (Carry out the details in parentheses)

PROC:CP113C/CR 38

h ... 37

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

43

ITMN - OFFLINE

Off-line Diagnostics IOC

Off-line diagnostics must be carried out for IOC0 and IOC1 as well as other
IOCs in case expansion module frames are available.
The command "NOTEST" switches off the supervisory circuit (comparator in the
M:PEX module). The command "NOTEST" can therefore only be used for test
purposes when fault clearing.
The command "RESET" releases an impulse in the RESET line.
The "DIAGP" command releases an impulse in the RESET and the BOOT line
which starts the processor diagnostics.
Connect the maintenance panel via the front panel plug of the M:PEX module
(plug position 700) with the IOC to be tested.
Select the IOC to be tested with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "RESET" for the IOC with the menu keys.
Enter the command "DIAGP" with the menu keys.
The off-line diagnostics is started. The LED MST on module M:PEX flashes
green.

" DY 3AAC" appears in the display of the maintenance panel


when the diagnostics has run fault-free.
Has DY 3AAC been displayed?

44

Fault Clearance
Make an evaluation of the track numbers and carry out fault clearance
according to
After successful fault clearance

45

Y h ... 45
N h ... 44
i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB:CP0052

h ... 45

Decision: Next IOC


Has the off-line diagnostics been carried out for all IOCs?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 46
N h ... 43

PROC:CP113C/CR 39

ITMN - OFFLINE

46

Commissioning
System

Off-line Diagnostics IOP:UNI

This off-line diagnostics must be carried out for all M:IOP:UNI modules.
The interfaces to the devices are not tested by the test program, but only the
IOP:UNI. This test includes all test/diagnostics programs which do not access
B:IOC.
The interfaces are only tested by the device tests so that in case there is a fault
only the device and not the IOP:UNI is taken out of service.
After the off-line diagnostics are carried out the IOP must be reset with RESET.

Connect the maintenance panel via the front panel plug with the M:IOP:UNI of
the IOP:UNI to be tested.
Select the IOP:UNI to be tested with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the command "RESET" with the menu keys.
IOP:UNI is reset
Switch to extended display on the MP by pressing the "disp" key.
Enter the command "DIAG" with the menu keys.
A short diagnostics procedure is started in the IOP:UNI

"NO FAULT FOUND" appears in the MP display.


If a fault has been found, the LED MST of the IOP:UNI lights red and a fault
message appears in full text in the MP display.
Has the off-line diagnostics been ended without faults?

47

Y h ... 48
N h ... 47

Fault Clearance
Evaluate the fault messages of the MP and clear faults accordingly.
After successful fault clearance

48

h ... 48

Reset IOP:UNI
Enter the "RESET" command for the IOP:UNI with the menu keys at the MP.
The IOP:UNI is reset.

PROC:CP113C/CR 40

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

49

ITMN - OFFLINE

Off-line Diagnostics IOP:TA

The IOP:TA must be inactive before starting off-line diagnostics.


This means that a value other than "AC" must be displayed in the status display
of the M:IOP:TA module.
Press the diagnostics key on the front panel of the M:IOP:TA module
until decimal points appear in the "Status" display.
Diagnostics is started (approx. 7 sec.)
"OF" appears in the "Status" display.
The progress of the diagnostics is shown in the display "Minutes" (00 - 9D)

"PU" or "IA" appears in the "Status" display after successful diagnostics (without
CCG the "CF" message appears). The "Hours" display must not indicate "FF".
Has the diagnostics ended without faults?

50

Y h ... 51
N h ... 50

Fault Clearance
Evaluate the display and carry out fault clearance according to

i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0054

After successful fault clearance

51

h ... 51

Decision: IOPAUC

The IOPAUC is only used in CP113C of AC (authentication center)


Is there at least one IOPAUC in use

52

Y h ... 52
N h ... 54

Off-line diagnostics of IOPAUC


Press the RESET key on the front panel of the IOPAUC module

The progress of the test is indicated via the LEDs of the IOPAUC
For evaluating the LED displays of the IOPAUC see

i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0054

Has the diagnostics ended without faults?

53

Y h ... 54
N h ... 53

Fault clearance
Carry out fault clearance according to

i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0054

After successful fault clearance

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 54

PROC:CP113C/CR 41

ITMN - OFFLINE

54

Commissioning
System

Prepare BAP Hardware Start-up


Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP-0 and BAP-1, if not already done

55

Information about BAP Hardware Start-up

The fuses for the voltage converters BAP0 and BAP1 must both be screwed in
before switching on the voltage converter.
After switching on the voltage converter there is a sequence of initializing and
test programs (HW start-up) in the individual processors).
The BAP where the power is switched on first becomes MASTER, but only on
condition that this BAP is fault-free. The MP should be connected to the BAP
master and the corresponding IOC before switching on the voltage converter,
because track numbers are used for displaying the boot status and are shown
on the MP display if the MP is connected.
For start-up with the APS, the following units have to be connected to a B:CMY
(is displayed by reset interface lock bits (LED ILB = green is displayed).

one BAP (ILB LED on module PEX)

one IOC (ILB LED on module PEX)

one CMY (ILB LED on module CMYC)

Ensure that one IOP:UNI (for the connection from MDD and PC) can be
reached via the IOC connected to the B:CMY, and that it has the status shown
in:

......(see
Tab.
3.15.10)

The BAP, which becomes MASTER, first formats both CMYs.


Display at the MP: " DY A885" for BAP master.
Then it initializes IOC0/1
Display at the MP: " DY A8A5",...," DY A8B5",...," DY A8C5" for BAP master'
When DY AB05 ( DY AD05) is displayed, the test APS is already being
loaded from one of the disks (MDD-0 or MDD-1).
Displays on the other module panels, or on the MP display after initialization (in
case no fault is found in the processors during the HW start-up):

56

......(see
Tab.
3.15.10)

Switch on BAP0 and BAP1


Screw in the fuses for the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1
Switch on DCCs for BAP0 and BAP1
Are the green LEDs on both DCC modules lit?

PROC:CP113C/CR 42

Y h ... 67
N h ... 57

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

57

ITMN - OFFLINE

Fault Clearance
Switch off the DCC on which the LED is not lit immediately and unscrew the
relevant fuse. After a successful test start-up, remove the fault from the defective unit with the test APS (provided a BAP can load the APS).
If only one BAP is defective, continue
If both BAPs are defective, the errors must be removed immediately

58

Check the Fuse for DCC


Is the corresponding fuse in the fuse panel defective?

59

h ... 56

Decision Block: DCC


Has the current converter already been replaced?

61

Y h ... 59
N h ... 60

Replace Fuse
Replace the fuse in the fuse panel

60

h ... 67
h ... 58

Y h ... 62
N h ... 61

Replace DCC
Replace the DCC with spare DCC
Mark the replaced DCC as defective

62

Decision Block: PEX


Has the corresponding PEX already been replaced?

63

h ... 56
Y h ... 64
N h ... 63

Replace PEX
Replace the corresponding PEX with spare module.
Mark the replaced module as defective

64

h ... 56

Decision Block: Cable


Is a cable the next unit to be cleared of faults?

Y i ... NM:
CP113C/CR,
TAB, CP0050

N h ... 66
65

Decision Block
Could the fault be cleared?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 56
N h ... 66

PROC:CP113C/CR 43

ITMN - OFFLINE

66

Commissioning
System

Special Fault Clearance


The fault could not be cleared by standard fault clearance measures. A system
specialist must carry out fault clearance.

h ... 56

After successful fault clearance

67

Decision: Start-up With test APS Possible

Y h ... 92
N h ... 68

Has the system been configured to allow start-up with the test APS?

68

69

Decision: Other BAP MASTER


If no start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has been attempted the startup has to be repeated with switching on the DCCs of BAP-0 and BAP-1 in a
different order

h ... 54

If a start-up with the other BAP as MASTER has already run through a
manual start-up must be attempted

h ... 69

Manual Start-up Part 1

It is best to carry out the manual recovery in the following way:

The access to the bus is taken from one of both BAPs. This can be best
achieved by switching off the processor.

Afterwards the BOOT key on the front panel of the M:BCM module allocated
to the other BAP must be pressed.

Only after successful installation is the BAP to be switched on again and


configured.

Switch off BAP-1 (BAP-0).


Activate the BOOT key on the front panel of the M:BCM module in the F:PBC0
for BAP-0 (F:PBC1 for BAP-1).

After switching on the voltage converter the initialization and test programs run
in the individual processor (HW recovery).
Track points which are shown on the MP display are used to display the boot
status. The MP also must be connected to the BAP master and the corresponding IOC before switching on the voltage converter.
The BAP-0 (BAP-1) becomes MASTER.

PROC:CP113C/CR 44

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

For start-up with the APS, the following units have to be connected to a B:CMY
(is displayed by reset interface lock bits (LED ILB = green is displayed).

one BAP (ILB LED on module PEX)

one IOC (ILB LED on module PEX)

one CMY (ILB LED on module CMYC)

Ensure that one IOP:UNI (for the connection from MDD and PC) can be
reached via the IOC connected to the B:CMY, and that it has the status shown
in:
Displays on the other module panels, or on the MP display after initialization (in
case no fault is found in the processors during the HW start-up):
Has the system been configured so that start-up with the test APS is possible?

70

71

...... 3.15.10)
(see Tab.
...... 3.15.10)
(see Tab.
Y h ... 71
N h ... 70

Decision: Manual Start-up with second BAP


Repeat manual start-up with second BAP, if not already done

h ... 69

If the manual start-up has already been attempted with the second BAP, offline diagnostics must be executed

h ... 87

Manual Start-up Part 2


IPL113: MANUAL START - CURRENT CONFIGURATION
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
IPL113: ENTER PARAMS
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE

: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX

Is the preceding message output?

72

Y h ... 77
N h ... 72

Decision: Check IOP:UNI / Cabling to PC


Have the device settings on module IOP:UNI and the cable connections to the
PC already been checked?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 73
N h ... 74

PROC:CP113C/CR 45

ITMN - OFFLINE

73

74

Commissioning
System

Decision: Manual Start-up with Second BAP


Repeat manual start-up with second BAP, if not already done

h ... 69

If the manual start-up has already been attempted with the second BAP, offline diagnostics must be executed

h ... 87

Check Cabling to PC
Check and if necessary replace connecting cable to the PC or change plug position

75

Check Device Data in the IOP:UNI


Connect the MP to the front panel of the M:IOP:UNI module.
Call up the IOP:UNI with the "SELECT UNIT" key.
Enter the "SHOWCF" command with the menu keys.
The device data of the IOP:UNI are displayed.

Y h ... 54
N h ... 76

Are the device data correctly set?

76

Modify Device Data in the IOP:UNI


Transmit the "CONFIG" command with the menu keys.
Modify or regenerate the device settings with the "mod" or "crea" keys.
After modifying the device settings, the modifications must be retrieved by
pressing the "ok" key.
(The configuration can be interrupted without any modification by pressing the
"end" key)
After modifying the device settings

PROC:CP113C/CR 46

h ... 54

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

77

ITMN - OFFLINE

Manual Start-up Part 3


Enter ; and press <ENTER>
IPL113: MANUAL START ENTER PARAMS
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO

START APS MANUALLY


:
START INSTALLAT.RECOV :
START UTILITY(MONITOR) :
STOP INITIAL START
:
START APS AUTOMATICALLY:

MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX

Enter MAN; and press <ENTER>


IOC-0 MDD : BZS/AKD AND GENERATION LIST
IOC-1 MDD : BZS/AKD AND GENERATION LIST

The current generation list is output:


xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
99999999

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

MANUAL RECOVERY - LOADING VIA IOC : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

Enter IOC-0; or IOC-1; and press <ENTER>


LOAD.DEV. - *MDD* -GENERATION TO LOAD :NAME; (8 CHAR)

Enter the current APS generation 8 characters (in APS documentation or at the
place marked 9999999 in the generation list printed out previously).
Enter 'Generation-No.' and press <ENTER>

If the APS version is unknown and cannot be found out, enter *. For safety
reasons this must be repeated 3 times after system enquiry.
MANUAL RECOVERY - LTG LOADING : Y;/N;

Enter "N;" and press <ENTER>

Manual start-up is initiated.


The track numbers to be run through which are shown in the MP display for the
BAP master are shown in block:

...... (see 55)

To make things clearer, only the headline is given for the system messages.
Wait for the following system message:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED

Was the manual start-up with the test APS successful?

78

Y h ... 78
N h ... 79

Second BAP
Switch on the second BAP again

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

h ... 94

PROC:CP113C/CR 47

ITMN - OFFLINE

79

Decision: Manual Start-up with other BAP


Has the manual start-up been attempted with another BAP?

80

Y h ... 81
N h ... 80

Boot Key
Repeat the entire sequence with the other BAP (Details in Parentheses)

81

Commissioning
System

h ... 69

Decision: Manual Start-up via IOC-1


Branch to one of the following blocks
Repeat manual start-up via IOC-1, if not already done
If manual start-up via IOC-1 has already been attempted

PROC:CP113C/CR 48

h ... 69
h ... 82

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

82

ITMN - OFFLINE

START / UTILITY

When working with the IMON, ensure that the PC can be reached via the IOC
specified in the Start Utility.
Switch off BAP-1 (BAP-0)
Press the BOOT key on the front panel of the M:BCM module in the F:PBC0 for
BAP-0 (F:PBC1 for BAP-1).
IPL113: MANUAL START - CURRENT CONFIGURATION
UNIT
STATUS
TEST
********************************************
BAP-0
ost
Test result
BAP-1
ost
Test result
B:CMY-0
ost
Test result
B:CMY-1
ost
Test result
CMY-0
ost
Test result
CMY-1
ost
Test result
IOC-0
ost
Test result
IOC-1
ost
Test result
IPL113: ENTER PARAMS
TO DIAGNOSE MEMORY
TO FORMAT
MEMORY
TO CONTINUE

: DIAG;
: FORMAT;
: ;ETX

If the preceding message did not appear

h ... 72

Enter ; and press <ENTER>


IPL113: MANUAL START ENTER PARAMS
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO

START APS MANUALLY


:
START INSTALLAT.RECOV :
START UTILITY(MONITOR) :
STOP INITIAL START
:
START APS AUTOMATICALLY:

MANUALLY;
INSTALLATION;
UTILITY;
STOP;
;ETX

Enter UTI; and press <ENTER>


UTILITY - RECOVERY - DEVICE - TYPE TO USE : MDD;/MTD;/MOD;

Enter MDD; and press <ENTER>


UTILITY - RECOV. - LOAD FROM MDD VIA : IOC-0;/IOC-1;

Enter IOC-0; or IOC-1; and press <ENTER>


PLEASE ENTER UTILITY - FILE - NAME

Acknowledge this message with SY.INSTALL


IMON : V0031 START
IMON : ENTER COMMAND

Was it possible to start IMON?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 84
N h ... 83

PROC:CP113C/CR 49

ITMN - OFFLINE

83

Commissioning
System

Fault Clearance

......NM:CP
Devices, MDD

Check connection of MDD to IOP:UNI according to

HP C2490A
(2,1 Gbyte)
Check switch settings and cable connections in the MDD against the manufacturer's documentation.

h ... 54

After successful fault clearance

84

Display Disk Contents


Display disk contents with the following commands:
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=010C01; (for MDD-0)
DISP MDDIR:DEVIN=030C01; (for MDD-1)

All disk files of MDD-0 (MDD-1) are displayed


Branch to one of the following blocks according to the files displayed

85

If all system files are present continue

h ... 85

If not all system files are present the files must be copied again from tape to
disk. System test with test APS must be omitted

h ... 98

Decision: BAP Off-line Diagnostics

Y h ... 86
N h ... 87

Have BAP off-line diagnostics been carried out?

86

Branch according to Off-line Diagnostics


If all off-line diagnostics have been terminated without error, one or more
system files have probably been destroyed. In this case the test with the test
APS must be omitted
Otherwise

PROC:CP113C/CR 50

h ... 98
h ... 9

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

87

ITMN - OFFLINE

Prepare BAP Off-line Diagnostics (Special Fault Clearance)

The off-line diagnostics must be carried out in both BAPs.


After connecting the MP at the front panel plug of the M:PEX module the off-line
diagnostics can be started with the command "DIAGP".
The test is made parallel, i.e. the test programs are processed synchronously in
both halves of the processor. The comparator between both halves which
causes a resetting of the processor in the case of disparity, is generally locked.
It is only released for special test stages. The comparison between the
processor halves runs via the software.
The processor is reset with the "RESET" command. (Impulse on the RESET
line)
The diagnostics is started with the "DIAGP" command. (Impulse on the RESET
and the BOOT line)
The register contents, not only the leading but also the current processor
halves, are displayed on the MP display.
The content of the diagnostics register is the same when PU-0 and PU-1 reach
the same result for an audit within a BAP.
Switch off the DCCs connected to BAP0/1
Connect the maintenance panel with BAP0 and BAP1 via the front panel plug of
the M:PEX module.
Switch on DCCs connected to BAP0/1
An initialization program runs in both BAPs
Does the display on the MP show " DY A435" for at least one BAP?

88

Y h ... 89
N h ... 88

Special Fault Clearance


Carry out special fault clearance according to

i ... NM:
CP113C/CR TAB, CP0052

After finishing special fault clearance

89

h ... 54

Start BAP Off-line Diagnostics


Select the BAP with the "SELECT UNIT" key for which "DY A435" was
displayed.
Transmit the "DIAGP" command with the menu keys for this BAP.
The off-line diagnostics are started. After the diagnostics have run fault-free "
DY 3AAC" is displayed.
Is DY 3AAC displayed?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 91
N h ... 90

PROC:CP113C/CR 51

ITMN - OFFLINE

90

Commissioning
System

Fault Clearance

i....NM:

Analyze the track numbers and clear faults using

CP113C/CR TAB, CP052

h ... 54

After successful fault clearance

91

Check Internal Cabling

The BAP(s) is/are OK. The fault is in the cabling between BAP-0/1 and BCMY0/1, or in the cabling between BCMY-0/1 and CMY-0/1 or in the CMY-0/1.
Check the internal cabling of the R:CP113C / R:CE against the cable laying list
If any faults have been found in the internal cabling, remove faults and
continue

h ... 54

If no faults have been found in the internal cabling, evaluate and clear faults
according to

i....NM:
CP113C/CRTAB, CP052

h ... 54

After successful fault clearance

92

Software Start-up with Test APS

The SW recovery begins as soon as the display on the MP for the BAP master
jumps from " DY Axx5" to " DY Bxx4". (xx - different track points of the recovery)
The following track points (among others) run trough:

DY Bx34
DY Bx54
DY Bx74
DY Bx94

or: DY Dxx2 or DY Exx1 (changes every 4 s)


(xx-arbitrary, with:
'Dxx2' the call processing load is shown in Erl.
'Exx1' the entire processor load in percent)
Have the track points shown above been run trough?

PROC:CP113C/CR 52

Y h ... 93
N h ... 69

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

93

ITMN - OFFLINE

System Messages

To make things clearer, only a headline is given for system messages.


If start-up with test APS was successful the following message is output:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED

Wait for system message


Branch to the following blocks according to the system reaction:
ALL DOUBLE FILES SYNCHRONIZED is displayed
Any other message is displayed
No message is displayed

94

h ... 94
h ... 69
h ... 74

Enter USER-ID and Password

USER-ID and password will be interrogated.


For the first OMT EWSD0 and for further OMTs EWSD1, EWSD2,
EWSD3 has to be entered as USER-ID.
The password is SYSTEM-1.
(All inputs in capital letters)
Enter USER-ID and password

95

Enter Date and Time

Enter date and time:

ENTR TIME:DATE=yy-mm-dd,TIME=hh-mm-ss,WD=xx;

Secure time:

CORR TIME:MODE=SECURE;

96

Check Fan Alarms


Switch off the individual fans in each fan module by the switches on the
modules. After about 5 secs. a system message must be output.

Caution:
Do not leave the fans switched off for longer than 5 mins. as racks warm up rapidly, endangering components.
System message fan alarm
Switch on fans again (do not wait for longer than 5 mins.)
Was it possible to generate this message from each fan module?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 98
N h ... 97

PROC:CP113C/CR 53

ITMN - OFFLINE

97

Commissioning
System

Fault Clearance: IOP:TA

Prerequisites:
Cabling between fans and AD:RAL / between AD:RAL and IOP:TA has been
controlled according to:

......(see
Fig. 3.15.
8)

Perform fault clearance of IOP:TA according to the MMN.

h ... 96

After finishing fault clearance

98

Install Hardware APS

The following is necessary before installing the hardware APS:

error-free configuration of CP113C/CR with the test APS

APS documentation

Observe the notes in the APS documentation supplied.


Note:
The APS installation is to be carried out according to procedure SW140 (if delivered on Tape) or according to procedure SW141 (If delivered on MOD).
Install the APS, using one of the following procedures (According to the medium
on which the APS is delivered).
For APS delivered on tape

h ...NM:SW,
PROC:SW140

For APS delivered on MOD

h ...NM:SW,
PROC:SW141

END

PROC:CP113C/CR 54

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.16

Switching on MTD STC 2925 of Storage Tek


MTD:STC2925

3.16.1

Introduction

The scope of delivery of the magnetic tape device STC 2925 of Storage Tek contains
a user manual: 2925 SCSI Maintenance Manual

MTD-fault clearance should only be carried out by especially trained personnel.

Check cabling to IOP:UNI


Check that interface cables to the IOP:UNI are connected according to

...... MTD:STC
NM:CP2925

Check switch settings


Open the door of MTD
Turn POWER switch at the front of the MTD to OFF
Unscrew the cover of MTD module frame (using special tool Torx 15) and
remove foam rubber in front of the modules.
Unplug the IF card of the MTD
Observe the EGB regulations

!
The switch settings must be checked or set according to

...... MTD:STC
NM:CP2925

Reconnect the IF card


Unplug the CS card of the MTD
Observe the EGB regulations

!
The switch settings must be checked or set according to

...... MTD:STC
NM:CP2925

Reconnect the CS card


Replace the foam rubber in front of the modules and screw on the cover of the
MTD module frame

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MTD_STC2925 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Switching on main supply switch/ cleaning tape path


Open the cover of the tape path
Before testing the MTD, cleaning must be carried out according to the instructions given in

......MMN:
CP113C/CRMAINT
MTD STC 2925

The cleaning should be recorded in a copy of the maintenance list which accompanies the MMN. The list should be attached to the door of the rack.

If the cover does not close tightly due to a physical defect, the magnetic tape will
not be automatically threaded. In this case spare catches must be obtained and
exchanged.

......MMN:
CP113C/CRMAINT
MTD STC 2925

Close the cover of the tape path


Switch on main supply switch at the rear of the MTD, if not already done

......NM:CPMTD:STC 2925

The location of the main supply switch is given in:

Switch on magnetic tape device

A short self-test is carried out after switching on the power. Operating or hardware faults are shown on the MTD display. An explanation of the fault numbers
is to be found on the inside of the MTD door, or in Section "2925 SCSI FCD
(Fault Code Dictionary 2925 with SCSI Interface) of the manual that is supplied.
The tape leader must be cleanly cut, i.e. not have a plastic threading end (cut off
with a special tool) as this prevents the tape from being guided when it is
threaded in. If automatic tape threading is not possible, e.g. at altitudes over
1.800m, it must be threaded by hand. Manual threading is started by pressing
the LOAD-REW key twice. The magnetic spool must be turned so that the tape
is inserted into the suction opening. If SHUT DOOR is displayed on the MTD,
ensure that the MTD door is properly closed.
Screw in fuse for MTD (in R:DEVB)
Close MTD door
Put POWER switch to ON position
If the self-test completes without finding a fault, - - - - is displayed.

PROC:MTD_STC2925 2

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

Diagnose magnetic tape device

The following inputs relate to the MTD keyboard


Open the MTD door
Insert a fault-free empty tape with a write enable ring, but do not load (Scratch
Tape)
Press <ENTER DIAG> enter '1 0' and then press <ENTER>

The last input starts the complete MTD device diagnostics. The magnetic tape is
automatically loaded after internal checks are carried out. Read/write tests with
both recording densities are then made. After a positive run the diagnostics end
with - - - - on the display. If there is a fault, a fault number is displayed. Details
about the cause of the fault together with fault numbers are listed in the STC
Manual, Section "2925 SCSI FCD (Fault Code Dictionary 2925 with SCSI Interface) . Fault clearance is explained in the section for Maintenance,
Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics in the STC Manual.
Is - - - - displayed after the diagnostics?

Y h ... 7
N h ... 6

Fault clearance
Carry out fault clearance as described in STC Manual, sections Maintenance,
Removal/Replacement, Diagnostics
After successful fault clearance

h ... 7

Check Tape
Open MTD door

The following test overwrites any files that may exist!


Press the door contact (below left) with a pen or any other suitable tool and hold
it down
Press <ENTER DIAG>, enter '47' and then press <ENTER>

The tape is written to with higher recording density 6250 BPI and read in the
READ AFTER WRITE MODE.
The following 2 system responses are possible:

If the magnetic tape is fault-free, it is wound back when the end-of-tape mark
(EOT) is recognized.

If the magnetic tape is faulty, 47B or 47C is shown in the MTD-Display


(In this case the tape cannot be used)

Is the tape fault-free?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 8
N h ... 9

PROC:MTD_STC2925 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Unload fault-free tape


Unload tape and remove it
Remove pen (or tool) from the door contact.
Close the MTD door
Return to calling procedure

Unload faulty tape


Rewind tape
Unload tape and remove it
Tape must not be used anymore
Remove pen (or tool) from the door contact.
Close the MTD door
Return to calling procedure

END

PROC:MTD_STC2925 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

3.17

Switching on the MTD HP 88781A of Hewlett Packard


MTD:HP 88781A

3.17.1

Introduction

The scope of delivery of the magnetic tape device HP88781A contains a user
manual: Tape Drive Users Guide.

MTD-fault clearance should only be carried out by especially trained personnel.

For fault clearance of the magnetic tape device a service manual, Part No.: 8878190030 can be obtained from HP.

The magnetic tape device has only two jumpers on the SCSI-interface module which
have to be set. All other settings can be input at the control panel.
The configuration data of the magnetic tape device can be saved on a magnetic tape
or can be read in from a save tape.
The device settings are stored in a non volatile memory. This memory is supplied by
a 3V battery on the buffer module.
(Lifetime of the battery approx. 10 years - type: BR 2335)

The magnetic tape is to be threaded manually

The door has to be closed after threading the magnetic tape

The tape is automatically wound to the beginning-of-tape mark and the MTD
switches to the ONLINE state

During ONLINE state the door is always locked

The door can be unlocked by pressing the RESET key (ONLINE-display is switched
off)

All inputs in the following procedure relate to the MTD keyboard

Check cabling to IOP:UNI


Check wether interface cables to the IOP:UNI are connected according to

...... MTD:HP
NM:CP-

Switch off power supply


Switch off power supply switch at the front of the MTD
Switch off power supply switch at the rear of the MTD

The location of the power supply switches is given in:

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

...... MTD:HP
NM:CP-

PROC:MTD_HP 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

Check/set jumper settings on SCSI-interface module


Unscrew the six screws (Torx 25) of the Interface module at the rear of the MTD
and take it out (Jumpers are located on the Interface module)
Use grounding strap (According to ESD regulations)

......NM:CPMTD:HP
......NM:CPMTD:HP

Check or set the settings of the two jumpers according to:


Mount the Interface module at the rear of the MTD again

Switch on power supply/clean tape path

......NM:CPMTD:HP
......NM:CPMTD:HP

Plug in Hubbel-plug (Power supply) at the rear of the MTD


Plug in Interface-cable (The fasten plug (grounding) is not plugged in for this
MTD)
Screw in MTD fuse

......NM:CPMTD:HP

Switch on power supply switch at the rear of the MTD


Open MTD door
Switch on power supply switch at the front of the MTD

......MMN:CP113MAINT

Clean tape path, instructions are given in:

MTD HP
The cleaning should be recorded in a copy of the maintenance list which accompanies the MMN. The list should be attached to the door of the rack.

Check Device-Address

(The Device-Address (SCSI-ID) has to be set to 4)

Press RESET key


Display: READY

Press OPTION key


Display: TEST *

b
b

Press NEXT key until ID * is displayed


Press ENTER key
Display: ID 4

ID 4 indicates, that ID is set to 4


Has ID 4 been displayed?

PROC:MTD_HP 2

Y h ... 7
N h ... 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

6
b
b

ITMN - OFFLINE

Set Device-Address
Press NEXT or PREV key until 4 is displayed
Press ENTER key
Display: SET 4

Press OPTION key


Display: READY

Information block: Configuration data

The device settings are stored in a non volatile memory. This memory is
supplied by a 3V battery on the buffer module.
(Lifetime of the battery approx. 10 years - type: BR 2335)
The configuration data of the MTD are already adapted to the system for
delivery of the complete EWSD-exchange.
In case a magnetic tape device has to be replaced, the configuration data can
be saved to a save tape beforehand.
This save tape must for safety reasons be set up directly at the time of the
system initial switch on.

Load magnetic tape to save the configuration data


Load a small magnetic tape to save the configuration data and close the door.
Tape will be positioned to the beginning-of-tape mark (BOT), MTD switches to
ONLINE
Has the tape already been configured to save the configuration data?

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Y h ... 10
N h ... 9

PROC:MTD_HP 3

ITMN - OFFLINE

9
b
b
b
b

Commissioning
System

Prepare save tape for configuration data (Test 150)


Press RESET key
Press OPTION key
Press NEXT key until TEST * is displayed
Press ENTER key
Display: TEST 0 (number 0 is blinking)

b
b

Press NEXT or PREV key until 150 is displayed


Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *

Press ENTER key


Display: A 6250 (Number 6250 is blinking indicating the recording
density)

Press ENTER key


Display: RUN 150 (After termination PASS 150)

Magnetic tape has been written to with recording density of 6250 BPI and
rewound

Press OPTION key


Display: BOT

10
b
b

Saving configuration data (Test 128)


Press OPTION key
Press NEXT key until TEST * is displayed
Display: TEST *

Press ENTER key


Display: TEST 0 (Number 0 is blinking)

b
b

Press NEXT or PREV key until 128 is displayed


Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *

Press ENTER key


Display: RUN 128 (After termination PASS 128)

Magnetic tape has been written to

Press OPTION key


Display: IDLE

Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is rewound)


Display: BOT

Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is completely rewound)


Display: UNLOAD, READY

Unload tape, label and store it

PROC:MTD_HP 4

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

11

ITMN - OFFLINE

Off-line-Diagnosis of magnetic tape device (Test 1)


Open MTD-door
Insert a fault-free empty tape with write enable ring (Scratch Tape)

A small magnetic tape is sufficient for the diagnosis, because the time for the
diagnosis increases with the tape length.
Close MTD door. (Tape is loaded, door is locked, MTD switches to ONLINE)

b
b

Press RESET key (Display ONLINE switched off)


Press OPTION key and select the Function TEST * with the NEXT key (if TEST
* is not displayed automatically)
Display: TEST *

Press ENTER key


Display: TEST 0 (Number 0 is blinking)

b
b

Select Number 1 with NEXT key (Test 1)


Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *

Press ENTER key


Display: RUN xyz (Test-Numbers)

The following system reactions are possible:


Display: PASS 1
Display: FAIL 1

12
b

h ... 12
h ... 13

Off-line-Diagnosis was successful


Press OPTION key
Display: BOT

Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is completely rewound)


Unload test tape

13
b

h ... 14

Off-line-Diagnosis was faulty


Press ENTER key. Alternately the error number and the test number are
displayed. e.g.:
Display: ERR 78 und TEST 165

(The fault number and the test number must be written down)
Fault clearance on site should only be carried out by trained O&M personnel.
(faults can also be caused by a defective magnetic tape)

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MTD_HP 5

ITMN - OFFLINE

Commissioning
System

For hints for fault clearance refer to:

NM:CP113C-MTD:HP

HP Service Handbook, chapter 8

Press OPTION key


Display: IDLE

Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is rewound)


Display: BOT

Press REW/UNLD key (Tape is completely rewound)


Unload test tape

14

Test magnetic tape (Test 2)

The quality of magnetic tapes can be tested with the magnetic tape device.
(Off-line diagnosis, test 2)
The following test overwrites any files that may exist!
The test takes about 23 minutes for a magnetic tape of 730 m (big reel)
Load magnetic tape which is to be tested (With write enable ring)
Close door - Tape is loaded

b
b

Press RESET key (Display ONLINE is switched off)


Press OPTION key and select the Function TEST * by pressing the NEXT key (If
TEST * is not automatically displayed)
Display: TEST *

Press ENTER key


Display: TEST 0 (Number 0 is blinking)

b
b

Select Number 2 by pressing NEXT key (Test 2)


Press ENTER key
Display: ONCE *

Press ENTER key


Display: RUN xyz (Test-Numbers)

The magnetic tape is tested with recording modes GCR (Group Code Recording
6250 CPI) and PE (Phase Encoded 1600 CPI).
The following 2 system reactions are possible:
PASS 2 (Magnetic tape is error-free)
FAIL 2 (Magnetic tape is faulty)

15

h ... 15
h ... 16

Unload fault-free tape


Unload tape and remove it
Close the MTD door
Return to calling procedure

PROC:MTD_HP 6

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

16

ITMN - OFFLINE

Unload faulty tape


Rewind tape
Unload tape and remove it
Tape should not be used anymore
Close the MTD door
Return to calling procedure

END

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

PROC:MTD_HP 7

ITMN - OFFLINE

PROC:MTD_HP 8

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

4 Tables
This register remains free for editorial reasons.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

TABIN 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

TABIN 2

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

Commissioning
System

ITMN - OFFLINE

5 Appendix (APP)
This register remains free for editorial reasons.

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630

APP 1

ITMN - OFFLINE

APP 2

Commissioning
System

A30808-X3063-A403-2-7630